C182S Poh

Textr
182S Skylane
182StM
NOTICE
AT THE TIME OF ISSUANCE, THIS

INFORMATION MANUAL WAS AN EXACT
DUPLICATE OF THE OFFICIAL PILOT'S
OPERATING HANDBOOK AND FAA
APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL
AND IS TO BE USED FOR GENERAL
PURPOSES ONLY.
IT WILL NOT BE KEPT CURRENT AND,

THEREFORE, CANNOT BE USED AS A
SUBSTITUTE FOR THE OFFICIAL PILOT'S
OPERATING HANDBOOK AND
FAA
INTENDED FOR OPERATON OF THE
AIRPLANE.
CESSNA AIRCRAFT COMPANY

ORGINAL ISSUE .3 FEBRUARY 1997
FebS/97
PERFORMANCE. CESSNA
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL 182S
PERFORMANCE - SPECIFICATIONS
* SPEED
Maximum at Sea Level 145 KTS
Cruise, 80% Power at 6000 Ft (Best Power Mixture) 140 KTS
CRUISE: Recommended lean mixture with fuel allowance for
engine start, taxi, takeoff, climb and 45 minutes
reserue.
71"/oPower at 6000 Ft Range 820 NM
88 Gallons Usable Fuel Time 6'05 HRS
Max Range at 10,000 Fl,55o/o Power Range 968 NM
88 Gallons Usable Fuel Time 8.05 HRS
RATE OF CLIMB AT SEA LEVEL: 924 FPM
SERVICE CEILING: 18,100 FT
TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE:
Ground Roll 795 FT
Total Distance Over 50 Ft. Obstacle 1514 FT
LANDING PERFORMANCE:
Ground Roll 590 FT
Total Distance Over 50 Ft. Obstacle 1350 FT
STALL SPEED (KCAS):
Flaps Up, Power Otf 54 KCAS
Flaps Down, Power Off . . 4s KCAS
MAXIMUM WEIGHT:
Ramp 3110 LBS
Takeotf 31OO LBS
Landing 2950 LBS
STANDARD EMPTY WEIGHT: 1 925 LBS
MAXIMUM USEFUL LOAD: 1 185 LBS
BAGGAGE ALLOWANCE: 2OO LBS
Nov 15/00
CESSNA PERFORMANCE-
MODEL 182S SPECIFICATIONS
PER FOR MAN C E.SPECI FICATIONS

(Continued)
WING LOADING: Lbs/Sq Ft 17.8

POWER LOADING Lbs/HP 13.5
FUEL CAPACITY 92 GAL
OIL CAPACITY 9 QTS
ENGINE: Textron Lycoming |O-540-AB1A5
230 BHP at 2400 RPM
PROPELLER: Diameter - 3-Blade
Diameter - 2-Blade ; iill
NOTE
*Speed performance and range are shown for an airplane
equipped with optional speed fairings which increase the
speeds by approximately 3 knots. All other performance
when speed fairings are removed.
based on a 2-bladed propeller. I
3-blade propeller is essentially the
I
The above performance figures are based on the indicated

weights, standard atmospheric conditions, level hard'surface
dry runways and no wind. They are calculated values derived
from flight tests conducted by the Gessna Aircraft Company
under carefully documented conditions and will vary with
individual airplanes and numerous other factors affecting flight
performance.
Dec 1/97 iii/(iv blank)

lnformation Manual
Cessna Aircraft Company
Model 182S
THIS MANUAL INCORPORATES INFORMATION ISSUED

THRU REVISION 04 TO THE PILOTS OPERATING
HANDBOOK AND FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT
MANUAL DATED 3 FEBRUARY 1997.
Q uenaerofGAMA
COPYRIGHT@ 1997
The Cessna Aircraft Company
Wichita, Kansas USA
P/N: 182SlM
Nov 1/01 v/(viblank)

CESSNA
MODEL 182S TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
GENERAL 1
LIMITATIONS 2
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 3
NORMAL PROCEDURES 4
PERFORMANCE 5
WEIGHT & BALANCE/EQUIPMENT LIST 6
ARPLANE & SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION 7
HANDLING, SERVICE & MAINTENANCE I

SUPPLEMENTS I
Feb 3/97 vii/(viiiblank)

CESSNA SECTION 1
MODEL 182S GENERAL
SECTION 1
GENERAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page
Three View - Normal Ground Attitude 1-2

lntroduction 1-4
Descriptive Data 1-4
Engine 1-4
Propeller (2-Bladed) 1-4
Propeller (3-Bladed) 1-4
Fuel 1-5
oit 1-6
Maximum Cefi if icated Weights 1-7
Standard Airplane Wei ghts
Cabin And Entry Dimensions
Baggage Space and Entry Dimensions
iit
1-7
Specific Loadings 1-7
Symbols, Abbreviations and Terminology 1-8
GeneralAirspeed Terminology And Symbols . . . 1-8
MeteorologicalTerminology 1-9
Engine Power Terminology 1-9
Airplane Performance And Flight Planning Terminology 1-10
Weight And Balance Terminology . . . 1-11
Metric / lmperial/ U.S. Conversion Charts 1-13
Weight Conversions 1-14
Length Conversions 1-16
Distance Conversions 1-20
Volume Conversions 1-21
Temperature Conversions 1-24
Volume to Weight Conversions 1-25
Quick Conversions 1-26
Nov 15/00 1-1

SECTION 1 CESSNA
GENERAL MODEL 182S
0785T1 001
0785T1 001
Figure 1-1. Three View - Normal Ground Attitude (Sheet 1 ol2)
1-2 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 1
MODEL 182S GENERAL
NOTE 1: WING SPAN SHOWN WITH STANDARD STROBE

LIGHTS INSTALLED.
NOTE 2: NORMAL GROUND ATTITUDE IS SHOWN WITH

NOSE STRUT SHOWING APPROXIMATELY 2" OF
STRUT, AND WINGS LEVEL.
NOTE 3: WHEEL BASE LENGTH lS 661/z'.
NOTE 4: PROPELLER GROUND CLEARANCE IS 1O ".
NOTE 5: WING AREA IS 174 SQUARE FEET.
NOTE 6: MtNtMUM TURNTNG RADTUS (.ptVOT potNT TO

oUTBoARD W|NG TtP) tS 27', - 0".
0785T1001
Figure 1-1. Three View - Normal Ground Attitude (Sheet 2 of 2)
Feb 3197 1-3

SECTION 1 CESSNA
GENERAL MODEL 182S
INTRODUCTION
This handbook contains 9 sections, and includes the material
required to be furnished to the pilot by FAR Part 23' lt also contains
supplemental data supplied by The Cessna Aircraft Company.
Section 1 provides basic data and information of general interest'

It also contains definitions or explanations of symbols,
abbreviations, and terminology commonly used.
DESCRIPTIVE DATA
ENGINE
Number of Engines: 1.
Engine Manufacturer: Textron Lycoming.
Engine Model Number: lO-540-AB1 45.
Engine Type: Normally aspirated, direct drive, air-cooled,
- horizontally opposed, fuel injected, six cylinder engine with
541 cu. in. displacement.
Horsepower Rating and Engine Speed: 230 rated BHP
at 2400 RPM.
PROPELLER (2-Bladed)
Propeller Manufacturer: Mc0auley Propeller Systems.
Propeller Model N umber: B.2D34C235/90DKB-8'
Number of Blades: 2.
Propeller Diameter: 82 inches.
Propeller Type: Constant speed and hydraulically actuated, wlth .a
low'pitch stting of 17.0' and a high pitch setting of 31.8' (30 inch
station).
PROPELLER (3-Bladed)
Propeller Manufacturer: McOauley Propeller Systems.
Propeller Model Number: 83D36C431/80VSA-1.
Number of Blades: 3.
Propeller Diameter: 79.0 inches.
Propeller Type: Constant speed and hydraulically actuated, wlth.a
low pitch stting of 14.9' and a high pitch setting of 31.7' (30 inch
station).
1-4 Dec 1197

CESSNA SECTION 1
MODEL 182S GENERAL
FUEL
[, wnnrrruo
USE OF UNAPPROVED FUELS MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGE TO THE ENGINE AND FUEL SYSTEM
COMPONENTS, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
ENGINE FAILURE.
Approved FuelGrades (and Colors):

100LL Grade Aviation Fuel (Blue).
100 Grade Aviation Fuel (Green).
NOTE
lsopropyl alcohol or diethylene glycol monomethyl ether

(DiEGME) may be added to the fuel supply. Additive
concentrations shall not exceed 17" lor isopropyl alcohol or
0.10% to 0.15% for D|EGME. Refer to Section I for
additional information.
FuelCapacity:
TotalCapacity: 92.0 U.S. gallons.
Total Usable: 88.0 U.S. gallons.
Total Capacity Each Tank: 46.0 U.S. gallons.
Total Usable Each Tank: 44.0 U.S. gallons.
NOTE
To ensure maximum fuel capacity and minimize cross-

feeding when refueling, always park the airplane in a wings-
level, normal ground attitude and place the fuel selector in
the Left or Right position. Refer to Figure 1-1 for normal
ground attitude dimensions.
Nov 15/00 1-5

SECTION 1 CESSNA
GENERAL MODEL 182S
olL
Oil Specification:
MiL-L-6082 Aviation Grade Straight Mineral Oil: Used when the
airplane was delivered from the factory and should be used to
replenish the supply during the first 25 hours. This oil should be
drained and the filter changed after the first 25 hours of operation.
Refill the engine with MIL-L-6082 Aviation Grade Straight Mineral
Oil and contiue to use until a total of 50 hours has accumulated or
oil consumption has stabilized.
MIL-L-22851 Aviation Grade Ashless Dispersant Oil: Oil

conforming to Textron Lycoming Seruice lnstruction No 1014' and
all revisios and supplements thereto, must be used after first 50
hours or once oil consumption has stabilized.
Recommended Viscosity for Temperature Range:
Temperature MtL-L-6082 MIL-L-22851

SAE Grade Ashless Dispersant
SAE Grade
{bove 27'C (80'F) 60 60
\bove 16"C (60"F) 50 40 or 50
1 "C (30'F) to 32"C (90'F) 40 40

-18'C (0"F) to 21'C (70"F) 30 30. 40 or 20W-40
3elow -12"C (10'F) 20 30 or 20W-30

-18'C (0"F) - 32'C (90'F) 20w-50 20W-50 or 15W-50
All Temoeratures 15W-50 or 2OW-50
NOTE
When operating temperatures overlap, use the lighter grade

of oil.
OilCapacity:
Sump: I U.S. Quarts

Total: I U.S. Quarts
1-6 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 1
MODEL 182S GENERAL
MAXIMUM CERTIFICATED WEIGHTS
Ramp Weight : 3110 lbs.

Takeoff Weight: 3100 lbs.
Landing Weight : 2950 lbs.
Weight in Baggage Compadment, NormalCategory:
Baggage Area A (Station 82 to 109): 120 lbs. See note below.

Baggage Area B (Station 109 to 124): 80 lbs. See note below.
Baggage Area C (Station 1241o 134): 80 lbs. See note below.
NOTE
The maximum allowable combined weight capacity for

baggage in areas A, B and C is 200 pounds. The maximum
allowable weight capacity for baggage in areas B and C is 80
pounds.
STANDARD AIRPLANE WEIGHTS
Standard Empty Weight: 1925 lbs. I

Maximum Useful Load, Normal Category: 1185 lbs. I
CABIN AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS
Detailed dimensions of the cabin interior and entry door openings

are illustrated in Section 6.
BAGGAGE SPACE AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS
Dimensions of the baggage area and baggage door opening are

illustrated in detail in Section 6.
SPECIFIC LOADINGS
Wing Loading: 17.8|bs./sq. ft.

Power Loading: 13.5 lbs./hp.
Nov 15/00 1-7
.- j
SECTION 1 CESSNA
GENERAL MODEL 182S
SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

GENERAL AIRSPEED TERMINOLOGY AND SYMBOLS
Knots Calibrated Airspeed is indicated airspeed

corrected for position and instrument error and
expressed in knots. Knots calibrated airspeed is equal
to KTAS in standard atmosphere at sea level.
KIAS Knots lndicated Airspeed is the speed shown on the

airspeed indicator and expressed in knots.
KTAS Knots True Airspeed is the airspeed expressed in

knots relative to undisturbed air which is KCAS
corrected for altitude and temperature.
V Maneuvering Speed is the maximum speed at

which full or abrupt control movements may be used.
Vre Maximum Flap Extended Speed is the highest

speed permissible with wing flaps in a prescribed
extended position.
vruo Maximum Structural Cruising Speed is the speed

that should not be exceeded except in smooth air,
then only with caution.
vrue Never Exceed Speed is lhe speed limit that may not
be exceeded at any time.
Vs Stalling Speed or the minimum steady flight

speed is the minimum speed at which the airplane is
controllable.
Vso Stalling Speed or the minimum steady flight

speed is the minimum speed at which the airplane is
controllable in the landing configuration at lhe most
forward center of gravity.
1-8 Feb 3197

CESSNA SECTION 1
MODEL 182S GENERAL
V Best Anql+of-Climb Soeed is the soeed which re-

sults in te greatest gain of altitude ih a given hori-
zontaldistane.
Vy Best Rate-of-Glimb Speed is the speed which

results in the greatest gain in altitude in a given time.
METEOROLOGICAL TERMINOLOGY
OAT Outside Air Temperature is the free air static

temperature. lt may be expressed in either degrees
Celsius or degrees Fahrenheit.
Standard Standard Temperature is 15'C at sea level

Temperature pressure altitude and decreases by 2"C for each
1000 feet of altitude.
Pressure Pressure Altitude is the altitude read from an

Altitude altimeter when the altimeter's barometric scale has
been set lo 29.92 inches of mercury (1013 mb).
ENGINE POWER TERMINOLOGY
BHP Brake Horsepower is the power developed by the

engine.
RPM Revolutions Per Minute is engine speed.
Static Static RPM is engine speed attained during a full

RPM throttle engne runup when the airplane is on the
ground and stationary.
MP Manifold Pressure is a pressure measured in the

engine's induction system and is expressed in
inches of mercury (in Hg).
Feb 3/97 1-9
-.-:
SECTION 1 CESSNA
GENERAL MODEL 182S
AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE AND FLIGHT PLANNING

TERMINOLOGY
Demon- Demonstrated Crosswind Velocity is the velocity

strated of the crosswind component for which adequate
Crosswind control of the airplane during takeoff and landing
Velocity
- was actually demonstrated during certification tests.
The value shown is not considered to be limiting.
Fuel Usable Fuel is the fuel available for flight planning'

Usable
Unusable Unusable Fuel is the quantity of fuel that can not be

Fuel safely used in flight.
GPH Gallons Per Hour is the amount of fuel consumed

oer hour.
NMPG Nautical Miles Per Gallon is the distance which can

be expected per gallon of fuel consumed at a
specif i engine power setting and/or f light
configuration.
g g is acceleration due to gravitY'
Course Course Datum is the compass reference used by the

Datum autopilot, along with course deviation, to provide
lateral controlwhen tracking a navigation signal.
1-10 Feb 3197

CESSNA SECTION 1
MODEL 182S GENERAL
WEIGHT AND BALANCE TERMINOLOGY
Reference Reference Datum is an imaginary vertical plane from

Datum which all horizontal distances are measured for
balance purposes.
Station Station is a location along the airplane fuselage given

in terms of the distance from the reference datum.
Arm Arm is the horizontal distance from the reference

datum to the center of gravity (C.G.) of an item.
Moment Moment is the product of the weight of an item

multiplied by its arm. (Moment divided by the conslant
1000 is used in this handbook to simplify balance
calculations by reducing the number of digits.)
of
Center Center of Gravity is the point at which an airplane, or
Gravity equipment, would balance if suspended. lts distance
(C.G.) from the reference datum is found by dividing the
total moment by the total weight of the airplane.
c.G. Center of Gravity Arm is the arm obtained by
Arm adding the airplane's individual moments and dividing
the sum by the totalweight.
c.G. Center of Gravity Limits are the extreme center of

Limits gravity locations within which the airplane must be
operated at a given weight.
Standard Standard Empty Weight is the weight of a standard

Empty airplane, including unusable fuel, full operating fluids
Weight and full engine oil.
Basic Empty Basic Empty Weight is the standard empty weight

Weight plus the weight of optional equipment.
Useful Load Useful Load is the difference between ramp weight

and the basic empty weight.
MAC MAC (Mean Aerodynamic Chord) is a chord of an

imaginary rectangular airfoil having the same pitching
moments throughout the flight range as that of the
actualwing.
Feb 3197 1-11

SECTION 1 CESSNA
GENERAL MODEL 182S
Maximum Maximum Ramp Weight is the maximum weight

Ramp approved for ground maneuver, and includes the
Weight weight of fuel used for start, taxi and runup.
Maximum Maximum Takeoff Weight is the maximum weight

Takeoff approved for the start of the takeoff roll.
Weight
Maximum Maximum Landing Weight is the maximum weight

Landing approved for the landing touchdown.
Weight
Tare Tare is the weight of chocks, blocks, stands, etc.

used when weighing an airplane, and is included in
the scale readings. Tare is deducted from the scale
reading to obtain the actual (net) airplane weight.
1-12 Feb 3197

CESSNA SECTION 1
MODEL 182S GENERAL
METRIC / IMPERIAL / U.S. CONVERSION CHARTS
The following charts have been provided to help international

operators conveft U.S. measurement supplied with the Pilot's
Operating Handbook into metric and imperial measurements.
The standard followed for measurement units shown, is th

National lnstitute of Standards Technology (NIST), Publication 811
"Guide for the Use of the lnternational System of Units (Sl)."
Please refer to the following pages for these charts.
Nov 15/00 1-13

SECTON 1 CESSNA
GENERAL MODEL 182S
(Kilograms x2.205 - Pounds) (Pounds x.454 = Kilograms)
i KILOGRAM-S INTO POUNDS
kg U 1 2 J 4 5 o 7 I I
lb. b o o o. b D o o
0 2.205 4.409 6.614 8.819 1 1.023 13.228 1s.432 17.637 19.842

10 22.046 24.251 26.456 28.660 30.865 33.069 35.274 37.479 39.683 41.888
20 14.093 46.297 48.502 50.706 52.91 1 55.1 1 6 57.320 59.525 61.729 63.934
30 66.139 68.343 70.548 72.753 74.957 77.162 79.366 81.571 83.776 85.980
103.62 105.82 '108.03
40 88.185 90.390 92.594 94.759 97.003 99.208 101.41
n 110.23 112.44 114.64 116.85 119.05 121.25 123 46 125.66 127.87 130.07
60 '132.28 134.48 136.69 138.89 141.10 143.30 145.51 147.71 149.91 't52.12
167.55 169.76 't 71 .96 174.17
70 154.32 156.53 158.73 160.94 1 63.1 4 165.35
80 176.37 '178.57 180.78 182.98 185.19 187.39 189.60 191.80 194.01 196.21
90 '198.42 200.62 202.83 205.03 207.24 209.44 211.64 213.85 216.05 218.26
100 220.46 222.67 224.87 227.O8 229.24 231.49 233.69 235.90 238 10 240.30
POUNDS INTO KILOGRAMS
b o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I 9
kg kg kg Kg t(g Kg Kg Kg Kg kg
0 o.454 0.907 1.361 1 .814 z. 3.175 3.629 4.UZ
10 4.536 4.990 5.443 5.897 6.350 6.804 7.257 7.711 8.1 65 8.618
20 9.O72 Y,5ZJ 9.979 10.433 10.886 1 1.340 1 1.793 12.247 12.701 1 3.1 54
30 13.608 '14.061 14.51 5 14.969 I C.+ 15.876 1 6.329 't

6.783 17.237 17 690
40 18.144 1 8.597 19.051 19.504 1 9.958 20.412 20.865 21.319 21 .772 22.226
bU 22.680 23.1 33 23.587 24.O40 24.454 24.948 25.401 25.855 26.303 26.762
60 27.216 27.669 28j23 28.576 29.030 29.484 29.937 30.391 30.844 31.298
70 31.752 32.205 32.659 33.112 33.566 34.019 34.473 34.927 35.380 35.834
80 36.287 36.741 J/. I YC 37 648 38.1 02 38.555 39.009 39.463 39.916 40.370
90 40.823 41 277 41.731 42 184 42.638 43.091 43.545 43.999 M.452 44.906
100 45.359 45.813 46.266 46.720 47 174 47.627 48.081 48.534 48.988 49.442
Figure 1-2. Weight Conversions (Sheet 1 o12)
1-14 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 1
MODEL 182S GENERAL
(Kilograms x2.205 - Pounds) - (Pounds x.454 = Kilograms)
POUNDS KILOGRAMS
220 100
210 95
200 90
190
85
180
80
't70
75
160
70
150
65
140
130 60
't20 55
110 50
100 45
90 40
80
35
70
30
60
25
50
20
40
15
30
20 10
10 5
0 0 Units x 10, 100, etc.
0585T1027
IF Figure 1-2 . Weight Conversions (Sheet 2 ol2)
June 13/97 1-15
.-.:
SECTION 1 CESSNA
GENERAL MODEL 182S
(Meters x 3.281 - Feet) (Feet x .305 = Meters)
tF METERS INTO FEET

METRES EN PIEDS
m o 1 2 3 4 5 o 7 8 o
feet feet feet feet feet feet feet feet feet feet
0 3.281 o.co 9.842 1 3.1 23 16 404 19.685 22.956 26.247 29.528
10 32.808 36.089 39.370 45.932 49 212 52.493
4.OC
I 55.774 62.336
20 65.617 68.897 72.178 75.459 74.740 82 021 85.302 88.582 91.863 95.144
30 98.425 101 .71 104.99 108.27 111 .5s 114.83 118.11 121.39 124.67 127.95
40 131 .23 134.51 137.79 141.08 114.36 147.64 150.92 154.20 157.48 160.76
50 164.O4 167.32 170.60 173.86 177.16 180.45 183.73 187.01 190.29 193.57
OU 195.85 200.1 3 203.41 206.69 209.97 213.25 216.53 219.82 223.10 226.38
70 229.66 232.94 236.22 239.50 242.78 246.06 249.34 5. 255.90 259.1 I
80 262.47 265.75 269.03 272.31 275.59 278.A7 282.15 285.43 288.71 291.58
90 295.27 298.56 301.84 305.12 308.40 311.68 314.96 318.24 321.52 324.80
100 328.08 331.36 3U.64 337.93 341.21 s44.49 347.77 351.05 354.33 357.61
li
_ FEET INTO METERS
PIEDS EN METRES
ft 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I a
m m m m m m m m m
0 0.305 0.610 0.914 1 .219 1.524 1.829 2.134 2.438 2.743

10 3.048 3.353 J.OJ 3.962 4.267 4.572 4.877 5.182 5.486 5.791
20 6.096 6.401 6.706 7.010 7.315 7.620 7.925 8.230 8.534 8.839
30 9.1M 9.449 9.754 10.058 10.363 10.668 10.973 11 278 11.542 1 1.887
40 12.192 12.497 12.802 1 3.106 13.41 1 13.7'16 14.021 14.326 14.630 14.935
15.240 15.545 15.850 6.1 54 16.459 16.754 '17.069 17.374 17.678 17 983
50 1
60 18.288 18.593 18.898 19.202 1 9.507 19.812 20.117 20 422 20.726 2 t .031
70 21.336 21.641 21.946 22.250 .cca 22.860 zJ, I DC 23.470 23.774 24.079
80 24.384 24.689 24.994 25.298 2s.603 25.908 26.213 26.518 26.822 27.127
90 27.432 27.737 28.O42 28.346 28.651 28.956 29.261 29.566 29.470 30 175
100 30.480 30.785 31.090 31.394 31.699 32.004 32.309 32.614 32.918 33.223
Figure 1-3. Length Conversions (Sheet 1 of 2)
1-16 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 1
MODEL 182S GENERAL
(Metersx3.281 =Feet) (Feetx.305=Meters)
METERS
320
100
\
95
300
90
280 85
260 80
75
240
70
220
65
200 60
180 55
50
160
45
140
40
120
35
100 30
80 25
20
60
15
40
10
20 5
0 0 Units x 10, 100, etc.
Figure 1-3 . Length Conversions (Sheet 2 of 2)
Nov 15/00 1-17

SECTION 1 CESSNA
GENERAL MODEL 182S
(Centimeters x .394 = lnches) (lnches x 2.54 = Centimeters)
IIF CENTIMETERS INTO NCHES
cm 0 1 2 3 4 5 o 7 I o
n n n n n n n n n
0.394 0.787 1.181 1.575 1.969 2.362 z.Ico 3.1 50 3.543

4.331 4.724 5.1 18 5.512 5.906 6.299 6.693 7.047 7.4AO
8.268 8.661 9.055 9.449 9.843 10.236 1 0.630 11.O24 11.417
12,205 12.598 12.992 13.386 13.780 14 173 14.567 14.961 15.354
16.142 16.535 16.929 17.323 17.717 18.1 10 18.504 18.898 19.291
20.079 20.472 20.866 21.260 21.654 22.047 22.441 22.835 23.228

24.016 24.409 24.803 25.197 25.591 25.984 26.378 26.772 27.164
27.953 28.346 24.740 29.134 29.528 29.921 30.315 30.709 31.102
31.890 32.243 32 677 33.071 33.465 33.858 34.252 34.646 35.039
35.827 36.220 JO.O t+ 37.008 37.402 37.795 38.189 38.583 38.976
39.7M 40.157 40.551 40.945 41.339 41 42.126 42.520 42.913
TF INCHES INTO CENTIMETERS
n 0 1 2 3 4 5 o 7 8 I
cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm
0 -a+ 5.08 7.62 10.16 12.70 15.24 17.78 20.32 22.96
10 25.40 27.94 30.48 33.02 35.56 38.1 0 40.64 43.1 I +J.T 48.26
20 50.80 s3.34 55.88 58.42 60.96 63.50 66.04 68.58 71.'12 73.66
30 76.20 78.74 81.28 8s.82 86.36 88.90 91.44 93.98 96.52 99.06
40 101 .60 104.14 106.68 109.22 111 .76 114.30 116.84 1 19.38 121.92 124.46
50 127.00 129.54 132.08 134.62 137.16 139.70 142.24 1M.78 t4I . 149.86
60 152.40 154.94 157.48 160.02 162.56 165.10 167.64 170.18 172.72 175.26
70 177.80 180.34 182.88 185.42 1 87.96 190.50 193.04 195.s8 1 98.12 200.66
an 203.20 205.74 208.28 210.82 213.36 215.90 218.44 220.98 223.52 226.06
90 228.60 231.14 233.68 o. 3-IO 241.30 243.84 246.38 248.92 251.46
100 254.00 zJo. 259.08 261.62 264.16 266.70 269.24 271.78 274.32 276.86
Figure 1-4. Length Conversions (Sheet 1of 2)
1-18 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 1
MODEL 182S GENERAL
(Centimeters x .394 = lnches) - (lnches x2.54 - Centimeters)
INCHES CENTIMETERS
10
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
I
I
7
6
5
4 Units x 10, 100, etc.
3
2 0585T1028
1
IF Figure 1-4. Length Conversions (Sheet 2 ot 2)
June 13/97 1-19

SECTION 1 CESSNA
GENERAL MODEL 182S
(statuteMilesx1.609=Kilometers) (Kilometersx.622=statuteMiles)
(statute Miles x.869=Nautical Miles) (Nautical Miles x1 .15=statute Miles)
(NauticalMilesxl.S52=Kilometers) (Kilometersx.S4=NauticalMiles)
STATUTE NAUTICAL
MILES MILES KILOMETERS
1 15 -- 100 100
180
110 -l- gs 95
105
+ eo eo f 170
too
1 eu 85 + 160
95
80 +
150
eof80
85+75 75 -l Mo
80+70 70 + 130
75 -l- 65 65 + 120
70loo 6o*llo
65ass 55 a loo
toluo 50
55 90
50+45
outrto
45+40 70
40+35
60
35+30
30Azs 25f50
25]l zo 20+ 40
20
15 15+30
10+10 ro f zo units x 10, 1oo, etc'
5+5 5+10
0 --r- 0 0-t-0 ) os'sr1o2e
Figure 1-5. Distance Conversions
1-20 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 1
MODEL 182S GENERAL
(lmperial Gallons x 4.546 = Liters) (Liters x .22=lmperial Gallons)
LITERS INTO IMPERIAL GALLONS il

Lt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
G IG G IG G IG IG IG G
0.220 o.440 0.660 0.880 1.100 1.320 1.540 1.760 i oc
2.420 2.640 2.860 3.080 3.300 3.520 3740 3.960 4.1 80
4.620 4.440 5.059 5.279 5.499 5.719 5.939 6.159 6.379
6.819 7 nao 7.259 7.479 7.699 7.919 8.139 8.359 8.579
9.019 9.239 9.459 9.679 9.899 10.119 10.339 10.779
11.21 9 1 1.t19 1 1.659 11.879 12.099 12.31 I 12.539 12.759 12.979

13419 1 3.639 13.859 14.O78 14.298 14.518 14.738 14.958 1 s.1 78
15.618 15 838 16.058 't6,278 16.498 '16.718 16.938 17.158 17 374
17.818 18.038 1 8.258 18.478 18.698 18.91 I 1 9.1 38 19.358 19.578
20.018 20.238 20.458 20.678 20.898 2'1.118 21.338 21,558 21.778
22.218 22.434 22.658 22.878 23.098 23.318 23.537 23.757 23.577
IMPERIAL GALLONS INTO LITERS 1I

IG 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 I 9
Lt Lt Lt LT Lt Lt Lt Lt Lt
4.546 9.092 1 3.638 18.184 22.730 27.276 31.822 36.368 40.914
50.006 54.552 59.097 63.643 68.1 89 t.tc 77.281 81.827 86.373
95.465 100.01 104.56 109.1 0 1 13.65 1 18.20 122.74 127.29 131 .83
140.93 145.47 150.02 154.56 159.1 1 I OO.OO 168.20 172.75 177 29
186.38 190.93 195.48 200.02 204.57 209.1 1 213 66 218.21 222.75
231.A4 236.39 240.94 245.48 250.03 254.57 259.12 263.67 268.21

277.30 281.8s 286.40 290.94 295.49 300.03 304.58 309.1 3 313.67
322.76 oaI . I 331.86 336.40 340.95 345.49 350.04 3s4.59 359.13
368.22 372.77 377.32 381.86 386.41 390.95 395.50 400.04 404.59
413.68 418.23 422.77 427.32 431.87 436.41 440.96 145.50 450.05
459.1 4 463.69 468.23 472.78 477.33 481.87 4A6.42 490.96 495.51
Figure 1-6. Volume Conversions (Sheet 1 of 3)
Nov 15/00 1-21

SECTION 1 CESSNA
GENERAL MODEL 182S
(lmperial Gallons x 4.4546 = Liters)

(Liters x .22 = lmperial Gallons)
100
IMPERIAL 44O LIERS
GALLONS YC
420
90
400
85 380
80 360
75 340
70 320
65 300
280
60
260
55
240
50 220
45 200
40 180
35 160
30 140
120
25
100
20
80
15
10
5 20
0 0
Units x 10, 100, etc.
0585T1 032
Figure 1-6. Volume Conversions (Sheet 2 ot 3)
1-22 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 1
MODEL 182S GENERAL
(lmperial Gallons x 1.2 = U.S. Gallons)

(U.S. Gallons x .833 = lmperial Gallons)
(U.S. Gallons x 3.785 = Liters)
(Liters x .264:,r:t.Gallons)
i U. S.
IMPERIAL LITERS
ou-S 1oo-r120 GALLONS 1oo
360
\
e5+115 95
eo+110 90 340
105
851too 85 320
so1-ss 80 300
75+e0 75 280
70+85 70 260
65+80 65 240
75
601zo 60
220
55f os 55
200
50+60 180
45+55 45
50 160
40
45 140
35 35
40 't20
30 35 30
100
25 30 25
25 20 80
20
20 15 60
15
15 40
10 10
10
5 5 20
5
0 0 0 0
Units x 10, 100, etc. 0585T1 033
Figure 1-6. Volume Conversions (Sheet 3 of 3)
Nov 15/00 1-23

SECTION 1 CESSNA
GENERAL MODEL 182S
TEMPERATURE CONVERSIONS
('F-32)x5i9='C "Cx9/5+32=oF
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
2'to 00
110
120
30
40
0585T1 034
Figure 1-7. Temperature Conversions
1-24 June 13/97

CESSNA sEcoN 1
MODEL 182S GENERAL
cific Gravity = .72

itersX .72=K (Kilograms
(Liters X 1.5 (Pounds X
LTTERS LITERS
I
135
95 1
90 125
85 GAS FUEL
120
115
80 110
75 105 75
100
70 70
65 90
60' 85
-- l-90
."1
sofso
65
4570 60
ooluo 55
35-J 50
ro-fuo
25t40 25
20130 20
tu1'o 15
101 1
10
5f 1o 1
5
0_r0 units x 10 00, etc. 0
Figure 1-8. Volume to Weight Conversion
Nov 15/00 1-25

SECTION 1 CESSNA
GENERAL MODEL 182S
AV GAS
SPECIFIC
GRAVITY
0.72
Figure 1-9. Quick Conversions
1-26 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 2
MODEL 182S LIMITATIONS
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
lntroduction 2-3
Airspeed Limitations 2-4
Airspeed lndicator Markings 2-5
Powerplant Limitations 2-5
Powerplant I nstrument Markin gs 2-6
Weight Limits 2-7
Center Of Gravity 2-7
Maneuver Limits 2-8
Flight Load Factor Limits 2-8
Kinds Of Operation 2-8
Fuel Limitations 2-8
Other Limitations 2-9
Flap Limitations 2-g
Placards 2-'13
Feb 3197 2-11(2-2 blank)

CESSNA SECTION 2
INTRODUCTION
Section 2 includes operating limitations, instrument markings,
and basic placards necessary for the safe operation of the airplane,
its engine, standard systems and standard equipment. The
limitations included in ttiis section have been approved by th{
Federal Aviation Administration. Observance of these operating
limitations is required by FederalAviation Regulations.
NOTE
Refer to Supplements, Section 9 of this Handbook for I

amended operating limitations, operating procedures,
peormance data and other necessary information for
airplanes equipped with specific options.
NOTE
The airspeeds listed in the Airspeed Limitations chart

(Figure 2-1) and the Airspeed lndicator Markings cha
(Figure 2-2) are based on Airspeed Calibration data shown
in Section 5 with the normal static source. lf the alternate
static source is being used, ample margins should be
observed to allow for the airspeed calibration variations
between the normal and alternate static sources as shown
in Section 5.
Your Cessna is certificated under FAA Type Certificate No. 3413

as Cessna Model No. 182S.
Nov 15/00 2-3

SECTION 2 CESSNA
LIMITATIONS MODEL 182S
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
Airspeed limitations and their operational significance are shown
in Figure 2-1.
SYMBOT SPEED KCAS KIAS REMARKS

ve Never Exceed Speec 170 175 Do not exceed this
speed in any
operation.
vruo Maximum Structural 137 140 Do not exceed this
Cruising Speed speed except in
rmooth air, and
lhen only with
:aution.
V Maneuvering
Speed: Do not make full or
3100 Pounds 109 110 abrupt control
2600 Pounds 101 101 novements above
2000 Pounds 89 88 lhis speed.
vre Maximum Flap
Extended Speed: Do not exceed this
0' to 10" Flaps 137 140 speed with flaps
10'to 20" Flaps 118 120 down.
20" to FULL Flaps 100 100
Maximum 170 175 Do not exceed this
Window Open speed with windows
Speed open.
Figure 2-1. Airspeed Limitations
2-4 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 2
AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS

Airspeed indicator markings and their color code significance are
shown in Figure 2-2.
KIAS
MARKING VALUE SIGNIFICANCE
OR RANGE
White Arc 36 - 100 Full Flap Operating Range.
Green Arc 43 -140 Normal Operating Range.
Yellow Arc 140-175 Cperations must be conducted with
aution and only in smooth air.
Red Line 175 Maximum speed for all operations.
Figure 2-2. Airspeed lndicator Markings
POWERPLANT LIMITATIONS
Engine Manufacturer: Textron Lycoming.
Engine Model Number: |O-540-AB1 45.
Maximum Power:230 BHP rating.
Engine Operating Limits for Takeoff and Continuous Operations:
Maximum Engine Speed:2400 RPM.
Maximum Cylinder Head Temperature: 500"F (260"C).
Maximum Oil Temperature: 245'F (118'C).
OilPressure, Minimum: 20 PSl.
Maximum: 115 PSl.
Fuel Grade: See Fuel Limitations.
Oil Grade (Specification):
MIL-L-6082 Aviation Grade Straight Mineral Oil or MIL-L-22851
Ashless Dispersant Oil.
Propeller Manufacturer: McOauley Propeller Systems.
Propeller Model Number: 2-Bladed: 82D34C235/90DKB-8.
3-Bladed: 83D36C431/80VSA-1
Propeller Diameter, 2-Bladed Maximum: 82 0 inches.
2-Bladed Minimum: 80.5 inches.
3-Bladed Maximum: 79.0 inches.
3-Bladed Minimum: 77.5 inches.
June 13/97 2-5

SECTION 2 CESSNA
Propeller Blade Angle at 30 lnch Station:

2-Bladed Low Pitch: 17.0".
2-Bladed High Pitch: 31.8".
3-Bladed Low Pitch: 14.9".
3-Bladed High Pitch: 31.7".
POWERPLANT INSTRUMENT MARKINGS

Powerplant instrument markings and their color code significance
are shown in Figure 2-3.
GREEN ARC RED

INSTRUMENT RED L|NE (MTNTMUM) INORMAL LINE
OPERATNG) (MAx)
Iachometer: 2000 -2400 2400

RPM
Manifold 15 - 23 ln. Hg.
Pressure
Cylinder Head 200 - 500'F 500"F
Temperature
oit 100 - 245"F 245"F
Temperature
Oil Pressure 20 PSI 50 - 90 PSt 115
PSI
FuelQuantity 0
(2.0 Gal. Unusable Each
Tank)
FuelFlow C to 15 GPH
(Pressure)
Vacuum Gauge 4.5 - 5.5 in.Hg
Figure 2-3. Powerplant lnstrument Markings
2-6 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 2
WEIGHT LIMITS
Maximum Ramp Weight: 3110 lbs.
Maximum Takeoff Weight: 3100 lbs.
Maximum Landing Weight: 2950 lbs.
Maximum Weight in Baggage Compartment:
Baggage Area A - Station 82 to 109: 120 fbs. See note below.
Baggage Area B - Station 109 to 124: 80 lbs. See note below.
Baggage Area C - Station 124 o 134: 80 lbs. See note below.
NOTE
The maximum allowable combined weight capacity for

baggage in areas A, B and C is 200 pounds. The maximum
allowable weight capacity for baggage in areas B and C is
80 pounds.
CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITS

Center of Gravity Range:
Fonruard: 33.0 inches aft of datum at 2250 lbs. or less, with

straight line variation to 40.9 inches aft of datum at
3100 lbs.
Aft: 46.0 inches aft of datum at allweights.
Reference Datum: Front face of firewall.
Feb 3/97 2-7

SECTION 2 CESSNA
MANEUVER LIMITS
This airplane is certificated in the normal category. The normal
category is applicable to aircraft intended for non-aerobatic
operations. These include any maneuvers incidental to normal
flying, stalls (except whip stalls), lazy eights, chandelles, and steep
turns in which the angle of bank is not more than 60'.
Aerobatic maneuvers, including spins, are not approved.
FLIGHT LOAD FACTOR LIMITS

Flight Load Factors:
*Flaps Up . . +3.89, -1.529
*Flaps Down , +2.09
*The design load factors are 150% of the above, and in all cases,
the structure meets or exceeds design loads.
KINDS OF OPERATION LIMITS

The airplane as delivered is equipped for day, night, VFR, IFR
and may be equipped for night VFR ancl/or IFR operations. FAR
Part 91 establishes the minimum required instrumentation and
equipment for these operations. The reference to types of flight
operations on the operating limitations placard reflects equipment
installed at the time of Airworthiness Certificate issuance.
Flight into known icing conditions is prohibited.
FUEL LIMITATIONS
Total Fuel: 92 U.S. gallons (2 tanks at 46.0 gallons each).
Usable Fuel (all flight conditions): 88.0 U.S. gallons.
2-8 Feb 3197

CESSNA SECTION 2
Unusable Fuel:4.0 U.S. gallons (2.0 gallons each tank).
NOTE
To ensure maximum fuel capacity and minimize cross-

feeding when refueling, always park the airplane in a wings-
level, ormal ground attitude and place the fuel selector in
the Left or Right position. Refer to Figure 1-1 for normal
ground attitude def inition.
Takeoff and land with the fuel selector valve handle in the BOTH
position.
Operation on either LEFT or RIGHT tank limited to level flight only.
Wth 1/4 tank or less, prolonged uncoordinated flight is prohibited

when operating on either left or right tank.
Approved FuelGrades (and Colors):
100LL Grade Aviation Fuel(Blue).

OTHER LIMITATIONS
FLAP LMTATIONS
Approved Takeoff Range: 0'to 20'

Approved Landing Range: O'to FULL
Feb 3197 2-9

SECTION 2 CESSNA
PLACARDS
The following information must be displayed in the form of com-
posite or individual placards.
1. ln full view of the pilot: (The "DAY-NIGHT-VFR-IFR" entry,

shown on the example below, will vary as the airplane is
equipped).
The markings and placards installed in this airplane contain

operating limitations which must be complied with when operating
this airplane in the Normal Category. Other operating limitations
which must be compled with when operating this airplane n this
category are contained in the Pilot's Operating Handbook and FAA
Approved Airplane Flight Manual.
No acrobatic maneuvers, including spins, approved.
Flight into known icing conditions prohibited.
This airplane is certified for the following flight operations as of

date of original airworthiness certificate:
DAY-NIGHT-VFR-IFR
2. On control lock:
CAUTION
CONTROL LOCK
REMOVE BEFORE STARTING ENGINE
2-10 Feb 3197

CESSNA SECTION 2
3. On the fuel selector valve:
BOTH
88.0 GAL.
TAKEOFF LANDING
ALL FLIGHT ATTITUDES
FUEL
SEL
PUSH DOWN
ROTATE
LEFT RIGHT
44.0 cAL. 44.0 GAL
LEVEL FLIGHT ONLY LEVEL FLIGHT ONL
OFF
4. Near the fuel tank filler cap:
FUEL
lOOLU1OO MIN. GRADE AVIATION GASOLINE
CAP 44.0 U.S. GAL USABLE
CAP 32.5 U.S. GAL. USABLE TO BOTTOM
OF FILLER INDICATOR
5. On flap control indicator:
0'to 10" 140 KIAS (Partial flap range with dark blue color
code; also, mechanicaldetent at 10'.)
10o to 20" 120 KIAS (Light blue color code; also

mechanical detent al 20")
20' to FULL 100 KIAS (White color code)
Feb 3/97 2-11

SECTION 2 CESSNA
6. On baggage door:
120 POUNDS MAXIMUM
BAGGAGE FORWARD OF BAGGAGE DOOR LATCH
AND
80 POUNDS MAXIMUM
BAGGAGE AFT OF BAGGAGE DOOR LATCH
MAXIMUM 2OO POUNDS COMBINED
FOR ADDITIONAL LOADING INSTRUCTIONS

SEE WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA
7. A calibration card must be provided to indicate the accuracy

of the magnetic compass in 30' increments.
8. On the oil filler cap:
olL
9 QTS
9. Near airspeed indicator:
MANEUVER SPEED - 110 KIAS
10. On the upper right instrument panel:
SMOKING PROHIBITED
2-12 Feb 3197

CESSNA SECTION 2
11. On auxiliary power plug door and second placard on battery

box:
CAUTION 24 VOLTS D.C.
THIS AIRCRAFT IS EQUIPPED WITH ALTERNATOR AND A
NEGATIVE GROUND SYSTEM. OBSERVE PROPER POLARITY.
REVERSE POLARITY WILL DAMAGE ELECTRICAL
COMPONENTS.
12. On Upper Right Side of the Aft Cabin Partition:
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER

INSTALLED AFT OF THIS PARTITION
MUST BE SERVICED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH FAR PART 91.2O7
13. Near the fuel flow gauge:
MAXIMUM POWER FUEL FLOW
ALTITUDE FUEL FLOW

S.L. 20.5 GPH
2000' 19.0 GPH
4000' 17.5 GPH
6000' 16.5 GPH
8000' 15.5 GPH
1 0000' 14.5 GPH
1 2000' 13.5 GPH
Feb 3/97 z-'tsl(2-14 blank)

CESSNA SECTION 3
MODEL 182S EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
lntroduction 3-3
AIRSPEEDS
Airspeeds For Emergency Operation 3-3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES CHECKLIST
Engine Failures 3-4

Engine Failure During Takeoff Roll 3-4
Engine Failure lmmediately After Takeoff 3-4
Engine Failure During Flight (Restart Procedures) 3-4
Forced Landings 3-5
Emergency Landing Without Engine Power 3-5
Precautionary Landing With Engine Power 3-5
Ditching 3-5
Fires . 3-6
During Start On Ground 3-6
Engine Fire ln Flight 3-7
Electrical Fire ln Flight 3-7
Cabin Fire 3-8
Wing Fire 3-8
Icing 3-9
lnadvertent lcing Encounter 3-9
Static Source Blockage 3-10
Landing With A Flat Main Tire 3-10
Feb 3197 3-1

SECTION 3 CESSNA
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES MODEL 182S
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Page
Landing With A Flat Nose Tire 3-10
Electrical Power Supply System Malfunctions 3-11
Ammeter Shows Excessive Rate of Charge
(Full Scale Deflection) 3-11
Low Voltage Light llluminates During Flight
(Ammeter ndicates Discharge)
I 3-11
Vacuum System Failure 3-12
AMPLIFIED EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Engine Failure 3-13

Forced Landings 3-15
Landing Without Elevator Control 3-15
Fires 3-16
Emergency Operation ln Clouds (Vacuum System Failure) 3-16
Executing A 180" Turn ln Clouds 3-16
Emergency Descent Through Clouds 3-17
Recovery From Spiral Dive ln The Clouds 3-18
lnadvertent Flight lnto lcing Conditions 3-18
Static Source Blocked 3-18
Spins 3-19
Rough Engine Operation Or Loss Of Power 3-20
Spark Plug Fouling 3-20
Magneto Malfunction 3-20
Low Oil Pressure 3-20
Electrical Power Supply System Malfunctions 3-21
Excessive Rate of Charge 3-21
lnsufficient Rate Of Charge 3-22
Other Emergencies 3-22
Windshield Damage 3-22
3-2 Feb 3197

CESSNA SECTION 3
INTRODUCTION
Section 3 provides checklist and amplified procedures for coping
with emergencies that may occur. Emergencies caused by airplane
or engine malfunctions are extremely rare if proper preflight
inspections and maintenance are practiced. Enroute weather
emergencies can be minimized or eliminated by careful flight
planning and good judgment when unexpected weather is
encountered. However, should an emergency arise, the basic
guidelines described in this section should be considered and
applied as necessary to correct the problem. Emergency procedures
associated with standard avionics, the ELT, or any optional systemsr
can be found in the Supplements, Section 9. I
AIRSPEEDS
AIRSPEEDS FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION
Engine Failure After Takeoff:

Wing Flaps Up 75 KIAS
Wing Flaps Down 70 KIAS
Maneuvering Speed:
3100 Lbs 110 KIAS
2600 Lbs 101 KIAS
2000 Lbs 88 KIAS
Maximum Glide:
3100 Lbs 75 KIAS
2600 Lbs 70 KlAs
2000 Lbs 62 KIAS
Precautionary Landing With Engine Power 70 KIAS
Landing Without Engine Power:
Wing Flaps Up 75 KIAS
Wing Flaps Down 70 KIAS
Nov 15/00 3-3

SECTION 3 CESSNA
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES CHECKLIST

Procedures in the Emergency Procedures Checklist portion of
this section shown in bold faced type are immediate action items
which should be committed to memory.
ENGINE FAILURES
ENGINE FAILURE DURING TAKEOFF ROLL
1. Throttle - IDLE.
2. Brakes- APPLY.
3. Wing Flaps -- RETRACT.
4. Mixture -- IDLE CUT OFF.
5. lgnition Switch -- OFF.
6. Master Switch -- OFF.
ENGINE FAILURE IMMEDIATELY AFTER TAKEOFF
1. Airspeed -- 75 KIAS (flaps UP).

70 KIAS (flaps DowN).
3. FuelSelector Valve -- PUSH DOWN and ROTATE TO OFF.
4. lgnition Switch - OFF.
5. Wing Flaps -- AS REQUIRED (FULL recommended).
7. Cabin Door -- UNL-ATCH.
L Land -- STRAIGHT AHEAD.
ENGINE FAILURE DURING FLIGHT (Restart Procedures)
1. Airspeed -- 75 KIAS (Best glide speed).

2. Fuel Selector Valve .. BOTH.
3. Auxiliary Fuel Pump Switch - ON.
4. Mixture - RICH (if restart has not occurred).
5. lgnition Switch -- BOTH (or START if propeller is stopped).
3-4 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 3
FORCED LANDINGS
EMERGENCY LANDING WITHOUT ENGINE POWER
1. Passenger Seat Backs -- MOST UPRIGHT POSITION.

2. Seats and Seat belts - SECURE.
3. Airspeed -- 75 KIAS (flaps UP).
70 KIAS (flaps DOWN).
5. Fuel Selector Valve -- PUSH DOWN and ROTATE TO OFF.
6. lgnition Switch -- OFF,
7. Wing Flaps -- AS REQUIRED (FULL recommended).
8. Master Switch -- OFF (when landing is assured).
9. Doors -- UNLATCH PRIOR TO TOUCHDOWN.
10. Touchdown -- SLIGHTLY TAIL LOW.
1 1. Brakes -- APPLY HEAVILY.
PRECAUTIONARY LANDING WITH ENGINE POWER

2. Seats and Seat Belts - SECURE.
3. Airspeed -- 75 KIAS
4. Wing Flaps -- 20".
5. Selected Field -- FLY OVER, noting terrain and obstructions,
then retract flaps upon reaching a safe altitude and airspeed.
6. Avionics Mastr Switcn and Elctrical Switches -- OFF.'
7. Wing Flaps -- FULL (on final approach).
8. Airspeed -- 70 KIAS.
10. Doors -- UNLATCH PRIOR TO TOUCHDOWN.
11. Touchdown -- SLIGHTLY TAIL LOW.
13. Brakes -- APPLY HEAVILY.
DITCHING
1. Radio -- TRANSMIT MAYDAY on 121.5 MHz, giving location

and intentions and SQUAWKTTOO.
2. Heavy Objects (in baggage area) -- SECURE OR JETTISON
(if possible).
Nov 15/00 3-5

SECTION 3 CESSNA

4. Seats and Seat Belts - SECURE.
5. Wing Flaps -- 20" to FULL.
6. Power -- ESTABLISH 3OO FT|MIN DESCENT AT 65 KIAS.
NOTE
lf no power is available, approach at 70 KIAS with flaps up

or at 65 KIAS with 10" flaps.
7. Approach -- High Winds, Heavy Seas -- INTO THE WIND.

Light Winds, Heavy Swells -- PARALLEL TO
SWELLS.
8. Cabin Doors -- UNI-ATCH.
9. Touchdown -- LEVEL ATTITUDE AT ESTABLISHED RATE OF
DESCENT,
10. Face -- CUSHION at touchdown with folded coat.
11. ELT -- Activate.
12. Airplane -- EVACUATE through cabin doors. lf necessary,
open window and flood cabin to equalize pressure so doors
can be opened.
13. Life Vests and Raft - INFLATE WHEN CLEAR OF AIRPLANE.
FIRES
DURING START ON GROUND
1. Cranking - CONTINUE to get a start which would suck the

flames and accumulated fuel into the engine.
lf engine starts:
2. Power - 17OO RPM for a few minutes.

3. Engine -- SHUTDOWN and inspect for damage.
lf engine fails to start:
4. Throttle -- FULL OPEN.

5. Mixture - IDLE CUT OFF.
6. Cranking - CONTINUE.
7. Fuel Selector Valve - PUSH DOWN and ROTATE TO OFF.
8. Auxiliary Fuel Pump -- OFF.
3-6 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 3
9. Fire Extinguisher -- OBTAIN (have ground attendants obtain if

not installed).
10. Engine -- SECURE.
a. Master Switch -- OFF.
b. lgnition Switch -- OFF
11. Parking Brake - RELEASE.
12. Airplane -- EVACUATE.
13. Fire -- EXTINGUISH using fire extinguisher, wool blanket, or
dirt.
14. Fire Damage -- INSPECT, repair damage or replace damaged
components or wiring before conducting another flight.
ENGINE FIRE IN FLIGHT

2. Fuel Selector Valve -- PUSH DOWN and ROTATE TO OFF.
3. Auxiliary Fuel Pump Switch .- OFF.
4. Master Switch .. OFF.
5. Cabin Heat and Air -- OFF (except overhead vents).
. Airspeed -- 100 KIAS (lf fire is not extinguished, increase glide
speed to find an airspeed - within airspeed limitations - which
will provide an incombustible mixture).
7. Forced Landing -- EXECUTE (as described in Emergency
Landing Without Engine Power).
ELECTRICAL FIRE IN FLIGHT
1. Master Switch - OFF.

2, Vents, Cabin Air, Heat - CLOSED.
- -- -'
3. Fire Extinguisher - ACTIVATE (if available).
4. Avionics Mster Switch -- OFF. l
5. AllOther Switches (except ignition switch) -- OFF.
[, wnnuruc
AFTER DISCHARGING FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND
ASCERTANING THAT THE FIRE HAS BEEN
EXTINGUISHED, VENTILATE THE CABIN.
6. Vents/Cabin Air/Heat -- OPEN when it is asceftained that fire

is completely extinguished.
Nov 15/00 3-7

SECTION 3 CESSNA
lf fire has been extinguished and electrical power is necessary

for continuance of flight to nearest suitable airpoft or landing area:
7. Master Switch -- ON.

8. Circuit Breakers -- CHECK for faulty circuit, do not reset.
. 9. Radio Switches -- OFF.
I- 10. Avionics Master Switch -- ON.
11. Radio/Electrical Switches - ON one at a time, with delay after
each until shott circuit is localized.
CABIN FIRE
1. Master Switch - OFF.

2. Vents/Cabin Air/Heat - CLOSED (to avoid drafts).
3. Fire Extinguisher - AGTIVATE (if available).
[,mmtruc
AFTER DISCHARGING FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND
ASCERTAINING THAT FRE HAS BEEN
EXTINGUISHED, VENTILATE THE CABIN.
4. Vents/Cabin Air/Heat -- Open when it is ascertained that fire is

completely extinguished.
5. Land the airplane as soon as possible to inspecl for damage.
WING FIRE
1. Landing/Taxi Light Switches - OFF.

2. Navigation Light Switch - OFF.
3. Strobe Light Switch - OFF.
4. Pitot Heat Switch - OFF.
NOTE
Perform a sideslip to keep the flames away from the fuel

tank and cabin. Land as soon as possible using flaps only
as required for final approach and touchdown.
3-8 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 3
ICING
INADVERTENT ICING ENCOUNTER
1. Turn pitot heat switch ON.

2. Turn back or change altitude to obtain an outsde air
temperature that is less conducive to icing.
3. Pull cabin heat control full out and rotate defroster control
clockwise to obtain maximum defroster airflow.
4. lncrease engine speed to minimize ice build-up on propeller
blades.
5. Watch for signs of induction air filter icing. An unexplained
loss of manifold pressure could be caused by ice blocking the
air intake filter. Adjust the throttle as desired to set manifold
pressure. Adjust mixture, as required for any change in power
settings.
6. Plan a landing at the nearest airpoft. With an extremely rapid
ice build up, select a suitable "off airpoft" landing site.
7. With an ice accumulation ol 1/4 inch or more on the wng
leading edges, be prepared for significantly higher stall speed.
8. Leave wing flaps retracted. With a severe ice build up on the
horizontal tail, the change in wing wake airflow direction
caused by wing flap extension could result in a loss of
elevator effectiveness.
9. Open left window and, if practical, scrape ice from a portion of
the windshield for visibility in the landing approach.
10. Perform a landing approach using a forward slip, if necessary,
for improved visibility.
11. Approach at 80 to 90 KIAS depending upon the amount of the
accumulation.
12. Pedorm a landing in level attitude.
Feb 3/97 3-9

SECTION 3 CESSNA
STATIC SOURCE BLOCKAGE

(Erroneous lnstrument Reading Suspected)
1. Static Pressure Alternate Source Valve - PULL ON.

2. Airspeed -- Consult appropriate calibration table in Section 5.
3. Altitude -- Consult altimeter correction table in Section 5.
LANDING WITH A FLAT MAIN TIRE

1. Approach -- NORMAL.
2. Wing Flaps -- FULL DOWN.
3. Touchdown - GOOD MAIN TIRE FIRST, hold airplane off flat
tire as long as possible with aileron control.
4. Directional Control -- MAINTAIN using brake on good wheel as
required.
LANDING WITH A FLAT NOSE TIRE

1. Approach -- NORMAL.
2. Flaps -- AS REQUIRED.
3. Touchdown -- ON MAINS, hold nose wheel off the ground as
long as possible.
4. When nose wheel touches down, maintain full up elevator as
airplane slows to stop.
3-10 Feb 3197

CESSNA SECTION 3
ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

MALFUNCTIONS
AMMETER SHOWS EXCESSIVE RATE OF CHAHGE
(Full Scale Deflection)
1. Alternator -- OFF.
2. Nonessential Electrical Equipment -- OFF.
3. Flight -- TERMINATE as soon as practical.
LOW VOLTAGE ANNUNCTATOR (VOLTS) TLLUMTNATES DUR|NGI
FLIGHT (Ammeter lndicates Discharge)
NOTE
lllumination of "VOLTS" on the annunciator panel may

occur during low RPM conditions with an electrical load on
the system such as during a low RPM taxi. Under these
conditions, the light will go out at higher RPM. The master
switch need not be recycled since an overuoltage condition
has not occurred to deactivate the alternator system.
1. Avionics Master Switch -- OFF. I

2. Alternator Circuit Breaker -- CHECK lN.
3. Master Switch -- OFF (both sides).
5. Low Voltage Annunciator -- CHECK OFF.
6. Avionics Master Switch - ON.
Nov 15/00 3-11

SECTION 3 CESSNA
lf low voltage light illuminates again:
7. Alternator-- OFF.
8. Nonessential Radio and Electrical Equipment - OFF.
9. Flight -- TERMINATE as soon as practical.
VACUUM SYSTEM FAILURE

Left Vacuum or Right Vacuum Annunciator Light (L VAC R)
llluminates.
1, crunoru
IF VAGUUM IS NOT WITHIN NORMAL
OPERATING LMITS, A FAILURE HAS
OCCUFRED IN THE VACUUM SYSTEM AND
PARTIAL PANEL PROCEDURES MAY BE
REOUIRED FOR CONTINUED FLIGHT.
I t. Vacuu.m Gauge -
operang ilmlls.
CHECK to ensure vacuum within normal
3-12 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 3
AMPLIFIED
The following Amplified Emergency Procedures elaborate upon
information contained in the Emergency Procedures Checklists
portion of this section. These procedures also include information
not readily adaptable to a checklist format, and material to which a
pilot could not be expected to refer in resolution of a specific
emergency. This information should be reviewed in detail prior to
flying the airplane, as well as reviewed on a regular basis to keep
pilot's knowledge of procedures fresh.
ENGINE FAILURE
lf an engine failure occurs during the takeoff roll, the most
impoftant thing to do is stop the airplane on the remaining runway.
Those extra items on the checklist will provide added safety after a
failure of this type.
Prompt lowering of the nose to maintain airspeed and establish a

glide attitude is the first response to an engine failure after takeoff.
ln most cases, the landing should be planned straight ahead with
only small changes in direction to avoid obstructions. Altitude and
airspeed are seldom sufficient to execute a 180' gliding turn
necessary to return to the runway. The checklist procedures assume
that adequate tme exists to secure the fuel and ignition systems
prior to touchdown.
Feb 3197 3-13

SECTION 3 CESSNA
After an engine failure in flight, the most important course of

action is to continue flying the airplane. Best glide speed as shown
in Figure 3-1 should be established as quickly as possible. While
gliding toward a suitable landing area, an effort should be made to
identify the cause of the failure. lf time permits, an engine restafi
should be attempted as shown in the checklist. lf the engine cannot
be restarted, a forced landing without power must be completed.
14000
Er 2000
z
d1 0000
ff,
tJ
F
Lu 8000
o
fn
F 6000
T
g
LrJ
I 4000
2000
0
o 24 6 8 1012 1416182022
GROUND DISTANCE. NAUTICAL MILES
Figure 3-1. Maximum Glide
3-14 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 3
FORCED LANDINGS
lf all attempts
to restart the engine fail and a forced landing is
imminent, selecta suitable field and prepare for the landing as
discussed under the Emergency Landing Without Engine Power
checklist. Transmit Mayday message on 121.5 MHz giving location
and intentions and squawkTTOO.
Before attempting an "off airport" landing wth engine power

available, one should fly over the landing area ata safe but low
altitude to inspect the terrain for obstructions and surface
conditions, proceeding as discussed under the Precautionary
Landing With Engine Power checklist.
Prepare for ditching by securing or jettisoning heavy objects

located in the baggage area and collect folded coats for protection
of occupants' face at touchdown. Transmit Mayday message on
121.5 MHz giving location and intentions and squawk 7700. Avoid
a landing flare because of difficulty in judging height over a water
surface. The checklist assumes the availability of power to make a
precautionary water landing. lf power is not available, use of the
airspeeds noted with minimum flap extension will provide a more
favorable attitude for a power off ditching.
ln a forced landing situation, do not turn off the AVIONICSI

MASTER switch or the airplane MASTER switch until a landing isl
assured. Premature deactivation of the switches will disable the
airplane electrical systems.
Before pedorming a forced landing, especially in remote and

mountainous areas, activate the ELT transmitter by positioning the
cockpit-mounted switch to the ON position. For complete
information on ELT operation, refer to the Supplements, Section 9.
LANDING WITHOUT ELEVATOR CONTROL

Trim for horizontal flight with an airspeed of approximately 80
KIAS by using throttle and elevator trim controls. Then do not
change the elevator trim control setting; control the glide angle
by adjusting power exclusively.
Nov 15/00 3-15

SECTION 3 CESSNA
At flare out, the nose down moment resulting from power

reduction is an adverse factor and the airplane may hit on the nose
wheel. Consequently, at flare out, the elevator trim control should be
adjusted toward the full nose-up position and the power adjusted so
that the airplane will rotate to the horizontal attitude for touchdown.
Close the throttle at touchdown.
FIRES
Although engine fires are extremely rare in flight, the steps of the
appropriate checklist should be followed if one is encountered. After
completion of this procedure, execute a forced landing. Do not
attempt to restart the engine.
The initial indication of an electrical fire is usually the odor of

burning insulation. The checklist for this problem should result in
elimination of the fire.
EMERGENCY OPERATION IN CLOUDS

(Total Vacuum System Failure)
lf both the vacuum pumps fail in flight, the directional indicator
and attitude indicator will be disabled, and the pilot will have to rely
on the turn coordinator if he inadvertently flies into clouds. lf an
autopilot is installed, it too may be affected. Refer to Section 9,
Supplements, for additional details concerning autopilot operation.
The following instructions assume that only the electrically powered
turn coordinator is operative, and that the pilot is not completely
proficent in instrument flying.
EXECUTING A 180" TURN IN CLOUDS
Upon inadvertently entering the clouds, an immediate plan

should be made to turn back as follows:
1. Note the compass heading.

2. Using the clock, initiate a standard rate left turn, holding the
turn coordinator symbolic airplane wing opposite the lower left
index mark for 60 seconds. Then roll back lo level flight by
leveling the miniature airplane.
3-1 6 Dec 1/97

CESSNA SECTION 3
3. Check accuracy of the turn by observing the compass heading

which should be the reciprocal of the original heading.
4. lf necessary, adjust heading primarily with skidding motions
rather than rolling motions so that the compass will read more
accurately.
5. Maintain altitude and airspeed by cautious application of
elevator control. Avoid over controlling by keeping the hands
off the control wheel as much as possible and steering only
with rudder.
EMERGENCY DESCENT THROUGH CLOUDS
lf conditions preclude reestablishment of VFR flight by a 180'

turn, a descent through a cloud deck to VFR conditions may be
appropriate. lf possible, obtain radio clearance for an emergency
descent through clouds. To guard against a spiral dive, choose an
easterly or westerly heading to minimize compass card swings due
to changing bank angles. ln addition, keep hands off the control
wheel and steer a straight course with rudder control by monitoring
the turn coordinator. Occasionally check the compass heading and
make minor corrections to hold an approximate course. Before
descending into the clouds, set up a stabilized letdown condition as
follows:
1. Apply full rich mixture.

2. Reduce power to set up a 500 to 800 fUmin rate of descent.
3. Adjust the elevator trim and rudder trim for a stabilized
descent at 80 KIAS.
4. Keep hands off the control wheel.
5. Monitor turn coordinator and make corrections by rudder
alone.
6. Adjust rudder trim to relieve unbalanced rudder force, if
present.
7. Check trend of compass card movement and make cautious
corrections with rudder to stop the turn.
8. Upon breaking out of clouds, resume normalcruising flght.
Dec 1/97 3-171

SECTION 3 CESSNA
RECOVERY FROM SPRAL DIVE IN THE CLOUDS
lf a spiral is encountered in the clouds, proceed as follows:
1. Retard throttle to idle position.

2. Stop the turn by using coordinated aileron and rudder control
to align the symbolic airplane in the turn coordinator with the
horizon reference line.
3. Cautiously apply elevator back pressure to slowly reduce the
airspeed to 80 KIAS.
4. Adjust the elevator trim control to maintain an 80 KIAS glide.
5. Keep hands off the control wheel, using rudder control to hold
a straight heading. Adjust rudder trim to relieve unbalanced
rudder force.
6. Clear engine occasionally, but avoid using enough power to
disturb the trimmed glide.
7. Upon breaking out of clouds, resume normal cruising flight.
INADVERTENT FLIGHT INTO ICING CONDITIONS

Flight into icing conditions is prohibited and can be extremely
dangerous. An inadvertent encounter with these conditions can best
be handled using the checklist procedures. The best procedure, of
course, is to turn back or change altitude to escape icng conditions.
STATIC SOURCE BLOCKED
lf erroneous readings of the static source instruments (airspeed,

altimeter and vedical speed) are suspected, the static pressure
alternate source valve should be pulled on, thereby supplying static
pressure to these instruments from the cabin.
With the alternate static source on and the heater on and vents
closed, fly an indicated airspeed 1 lo 2 knots higher than normal
during climb. During approach fly and indicated airspeed 1 lo 2
knots lower than normal. Refer to the Alternate Static Source Air-
speed Calibration chart in Section 5 for additional detail. Altimeter
errors in these conditions are less than 50 feet.
3-1 8 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 3
With the alternate static air source on in crusing flight, refer to

the Alternate Static Source Airspeed Calibration and Alternate Static
Source Altimeter Correction charts in Section 5 for the somewhat
larger incremental errors which exist.
SPINS
Should an inadvertent spin occrlr, the following recovery
procedure should be used:
1. RETARD THROTTLE TO IDLE POSITION.

2. PLACE AILERONS IN NEUTRAL POSITION.
3. APPLY AND HOLD FULL RUDDER OPPOSITE TO THE
DIRECTION OF ROTATION.
4. JUST AFTER THE RUDDER REACHES THE STOP, MOVE
THE CONTROL WHEEL BRISKLY FORWARD FAR ENOUGH
TO BREAK THE STALL.
5. HOLD THESE CONTROL INPUTS UNTIL ROTATION
STOPS. Premature relaxation of the control inputs may extend
the recovery.
6. AS ROTATION STOPS, NEUTRALIZE RUDDER, AND MAKE
A SMOOTH RECOVERY FROM THE RESULTING DIVE.
NOTE
lf disorientation precludes a visual determination of the

direction of rotation, the symbolic airplane in the lurn
coordinator may be referred to for this information.
Feb 3/97 3-19

SECTION 3 CESSNA
ROUGH ENGINE OPERATION

OR LOSS OF POWER
SPARK PLUG FOULING
A slight engine roughness in flight may be caused by one or

more spark plugs becoming fouled by carbon or lead deposits. This
may be verified by turning the ignition switch momentarily from
BOTH to either L or R position. An obvious power loss in single
ignition operation is evidence of spark plug or magneto trouble.
Assuming that spark plugs are the more likely cause, lean the
mixture to the recommended lean setting for cruising flight. lf the
problem does not clear up in several minutes, determine if a richer
mixture setting will produce smoother operation. lf not, proceed to
the nearest airport for repairs using the BOTH position of the
ignition switch unless extreme roughness dictates the use of a
single ignition position.
MAGNETO MALFUNCTION
A sudden engine roughness or misfiring is usually evidence of

magneto problems. Switching from BOTH to either L or R ignition
switbh posilion will identify which magneto is malfunctioning. Select
different power settings and enrichen the mixture to determine if
continued operation on BOTH magnetos is practicable. lf not, switch
to the good magneto and proceed to the nearest airport for repairs.
LOW OIL PRESSURE
lf the low oil pressure annunciator illuminates, check the oil

pressure gauge to confirm low oil pressure condition. lf gauge oil
pressure and oil temperature remains normal, it is possible the oil
pressure sending unit or relief valve is malfunctioning. However,
land at the nearest airport to inspect the source of trouble.
lf a total loss of oil pressure is accompanied by a rise in oil

temperature, there is good reason to suspect an engine failure is
imminent. Reduce engine power immediately and select a suitable
forced landing field. Use only the minimum power required to reach
the desired touchdown spot.
3-20 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 3
ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY

SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONS
Malfunctions in the electrical power supply system can be
detected by periodic monitoring of the ammeter and low voltage
annunciator; however, the cause of these malfunctions is usually
difficult to determine. A broken alternator drive belt or wiring is most
likely the cause of alternator failures, although other factors could
cause the problem. A defective alternator control unit can also
cause malfunctions. Problems of this nature constitute an electrical
emergency and should be dealt with immediately. Electrical power
malfunctions usually fall into two categories: excessive rate of
charge and insufficient rate of charge. The following paragraphs
describe the recommended remedy for each situation.
EXCESSIVE RATE OF CHARGE
After engine stafting and heavy electrical usage at low engine

speeds (such as extended taxiing) the battery condition will be low
enough to accept above normal charging during the initial part of a
flight. However, after thirty minutes of cruising flight, the ammeter
should be indicating less than two needle widths of charging
current. lf the charging rate were to remain above this value on a
long flight, the battery would overheat and evaporate the electrolyte
at an excessive rate.
Electronic components in the electrical system can be adversely

affected by higher than normal voltage. The alternator control unit
includes an overvoltage sensor which normally will automatically
shut down the alternator if the charge voltage reaches
approximately 31.5 volts. lf the overvoltage sensor malfunctions, as
evidenced by an excessive rate of charge shown on the ammeter,
the alternator should be turned off, nonessential electrical
equipment turned off and the flight terminated as soon as practical.
Feb 3/97 3-21

SECTION 3 CESSNA
INSUFFICIENT RATE OF CHARGE
NOTE
lllumination of the low voltage (VOLTS) annunciator and

ammeter discharge indications may occur during low RPM
conditions with an electrical load on the system, such as
during a low RPM taxi. Under these conditions, the light will
go out at higher RPM.
lf the overvoltage sensor should shut down the alternator and trip
the ALT FLD circuit breaker, or if the alternator output is low, a
discharge rate will be shown on the ammeter followed by
illumination of the low voltage (VOLTS) annunciator. Since this may
be a "nuisance" trip out, an attempt should be made to reactivate
the alternator system. To do this, turn the AVIONICS MASTER
switch off, check that the alternator field circuit breaker is in (ALT
FLD), then turn both sides of the MASTER switch off and then on
again. lf the problem no longer exists, normal alternator charging
will resume and the low voltage (VOLTS) annunciator will go off.
The AVIONICS MASTER switch may then be turned back on.
lf the light illuminates again, a malfunction is confirmed. ln this

event, the ffight should be terminated and/or the current drain on the
battery minimized because the battery can supply the electrical
system for only a limited period of time. Battery power must be
conserved for later operation of the wing flaps and, if the emergency
occurs at night, for possible use of the landing lights during landing.
OTHER EMERGENCIES
WINDSHIELD DAMAGE
lf a bird strike or other incident should damage the windshield in

flight to the point of creating an opening, a significant loss in
performance may be expected, This loss may be minimized in some
cases (depending on amount of damage, altitude, etc.) by opening
the side windows while the airplane is maneuvered for a landing at
the nearest airport. lf airplane performance or other adverse
conditions preclude landing at an airport, prepare for an "off airport"
landing in accordance with the Precautionary Landing With Engine
Power or Ditching checklists.
3-22 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 4
MODEL 182S NORMAL PROCEDURES
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
lntroduction 4-5
AIRSPEEDS
Airspeeds For Normal Operation 4-5
CHECKLIST PROCEDURES
Preflight lnspection 4-7

Cabin 4-7
Empennage 4-8
Right Wing, Trailing Edge 4-8
Right Wing 4-8
Nose 4-9
Left Wing 4-10
Left Wing, Leading Edge 4-11
Left Wing, Trailing Edge 4-11
Before Starting Engine 4-11
Starting Engine (With Battery) 4-12
Starting Engine (With ExternalPower) 4-13
Before Takeoff 4-14
Takeoff 4-15
NormalTakeoff 4-15
Short Field Takeoff 4-15
Enroute Climb 4-15
NormalClimb 4-15
Maximum Pedormance Climb 4-16
Feb 3197 4-1

SECTION 4 CESSNA
NORMAL PROCEDURES MODEL 182S
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page
Cruise 4-16
Descent 4-16
Before Landing 4-16
lan{inn
Ls,,v,,,v 4-17
NormalLanding 4-17
Short Field Landing 4-17
Balked Landing 4-17
After Landing 4-17
Securing Airplane 4-18
AMPLIFIED PROCEDURES
Preflight lnspection 4-19

Starting Engine 4-2O
Starting (General) 4-2O
Taxiing 4-21
Before Takeoff 4-23
Warm Up 4-23
Magneto Check 4-23
Alternator Check 4-23
Landing Lights 4-24
Takeoff 4-24
Power Check 4-24
Wing Flap Settings 4-24
Crosswind Takeoff 4-25
Enroute Climb 4-25
Cruise 4-26
NormalOperations
Fuel Savings Procedures for 4-28
Fuel Vapor Procedures 4-29
Stalls 4-30
4-2 Nov 15/00

GESSNA SECTION 4
Landing
NormalLanding
Short Field Landing
Crosswind Landing
Balked Landing
Cold Weather 0peration
Starting
Winterization Kit
Hot Weather Operation
Noise Characteristics And Noise Beduction
Nov 15/00 4-3/(4-4 blank)

CESSNA SECTION 4
INTRODUCTION
Section 4 provides checklist and amplified procedures for the

conduct of normal operation. Normal procedures associated with
optional systems can be found in the Supplements, Section 9.
AIRSPEEDS
AIRSPEEDS FOR NORMAL OPERATION
Unless otherwise noted, the following speeds are based on a

maximum weight and may be used for any lesser weight. To
achieve the performance specified in Section 5 for takeoff distance
the speed appropriate to the particular weight must be used.
Takeoff:
NormalClimb Out 70-80 KIAS.
Short Field Takeoff, Flaps 20', Speed at 50 Feet 58 KIASI
Enroute Climb, Flaps Up:
Normal, Sea Level 85-95 KIAS
Best Rate of Climb. Sea Level 80 KIAS
Best Rate of Climb, 10,000 Feet 72KIAS
Best Angle of Climb, Sea Level 63 KIAS
Best Angle of Climb, 10,000 Feet 66 KIAS
Landing Approach (2950 lbs):
NormalApproach, Flaps Up 70-80 KIAS
NormalApproach, Flaps FULL 60-70 KIAS
Short Field Approach, Flaps FULL 60 KIAS
Balked Landing (2950 lbs):
Maximum Power, Flaps 20' 55 KIAS
Maximum Recommended Turbulent Air Penetration Speed:
3100 Lbs 110 KIAS
2600 Lbs 101 KIAS
2000 Lbs 88 KIAS
Maximum Demonstrated Crosswind Velocity:
Takeoff or Landing 15 KNOTS
Nov 1/01 4-5

SECTION 4 CESSNA
NOTE
Visually check airplane for general condition during walk-around

inspection. Airplane should be parked in a normal ground attitude
(refer to Figure 1-1) to ensure that fuel drain valves allow for
accurate sampling. Use of the refueling steps and assist handles
will simplify access to the upper wing surfaces for visual checks
and refueling operations. ln cold weather, remove even small
accumulations of frost, ice or snow from wing, tail and control
surfaces. Also, make sure that control sudaces contain no internal
accumulations of ice or debris. lf a night flight is planned, check
operation of all lights, and make sure a flashlight is available.
Figure 4-1. Preflight lnspection
4-6 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 4
CHECKLIST PROCEDURES
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
@ caerH
1. Pitot Tube Cover - REMOVE. Check for pitot stoppage.
2. Pilot's Operating Handbook -- AVAILABLE lN THE AIRPI.ANE.
3. Airplane Weight and Balance -- CHECKED.
4. Parking Brake - SET.
5. ControlWheel Lock -- REMOVE.
7. Avionics Master Switch -- OFF.
[, wlnnrnc
WHEN TURNING ON THE MASTER SWITCH,
USING AN EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE, OR
PULLNG THE PROPELLER THROUGH BY HAND,
TREAT THE PROPELLER AS IF THE IGNITION
SWITCH WERE ON. DO NOT STAND, NOR
ALLOW ANYONE ELSE TO STAND, WITHIN THE
ARC OF THE PROPELLER, SINCE A LOOSE OR
BROKEN WIRE OR A COMPONENT
MALFUNCTION COULD CAUSE THE PROPELLER
TO ROTATE.

9. Fuel Quantity lndicators -- CHECK QUANTIW AND
LOW FUEL ANNUNCTATORS (L LOW FUEL
EXTINGUISHED.
10. Avionics Master Switch -- ON.
11. Avionics Cooling Fan -- CHECK AUDIBLY FOR OPERATION.
12. Avionics Master Switch -- OFF.
13. Static Pressure Alternate Source Valve -- OFF.
Dec 1/97 4-7

SECTION 4 CESSNA
14. Annunciator Panel Switch -- PLACE AND HOLD lN TST

I eOS|TION and ensure all annunciators illuminate.
15. Annunciator Panel Test Switch -- RELEASE. Check that
appropriate annunciators remain on.
NOTE
When Master Switch is turned ON, some annunciators will

flash for approximately 10 seconds before illuminating
steadily. When panel TST switch is toggled up and held ln
position, all remaining lights will flash until the switch is
released.
16. Fuel Selector Valve -- BOTH.

17. Flaps -- EXTEND.
18. Pitot Heat -- ON (Carefully check that pitot tube is warm to the
touch within 30 seconds).
19. Pitot Heat - OFF.
21. Baggage Door -- CHECK, lock with key.
@ erueeruNAcE
I' 1. Rudder Gust Lock (if installed) -- REMOVE.

2.Tail Tie-Down -- DISCONNECT.
3. Control Surfaces CHECK freedom of movement and
security.
4. Trim Tab -- CHECK security.
5. Antennas -- CHECK for security of attachment and general
condition.
@ nlcnr WNG Trailing Edge
1. Aileron -- CHECK freedom of movement and security.

2. Flap -- CHECK for security and condition.
@ nrcnr wrNc
1. Wing Tie-Down -- DISCONNECT.
2. Fuel Tank Vent Opening -- CHECK for stoppage.
3. Main Wheel Tire -- CHECK for proper inflation and general
condition (weather checks, tread depth and wear, etc.-.).
4-8 Nov 15/00

CESSNA sEcTloN 4
4. Fuel Tank Sump Quick Drain Valves -- DRAIN at least

cupful of fuel (using sampler cup) from each sump location
check for water, sediment, and proper fuel grade before
flight and after each refueling. lf water is observed,
further samples until clear and then gently rock wings
lower tail to the ground to move any additional
to the sampling points. Take repeated samples from all f
drain points until all contamination has been removed.
contaminants are stll present, refer to WARNING below
do not fly airplane.
[ wannrno
IF, AFTER REPEATED SAMPLING, EVIDENCE OF
CONTAMINATION STILL EXISTS, THE AIBPLANE
SHOULD NOT BE FLOWN. TANKS SHOULD BE
DRAINED AND SYSTEM PURGED BY OUALIFIED
MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL. ALL EVIDENCE OF
CONTAMINATION MUST BE REMOVED BEFORE
FURTHER FLIGHT.
5. FuelQuantily -- CHECK VISUALLY for desired level.

6. Fuel Filler Cap -- SECURE and VENT UNOBSTRUCTED.
@ r,rose
1. Static Source Opening (right side of fuselage) -- CHECK for
blockage.
2. Fuel Strainer Quick Drain Valve (Located on bottom of
fuselage) -- DRAIN at least a cupful of fuel (using sampler
cup) from valve to check for water, sediment, and proper fuel
grade before each flight and after each refueling. lf water is
observed, take fufther samples until clear and then gently rock
wings and lower tail to the ground to move any additional
contaminants to the sampling points. Take repeated samples
from all fuel drain points, including the fuel selector, until all
contamination has been removed. lf contaminants are still
present, refer to WARNING above and do not fly airplane.
Nov 15/00 4-9

SECTION 4 CESSNA
3. Engine Oil Dipstick/Filler Cap -- CHECK oil level, then check

dipstick/filler cap SECURE. Do not operate with less than four
quarls. Fill to nine quafts for extended flight.
4. Engine Cooling Air lnlets -- CLEAR of obstructions.
5. Propeller and Spinner -- CHECK for nicks and security.
6. Air Filter -- CHECK for restrictions by dust or other foreign
matter.
7. Nose Wheel Strut and Tire -- CHECK for proper inflation of
strut and general condition (weather checks, tread depth and
wear, etc...) of tire.
L Static Source Opening (left side of fuselage) -- CHECK for
blockage.
@ r-err wrNG
1. Fuel Quantity -- CHECK VISUALLY for desired level.
2. Fuel Filler Cap -- SECURE and VENT UNOBSTRUCTED.
3. Fuel Tank Sump Quick Drain Valves -- DRAIN at least a
cupful of fuel (using sampler cup) from each sump location to
check for water, sediment, and proper fuel grade before each
flight and after each refueling. lf water is observed, take
further samples until clear and then gently rock wings and
lower tail to the ground to move any additional contaminants
to the sampling points. Take repeated samples from all fuel
drain points until all contamination has been removed. lf
contaminants are still present, refer to WARNING on page 4-9
and do not fly airplane.
4. Main Wheel Tire -- CHECK for proper inflation and general
condition (weather checks, tread depth and wear, etc...).
4-10 Nov 15/00

CESSNA sEcTroN 4
@ lerr WING Leading Edge

1. Pitot Tube Cover REMOVE and check opening for
stoppage.
2. Fuel Tank Vent Opening -- CHECK for stoppage.
3. Stall Warning Vane -- CHECK for freedom of movement. To
check the system, place the vane upward; a sound from the
warning horn with the Master Switch on will confirm system
operation.
4. Wing Tie-Down -- DISCONNECT.
5. Landingaxi Light(s) -- CHECK for condition and cleanliness
of cover.
@ LErr WING Traiting Edge

1. Aileron -- CHECK for freedom of movement and security.
2. Flap -- CHECK for security and condition.
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE
1. Preflight lnspection -- COMPLETE.
2. Passenger Briefing - COMPLETE.
3. Seats, Seat Belts, Shoulder Harnesses -- ADJUST and LOCK.
Ensure inertia reel locking.
4. Brakes -- TEST and SET.
5. Circuit Breakers -- CHECK lN.
6. Electrical Equipment -- OFF.
[, wnnunc
THE AVIONICS MASTER SWITCH MUST BE OFF I
DURING ENGINE START TO PREVENT
POSSIBLE DAMAGE TO AVIONICS.
7. Avionics Master Switch -- OFF. I
8. Autopilot (if installed) - OFF.
9. Cowl Flaps -- OPEN.
10. Fuel Selector Valve - BOTH.
1 1. Avionics Circuit Breakers -- CHECK lN.
Nov 15/00 4-11

SECTION 4 CESSNA
STARTING ENGINE (Wth Battery)

1. Throttle -- OPEN 1/4 INCH.
2. Propeller -- HIGH RPM.
4. Propeller Area -- CLEAR.
5. Master Switch - ON.
-I 6. Auxiliary Fuel Pump Switch -- ON.
z. Uxture'-- ADVACE untt fuel flow just starts to rise, then
I return to IDLE CUT OFF Position.
I 8. Auxiliary Fuel Pump -- OFF.
NOTE
I lt engine is warm, omit priming procedure of step 6, 7 and I

above.
I g. lgnition Switch -- START (release when engine starts).

I lo. Mixture -- ADVANCE smoothly to RICH when engine fires.
NOTE
I' lt engine floods, place mixture in idle cut off, open throttle
112 t full, and crank engine. When engine fires, advance
mixture to full rich and retard throttle promptly.
I I L Oil Pressure -- CHECK.

I lz.Flashing Beacon and Navigation Lights -- ON as required.
I' 13. Avionics Master Switch - ON.
14. Radios -- ON.
15. Flaps -- RETRACT.
4-12 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 4
STARTING ENGINE (With External Power)

1. Throttle -- OPEN 1/4 INCH.
4. Propeller Area - CLEAR.
5. External Power -- CONNECT to airplane receptacle.
7. Auxiliary Fuel Pump Switch -- ON.
8. Mixture -- ADVANCE until fuel flow just starts to rise, the n
return to IDLE CUT OFF position.
9. Auxiliary Fuel Pump -- OFF.
NOTE
lf engine is warm, omit priming procedure of steps 7, I and

9 above.
10. lgnition Switch -- START (release when engine starts).

11. Mixture -- ADVANCE smoothly to RICH when engine fires.
NOTE
lf engine floods, place mixture in idle cut off, open throttle I

112 lo full, and crank engine. When engine fires, advance
mixture to full rich and retard throttle promptly.
12. OtPressure -- CHECK. I

13. External Power -- DISCONNECT from airplane receptacle.
14. Flashing Beacon and Navigation Lights -- ON as '-r-"
ON.
required. --'
15. Avionics Master Switch -- I
16. Radios -- ON.
17. Flaps -- RETRACT.
Nov 15/00 4-13

SECTION 4 CESSNA
BEFORE TAKEOFF
1. Parking Brake -- SET.
3. Seats and Seat Belts -- CHECK SECURE.
4. Cabin Doors - CLOSED and LOCKED.
5. Flight Controls -- FREE and CORRECT.
6. Flight lnstruments - CHECK and SET.
7. Fuel Quantity -- CHECK.
8. Mixture -- RICH.
9. Fuel Selector Valve -- RECHECK BOTH.
l0.Throttle -- 1800 RPM.
a. Magnetos -- CHECK (RPM drop should not exceed 150
RPM on either magneto or 50 RPM differential between
magnetos).
b. Proeller -- CYCLE from high to low RPM; return to high
RPM (fullin).
c. Vacuum Gauge -- CHECK.
d. Engine lnstruments and Ammeter -- CHECK.
11. Annunciator Panel -- Ensure no annunciators are illuminated.
12. Throttle -- CHECK IDLE.
13. Throttle -- 1000 RPM or less.
14. Throttle Friction Lock -- ADJUST.
15. Strobe Lights -- AS DESIRED.
16. Radios and Avionics -- SET.
17. NAV/GPS/HSI Switch (if installed) -- SET.
18. Autopilot (if insalled) -- OFF.
19. Elevator Trim and Rudder Trim - SET for takeoff.
20. Wing Flaps -- SET for takeoff (0'TO 20").
22. Brakes -- RELEASE.
4-14 Nov 1/01

CESSNA SECTION 4
TAKEOFF
NORMAL TAKEOFF
1. Wing Flaps -- 0o - 20".

2. Power -- FULL THROTTLE and 2400 RPM.
3. Mixture -- RICH (mixture may be leaned to Maximum Power
Fuel Flow placard value).
4. Elevator Control -- LIFT NOSE WHEEL (at 50-60 KIAS).
5. Climb Speed -- 70 KIAS (flaps 20").
80 KIAS (flaps 0").
6. Wing Flaps -- RETRACT.
SHORT FIELD TAKEOFF
1. Wing Flaps -- 20".

2. Brakes -- APPLY.
4. Mixture -- Lean to obtain Maximum Power Fuel Flow placard
value.
5. Brakes -- RELEASE.
6. Elevator Control MAINTAIN SLIGHTLY TAIL LOW
ATTITUDE.
7. Climb Speed -- 58 KIAS (until all obstacles are cleared).
8. Wing Flaps -- RETRACT slowly after reaching 70 KIAS.
ENROUTE CLIMB
NORMAL CLIMB
1. Airspeed -- 85-95 KIAS.

2. Power - 23 in. Hg or FULL THROTTLE (whichever is less)
and 2400 RPM.
3. Mixture -- 15 GPH or FULL RICH (whichever is less).
5. Cowl Flaps -- OPEN as required.
Feb 3/97 4-15

SECTION 4 CESSNA
MAXIMUM PERFORMANCE CLIMB
1. Airspeed -- 80 KIAS at sea level to 72 KIAS at 10,000 feet.

(Refer to Section 5).
2. Power-- FULLTHROTTLE and 2400 RPM.
3. Mixture -- LEAN in accordance with Maximum Power Fuel
Flow placard value.
CRUISE
1. Power -- 15 - 23 in. Hg, 2000 - 24OO RPM (no more than
80%).
2. Elevator and Rudder Trim -- ADJUST.
3. Mixture -- LEAN.
4. Cowl Flaps -- CLOSED.
DESCENT
1. Power -- AS DESIRED.
2. Mixture -- ENRICHEN as required.
3. Cowl Flaps -- CLOSED.
I s. runvlcPS/HSI Switch (if installed) -- sET.
I O. Wing Flaps -- AS DESIRED (0'-10' below 140 KIAS; 10'-
20' below 120 KIAS; 20'- FULL below 100 KIAS).
BEFORE LANDING
1. Pilot and Passenger Seat Backs MOST UPRIGHT
POSITION.
2. Seats and Seat Belts -- SECURED and LOCKED.
4. Mixture -- RICH.
6. Landing/Taxi Lights -- ON.
7. Autopilot (if installed) -- OFF.
4-16 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 4
LANDING
NORMAL LANDING
1. Airspeed -- 70-80 KIAS (flaps UP).

2. Wing Flaps - AS DESIRED (0'- 10'below 140 KIAS;
10" - 20'below 120 KIAS;20" - FULL below 100 KIAS).
3. Airspeed -- 60-70 KIAS (flaps FULL).
4. Power -- REDUCE to idle as obstacle is cleared.
5. Trim -- ADJUST as desired.
6. Touchdown -- MAIN WHEELS FIRST.
7. Landing Roll-- LOWER NOSE WHEEL GENTLY.
8. Braking -- MINIMUM REQUIRED.
SHORT FIELD LANDING
1. Airspeed -- 70-80 KIAS (flaps UP).

2. Wing Flaps -- FULL (below 100 KIAS).
3. Airspeed -- 60 KIAS (untilflare).
4. Trim -- ADJUST as desired.
5. Touchdown -- MAIN WHEELS FIRST.
6. Brakes -- APPLY HEAVILY.
7. Wing Flaps -- RETRACT for maximum brake effectiveness.
BALKED LANDING

2. Wing Flaps -- RETRACT TO 20'.
3. Climb Speed -- 55 KIAS.
4. Wing Flaps -- RETRACT slowly after reaching a safe altitude
and 70 KIAS.
AFTER LANDING
1. Wing Flaps -- UP.
Nov 15/00 4-17

SECTION 4 CESSNA
SECURING AIRPLANE
1. Parking Brake -- SET.
2. Throttle -- IDLE.
| 3. Electrical Equipment, Avionics Master Switch, Autopilot (if
installed) -- OFF.
4. Mixture -- IDLE CUT-OFF (pulled full out).
7. Control Lock -- INSTALL.
8. Fuel Selector Valve -- LEFT or RIGHT to prevent cross
feeding.
4-18 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 4
AMPLIFIED PROCEDURES
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
The Preflight lnspection, described in Figure 4-1 and adjacent

checklist, is required prior to each flight. lf the airplane has been in
extended storage, has had recent major maintenance, or has been
operated from marginal airports, a more extensive exterior
inspection is recommended.
After major maintenance has been performed, the flight and trim
tab controls should be double checked for free and correct
movement and security. The security of all inspection plates on the
airplane should be checked following periodic inspections. lf the
airplane has been waxed or polished, check the external static
pressure source hole for stoppage.
lf the airplane has been exposed to much ground handling in a

crowded hangar, it should be checked for dents and scratches on
wings, fuselage, and tail surfaces, damage to navigation and anti-
collision lights, damage to nose wheel as a result of exceeding tow
limits, and avionics antennas.
Outside storage for long periods may result in dust and dirt
accumulation on the induction air filter, obstructions in airspeed
system lines, water contaminants in fuel tanks and insecUbird/rodent
nests in any opening. lf any water is detected in the fuel system, the
fuel tank sump quick drain valves, fuel reservoir quick drain valve,
and fuel strainer quick drain valve should all be thoroughly drained
again. Then, the wings should be gently rocked and the tail lowered
to the ground to move any further contaminants to the sampling
points. Repeated samples should then be taken at all quick drain
points until all contamination has been removed. lf, after repeated
sampling, evidence of contamination still exists, the fuel tanks
should be completely drained and the fuel system cleaned.
Additionally, if the airplane has been stored outside in windy or

gusty areas, or tied down adjacent to taxiing airplanes, special
attention should be paid to control surface stops, hinges, and
brackets to detect the presence of potential wind damage.
Feb 3/97 4-19

SECTION 4 CESSNA
the fatigue life of the blades.
Airplan ated from rough f h

altitudes, abnormal landing Y
check ail the landing gear, d
brakes. lf is insufficientlY e g
and taxi loads will be subjected on the airplane structure'
offuel fuel tank filler caPs

after or servicing' Fuel
d also ctions, ice or water,
osure
STARTING ENGINE
STARTING (GENERAL)
ln cooler weather, the engine compartment temperature drops off

rapidly following engine shutdown and the injector nozzle lines
remain nearly full of fuel.
smoothly to full rich as power develops.
4-20 Feb 3197

CESSNA SECTION 4
Should the engine tend to die after starting, turn on the auxiliary
fuel pump temporarily and adjust the throttle and/or mixture as
necessary to keep the engine running. ln the event of over priming
or flooding, turn off the auxiliary fuel pump, open the throttle from
112 lo full open, and continue cranking with the mixture full lean.
When the engine fires, smoothly advance the mixture control to full
rich and retard the throttle to desired idle speed.
lf the engine is under primed (most likely in cold weather with a

cold engine) it will not fire at all, and additional priming will be
necessary.
After starting, if the oil pressure indicator does not begin to show
pressure within 30 seconds in the summer time and approximately
one minute in very cold weather, stop the engine and investigate.
Lack of oil pressure can cause serious engine damage.
NOTE
Additional details concerning cold weather starting and

operation may be found under COLD WEATHER
OPERATION paragraphs in this section.
Recommended starter duty cycle. Crank the starter for 10

seconds followed by a 20 second cool down period. This cycle can
be repeated two additional times, followed by a ten minute cool
down period before resuming cranking. Repeat cranking procedures
above one more time. lf the engine still fails to start, an
investigation to determine the cause should be initiated.
TAXIING
When taxiing, it is important that speed and use of brakes be
held to a minimum and that all controls be utilized (Refer to Figure
4-2, Taxiing Diagram) to maintain directional control and balance.
Taxiing over loose gravel or cinders should be done at low

engine speed to avoid abrasion and stone damage to the propeller
tips.
Nov 15/00 4-21

SECTION 4 CESSNA
WIND DIRECTION
NOTE
Strong quartering tail winds require caution.

Avoid sudden bursts of the throttle and sharp
brakino when the airolane is in this attitude.
Use th-e steerable ndse wheel and rudder to
maintain direction.
0785T1 0 1 2
Figure 4-2. Taxiing Diagram
4-22 Feb 3197

CESSNA SECTION 4
BEFORE TAKEOFF
WARM UP
lf the engine idles (approximately

I'smoothly, 650 RPM) and accelerates
the airplane is ready for takeoff. Since the engine is
closely cowled for efficient in-flight cooling, precautions should be
taken to avoid overheating during prolonged engine operation on
the ground. Also, long periods of idling may cause fouled spark
plugs.
MAGNETO CHECK
The magneto check should be made at 1800 RPM as follows.

Move ignition switch first to R position and note RPM. Next move
switch back to BOTH to clear the other set of plugs. Then move
switch to the L position, note RPM and return the switch to the
BOTH position, RPM drop should not exceed 150 RPM on either
magneto or show greater than 50 RPM differential between
magnetos. lf there is a doubt concerning operation of the ignition
system, RPM checks at higher engine speeds will usually confirm
whether a deficiency exists.
An absence of RPM drop may be an indication of faulty

grounding of one side of the ignition system or should be cause for
suspicion that the magneto timing is set in advance of the setting
specified.
ALTERNATOR CHECK
Prior to flights where verification of proper alternator and

allernator control unit operation is essential (such as night or
instrument flights), a positive verification can be made by loading
the electrical system momentarily (3 to 5 seconds) with the landing
light or by operating the wing flaps during the engine runup (1800
RPM). The ammeter will remain within a needle width of its initial
reading if the alternator and alternator control unit are operating
properly.
Nov 1/01 4-23

SECTION 4 CESSNA
LANDING LGHTS
lf landing lights are to be used to enhance the visibility of the

airplane in the traffic pattern or enroute, it is recommended that only
th taxi light be used. This will extend the service life of the landing
light appreciably.
TAKEOFF
POWER CHECK
smoothly and turn approximately 2350 - 24OO RPM .
Prior to takeoff from fields which require maximum performance,

the mixture should be leaned to the fuel flow values provided on the
Maximum Power Fuel Flow placard in a full throttle, static runup.
Atter full throttle is applied, adjust the t k

clockwise to prevent the throttle from cree a
maximum power position. Similar friction lock d
be made as required in other flight conditions d
throttle setting.
WING FLAP SETTINGS
Normal takeoffs are accomplished with wing flaps 0' to 20'.

Using 20'wing flaps reduces the ground roll and total distance over
an obstacle by approximately 20 percent. Flap deflections greater
than 20' are not approved for takeoff.
4-24 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 4
On a short field, 20' wing flaps and an obstacle clearance speed

of 58 KIAS should be used. lf 20" wing flaps are used for takeoff,
they should be left down until all obstacles are cleared and a safe
flap retraction speed of 70 KIAS is reached.
Soft or rough field takeoffs are performed with 20" flaps by lifting
the airplane off the ground as soon as practical in a slightly tail low
attitude. lf no obstacles are ahead, the airplane should be leveled
off immediately to accelerate to a higher climb speed.
CROSSWIND TAKEOFF
Takeoffs into strong crosswind conditions normally are performed

with the minimum flap setting necessary for the field length, to
minimize the drift angle immediately after takeoff. With the ailerons
partially deflected inlo the wind, the airplane is accelerated to a
speed slightly higher than normal, then pulled off briskly to prevent
possible settling back to the runway while drifting. When clear of the
ground, make a coordinated turn into the wind to correct for drift.
ENROUTE CLIMB
Normal climbs are performed at 85-95 KIAS with flaps up, 23 ln.
Hg. or full throttle (whichever is less) and 2400 RPM for the best
combination of performance, visibility and engine cooling. The
mixture should be set to 15 GPH or full rich (whichever is less) until
reaching the altitude at which full throttle is reached, after which no
further adjustment of the mixture control is needed.
lf it is necessary to climb rapidly to clear mountains or reach

favorable winds at higher altitudes, the best rate of climb speed
should be used with maximum power. This speed (shown in
Section 5) is 80 KIAS at sea level, decreasing to 72 KIAS at 10,000
feet.
Feb 3/97 4-25

SECTION 4 CESSNA
lf an obstruction ahead requires a steep climb angle, a best

angle of climb air speed should be used with flaps up and maximum
power. This speed is 63 KIAS at sea level, increasing to 66 KIAS at
10,000 feet. This type of climb should be of minimum duration and
engine temperatures should be carefully monitored due to the low
climb speed.
For maximum power, the mixture should be set in accordance
with the Maximum Power Fuel Flow placard.
CRUISE
Normal cruising is performed between 55% and 80% rated
power with the mixture set to peak EGT. Manifold pressures and
engine speed should normally be kept within the green arc ranges
on the manifold pressure gauge and tachometer. However, at lower
altitudes and at high allowable cruise powers, it is permissible to
use any manifold pressure note in the cruise performance chafts in
Section 5.
NOTE
Cruising should be done al 75"/" power as much as

practicable until a total of 50 hours has accumulated or oil
consumption has stabilized. Operation at this higher power
will ensure proper seating of the rings and is applicable to
new engines, and engines in service following cylinder
replacement or top overhaul of one or more cylinders.
The Cruise Performance charts in Section 5 provide the pilot with

detailed information concerning the cruise performance of the Model
182S in still air. Power and altitude, as well as winds aloft, have a
strong influence on the time and fuel needed to complete any flight.
The Cruise Performance table of Figure 4-3 illustrates some of
these etfects and may be used as a guide along with winds aloft
information in selecting an altitude and power setting for a given
trip. The selection of cruise altitude on the basis of most favorable
wind conditions and the use of the lower power settings consistent
with trip needs are significant factors which should be considered
on every trip to reduce fuel consumption.
4-26 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 4
For reduced noise levels, it is desirable to select the lowest RPM

in the green arc range for a given percent power that will provide
smooth engine operation. The cowl flaps should be opened, if
necessary, to maintain the cylinder head temperature at
approximately two-thirds of the normal operating range (green arc).
80% POWER 75% POWER 65% POWER 55% POWER

ALTITUDE KTAS NMPG KTAS NMPG KTAS NMPG KTAS NMPG
4000 feet 137 102 133 106 125 113 1r6 12.O
6000 feet 140 10.4 136 108 127 11.5 118 12.2
8000 feel 130 11.7 120 124

10000 feet 't32 1't.9 121 't2.6
Figure 4-3. Cruise Performance Table
Cruise data in this handbook is based on a

recommended lean mixture setting which may be established using-
the EGT indicator at powers of 8O% MCP and lower as follows: I
1. Lean the mixture slowly until the EGT peaks and begins to
drop.
2. Enrichen as needed to ensure operation at peak.
3. lf engine operation is rough at peak EGT, further enrichen for
smooth operation.
Any change in altitude or power setting will require a change in

the recommended lean mixture setting and a recheck of the EGT
setting.
Nov 15/00 4-27

SECTION 4 CESSNA
Operation at peak EGT provides the best fuel economy.

Operating at best power mixture strength (125'F rich of peak EGT)
results in approximately 8o/" less range and a 3 knot increase in
speed.
The EGT table of Figure 4-4 summarizes the defined mixture

strengths available for the 182S.
MIXTURE DESCRIPTION EXHAUST GAS

TEMPERATURE
RECOMMENDED LEAN Peak EGT
(Pilot's Operating Handbook)
BEST POWER 125'F Rich
Figure 4-4. EGT Table
SAVINGS PROCEDURES FOR NORMAL OPERATIONS
For best fuel economy during normal operations, the following

are recommended.
1. After engine start and for all ground operations, set the throttle
to 1200 RPM and lean the mixture for maximum RPM. Leave
the mixture at this setting until beginning the BEFORE
TAKEOFF checklist. After the BEFORE TAKEOFF checklist is
complete re-lean the mixture as described above until ready
for TAKEOFF.
2. Adjust the mixture for placarded fuel flows during maximum

continuous power climbs.
3. Adjust the mixture at any altitude for RECOMMENDED LEAN

fuel flow with power settings at 8O"/. or less.
4-28 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 4
Using the above recommended procedures can provide fuel

savings in excess of 5% when compared to typical operations at full
rich mixture. ln addition, the above procedures will minimize spark
plug fouling since the reduction in fuel consumption results in a
proportional reduction in tetraethyl lead passing through the engine.
FUEL VAPOR PROCEDURES
The engine fuel system can become susceptible to fuel vapor

formation on the ground during warm weather. This will generally
occur when the outside ambient air temperature is above 80"F.
The situation is further aggravated by the fact that the engine fuel
flows are lower at idle and taxi engine speeds. When vapor occurs
as evidenced by idle engine speed and fuel flow fluctuations, the
following procedures are recommended.
1. With the mixture full rich, setthe throttle at 1800 RPM to 2000
RPM. Maintain this power setting for 1 to 2 minutes or until
smooth engine operation returns.
2. Retard the throttle to idle to verify normalengine operation.

3. Advance the throttle to 1200 RPM and lean the mixture as
described under FUEL SAVINGS PROCEDURES FOR
NORMAL OPERATIONS.
4. Just prior to TAKEOFF, apply full throttle, for approximately 10

seconds to verify smooth engine operation for takeoff.
NOTE
When the engine is operated above 1800 RPM, the

resulting increased fuel flow also makes for lower fuel
temperatures throughout the engine fuel system. This
increased flow purges the fuel vapor and the cooler fuel
minimizes vapor formation.
Nov 15/00 4-29

SECTION 4 CESSNA
STALLS
The stall characteristics are conventional and aural warning is
provided by a stall warning horn which sounds between 5 and 10
knots above the stall in allconfigurations.
Power off stall speeds at maximum weight for both forward and
aft C.G. positions are presented in Section 5.
LANDING
NORMAL LANDING
Normal landing approaches can be made with power on or power

off with any flap setting desired. Surface winds and air turbulence
are usually the primary factors in determining the most comfortable
approach speeds.
Actual touchdown should be made with power otf and on the

main wheels first to reduce the landing speed and subsequent need
for braking in the landing roll. The nose wheel is lowered to the
runway gently after the speed has diminished to avoid unnecessary
nose gear loads. This procedure is especially important in rough or
soft field landings.
lo-.0 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 4
SHORT FIELD LANDING
For a short field landing in smooth air conditions, make power off
approach at 60 KIAS with full flaps. (Slightly higher approach
speeds should be used under turbulent air conditions.) lf power is
added to adjust glide path, it should be again reduced to idle after
all approach obstacles are cleared, the approach speed maintained
by lowering the nose of the airplane. Touchdown should be made
with power off and on the main wheels first. lmmediately after
touchdown, lower the nose wheel and apply heavy braking as
required. For maximum brake effectiveness, retract the flaps, hold
the control wheel full back, and apply maximum brake pressure
without sliding the tires.
CROSSWIND LANDING
When landing in a strong crosswind, use the minimum flap

setting required for the field length. Although the crab or
combination method of drift correction may be used, the wing low
method gives the best control. After tou-chdown, hold a stiaight
course with the steerable nose wheel and occasional braking if
necessary.
The maximum allowable crosswind velocity is dependent upon

pilot capability as well as airplane limitations. Operation in direct
crosswinds of 15 knots has been demonstrated.
BALKED LANDING
ln a balked landing (go-around) climb, reduce the flap setting to

20' immediately after full power is applied. After all obstacles are
cleared and a safe altitude and airspeed are obtained, the wing
flaps should be retracted.
Nov 15/00 4-311

SECTION 4 CESSNA
COLD WEATHER OPERATION

Special consideration should be given to the operation of the
airplane fuel system during the winter season or prior to any flight in
cold temperatures. Proper preflight draining of the fuel system is
especially important and will eliminate any free water accumulation.
The use of additives such as isopropyl alcohol or diethylene glycol
monomethyl ether may also be desirable. Refer to Section 8 for
information on the proper use of additives.
Cold weather often causes conditions which require special care

during airplane operations. Even small accumulations of frost, ice,
or snow must be removed, particularly from wing, tail and all control
surfaces to assure satisfactory flight performance and handling.
Also, control suraces must be free of any internal accumulations of
ice or snow.
lf snow or slush covers the takeoff surface, allowance must be

made for takeoff distances which will be increasingly extended as
the snow or slush depth increases. The depth and consistency of
this cover can, in fact, prevent takeoff in many instances.
STARTING
[,wenntrue
WHEN PULLING THE PROPELLER THROUGH BY
HAND, TREAT tT AS IF THE IGNITON SWITCH IS
TURNED ON. A LOOSE OR BROKEN GROUND
WIRE ON EITHER MAGNETO COULD CAUSE
THE ENGINE TO FIRE.
Prior to starting on cold mornings, it is advisable to pull the

propeller through several times by hand to "break loose" or
"limber" the oil, thus conserving battery energy.
lo-r, Nov 15/00

CESSNA sEcTroN 4
When air temperatures are below 20"F (-6"C), the use of an

external preheater and an external power source are recommended
whenever possible to obtain positive starting and to reduce wear
and abuse to the engine and electrical system. Preheat willthaw the
oil trapped in the oil cooler, which probably will be congealed prior
to starting in extremely cold temperatures.
When using an external power source, the master switch must be

in the OFF position before connecting the external power source to
the airplane receptacle. See Seciion 7, Ground Service Plugl
Receptacle, for external power source operations. I
Cold weather starting procedures are the same as the normal
starting procedures. Use caution to prevent inadveent forward
movement of the airplane during starting when parked on snow or
ice.
NOTE
lf the engine does not start during the first few attempts, or if
engine firing diminishes in strength, it is probable that the
spark plugs have been frosted over. Preheat must be used
before another start is attempted.
During cold weather operations, no indication will be apparent on

the oil temperature gage prior to takeotf if outside air temperatures
are very cold. After a suitable warm up period (2 to 5 minutes at
1000 RPM), accelerate the engine several times to higher engine
RPM. lf the engine accelerates smoothly and the oil pressure re-
mains normal and steady, the airplane is ready for takeoff.
WINTERIZATION KIT
A winterization kit is provided and may be utilized when cold

weather operations are conducted. Refer to WINTERIZATION KIT in_
the Supplments, Section 9 for installation and operational details. I
Nov 15/00 4-33

SECTION 4 CESSNA
HOT WEATHER OPERATION

Refer to the general warm temperature starting information under
Starting Engine in this section. Avoid prolonged engine operation on
the ground.
NOISE CHARACTERISTICS
AND NOISE REDUCTION
The certificated noise level for the Model 182S at 3100 pounds
maximum weight is 79.7 dB(A) with a 2-bladed propeller and 77.7
dB(A) with a three-bladed propeller. No determination has been
made by the Federal Aviation Administration that the noise levels of
this airplane are or should be acceptable or unacceptable for
operation at, into, or out of, any airport.
The following procedures are suggested to minimize the effect of

airplane noise on the public:
1. Pilots operating airplanes under VFR over outdoor assemblies

of persons, recreational and park areas, and other noise
sensitive areas should make every effoil'to fly not less than
2000 feet above the surface, weather permitting, even though
flight at a lower level may be consistent with the provisions of
govemment regulations.
2. During departure from or approach to an airport, climb after

takeoff and descent for landing should be made so as to avoid
prolonged flight at low altitude near noise sensitive areas.
NOTE
The above recommended procedures do not apply where

they would conflict with Air Tratfic Control clearances or
instructions, or where, in the pilot's judgment, an altitude of
less than 2000 feet is necessary to adequately exercise the
duty to see and avoid other airplanes.
lo-ro Nov 15/00

CESSNA sEcTroN 5
MODEL 182S PERFORMANCE
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
lntroduction 5-3
Use of Peormance Charts 5-3
Sample Problem 5-3
Takeoff 5-4
Cruise 5-5
Fuel Required 5-6
Landing 5-8
Demonstrated Operating Temperature 5-8
Figure 5-1, Airspeed Calibration - Normal Static Source . . . . . 5-9
Airspeed Calibration - Allernate Static Source 5-10
Figure 5-2, Altimeter Correction 5-11
Figure 5-3, Temperature Conversion Chafi 5-12
Figure 5-4, Stall Speeds 5-13
Figure 5-5, Crosswind Components 5-14
Figure 5-6, Short Field Takeoff Distance - 3100 Lbs 5-15
Short Field Takeoff Distance - 2700 Lbs 5-16
Short Field Takeoff Distance - 2300 Lbs 5-17
Figure 5-7, Maximum Rate Of Climb 5-18
Figure 5-8, Time, Fuel, And Distance To Climb 5-19
Figure 5-9, CruisePerformance 5-21
Figure 5-10, Range Profile 5-31
Figure 5-1 1, Endurance Profile 5-33
Figure 5-12, Short Field Landing Distance 5-35
Dec 1/97 5-11(5-2 blank)

CESSNA SECTION 5
INTRODUCTION
Pedormance data charts on the following pages are presented
so that you may know what to expect from the airplane under
various conditions, and also, to facilitate the planning of flights in
detail and with reasonable accuracy. The data in the chas has
been computed from actual flight tests with the airplane and engine
in good condition and using average piloting techniques.
It should be noted that performance information presented in the
range and endurance profile charts allows for 45 minutes reserve
fuel at the specified cruise power. Fuel flow data for cruise is based
on the recommended lean mixture setting at all altitudes. Some
indeterminate variables such as mixture leaning technique, fuel
metering characteristics, engine and propeller condition, and air
turbulence may account for variations of 10% or more in range and
endurance. Therefore, it is important to utilize all available
information to estimate the fuel required for the particular flight and
to flight plan in a conseruative manner.
USE OF PERFORMANCE CHARTS

Performance data is presented in tabular or graphical form to
illustrate the effect of different variables. Sufficiently detailed
information is provided in the tables so that conservative values can
be selected and used to determine the particular pedormance
figure with reasonable accuracy.
SAMPLE PROBLEM
The following sample flight problem utilizes information from the
various charts to determine the predicted performance data for a
typical flight. Assume the following information has already been
determined:
AI RPLANE CONFIGURATION:
Takeoff weight 3100 Pounds
Usable fuel 88.0 Gallons
TAKEOFF CONDITIONS
Field pressure altitude 1500 Feet
Temperature 28'C (16'C Above
Standard)
Wind component along runway 12 Knot Headwind
Field length 3500 Feet
Nov 15/00 5-3

SECTION 5 CESSNA
PERFORMANCE MODEL 182S
CRUISE CONDITIONS:
Totaldistance 450 Nautical Miles
Pressure altitude 7500 Feet
Temperature 160
Expected wind enroute 10 Knot Headwind
LANDING CONDITIONS:
Field pressure altitude 2000 Feet
Temperature 25'C
Field length 3000 Feet
TAKEOFF
The takeoff distance chart, Figure 5-5, should be consulted,

keeping in mind that distances shown are based on the short field
technique. Conservative distances can be established by reading
the chart at the next higher value of weight, altitude and
temperature. For example, in this particular sample problem, the
takeoff distance information presented for a weight of 3100 pounds,
pressure altitude of 2000 feet and a temperature of 30'C should be
used and results in the following:
Ground roll 1055 Feet

Total distance to clear a S0-foot obstacle 2035 Feet
These distances are well within the available takeoff field length.
However, a correction for the effect of wind may be made baseci on
Note 3 of the takeoff chart. The correction for a 12 knot headwind is:
12 Knots
= jo/o Decrease
,l
X 10"/o
9 Knots
This results in the following distances, corrected for wind:
Ground roll, zero wind 1 055

Decrease in ground roll -137
(1055 feet X13%)
Corrected ground roll 918 Feet
5-4 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 5
Total distance to clear a

SO-foot obstacle, zero wind 2035
Decrease in total distance
13%)
(2035 feet x -ry
Corrected total distance
to clear SO-foot obstacle 1770 Feet
CRUISE
The cruising altitude should be selected based on a

consideration of trip length, winds aloft, and the airplane's
performance. A typical cruising altitude and the expected wind
enroute have been given for this sample problem. However, the
power setting selection for cruise must be determined based on
several considerations. These include the cruise performance
characteristics presented in Figure 5-9, the range prof ile char
presented in Figure 5-10, and the endurance profile chaft presented
in Figure 5-1 1.
The relationship between power and range is illustrated by the

range profile chart. Considerable fuel savings and longer range
result when lower power settings are used. For this sample problem,
a cruise power of approximately 60% will be used.
The cruise performance chaft, Figure 5-9, is entered at 8000 feet

altitude and 20'C above standard temperature. These values most
nearly correspond to the planned altitude and expected temperature
conditions. The engine speed chosen is 2400 RPM and 21 inches
of manifold pressure, which results in the following:
Power 66%
True airspeed 134 Knots
Cruise fuelflow 11.3 GPH
Nov 15/00 c-c

SECTION 5 CESSNA
FUEL REQUIRED
The total fuel requirement for the flight may be estimated using
the performance information in Fgure 5-8 and Figure 5-9. For this
sample problem, Figure 5-8 shows that a normal climb from 2000
feet to 8000 feet requires 2.7 gallons of fuel. The corresponding
distance during lhe climb is 18 nautical miles. These values are for
a standard temperature and are sufficiently accurate for most flight
planning purposes. However, a further correction for the effect of
temperature may be made as noted on the climb chart. The
approximate effect of a non-standard temperature is to increase the
time, fuel, and distance by 10% for each 10'C above standard
temperature, due to the lower rate of climb. ln this case, assuming a
temperature 16'C above standard the correction would be:
16" X 10% = 16"/" lncrease

10"c
With this factor included, the fuel estimate would be calculated as

follows:
Fuel to climb, standard temperature 2.7

lncrease due to non-standard temperature o.4
(2.7 X 16%)
Corrected fuel to climb 3.1 Gallons
Using a similar procedure for the distance to cfimb results in 21

nautical miles.
The resultant cruise distance is:
Totaldistance 450
Climb distance -21
Cruise distance 429
NauticalMiles
5-6 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 5
With an expected 10 knot headwind, the ground speed for cruise is

predicted to be:
134 I
-10
124 Knots I
Therefore, the time required for the cruise portion of the trip is:
429 Nautical Miles = 3.S Hours

lZ Knots
The fuel required for cruise is:
3.5 hours X 11.3 gallons/hour = 39.1 Gallons
A 45-minute reserve requires:
4
u r'r.3
rr. gallons / hour = 8.5 Gallons
6
The total estimated fuel required is as follows:
Engine start, taxi, and takeoff 1.7

Climb 3.1
Cruise 39.1
Reserve 8.5 I
Totalfuel required 52.4 Gallons I
Once the flight is undenruay, ground speed checks will provide a
more accurate basis for estimating the time enroute and the
corresponding fuel required to complete the trip with ample reserve.
Nov 15/00 5-7

SECTION 5 CESSNA
LANDING
A procedure similar to takeoff should be used for estimating the

llandig distance at the destination airport. Figure 5-12 presents
landing distance information for the short field technique. The
distances corresponding to 2000 feet and 30'C are as follows:
Ground roll 670 Feet

Total distance to clear a 50{oot obstacle 1480 Feet
A correction for the effect of wind may be made based on Note 2

of the landing chart, using the same procedure as outlined for
takeoff.
DEMONSTRATED OPERATING TEMPERATURE

Satisfactory engine cooling has been demonstrated for this
airplane with an outside air temperature 23"C above standard. This
is not to be considered as an operating limitation. Reference should
be made to Section 2 for engine operating limitations.
5-8 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 5
AIRSPEED CALIBRATION
NORMAL STATIC SOURCE
CONDITION:
Power required for levelflight or maximum power descent.
FLAPS
UP
KIAS 55 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
KCAS 62 65 73 82 90 100 109 118 127 137 146 156
FLAPS
20"
KIAS 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120--
KCAS 53 58 64 72 81 91 100 110 119 --
FLAPS
FULL
KIAS 40 50 60 70 80 90 95
KCAS 51 56 64 72 81 91 95
Figure 5-1. Airspeed Calibration (Sheet 1 ot 2)
Feb 3/97 5-9

SECTION 5 CESSNA
AIRSPEED CALIBRATION
ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE
NOTE:
Windows closed, ventilators closed, cabin heater, cabin air, and defroster on
maximum.
CONDITION:
Power required for level flight or maximum power descent.
FLAPS
UP
KIAS i0 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
ALT )2 72 82 92 103 114 124 133 143 153 164
KIAS
FLAPS
20"
KIAS i0 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
ALT t0 60 70 81 92 102 112 121
KIAS
FLAPS
FULL
KIAS )0 60 70 80 90 95
ALT +3 57 68 79 89 93
KIAS
\
Figure 5-1. Airspeed Calibration (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-10 Dec 1197

CESSNA SECTION 5
ALTIMETER CORRECTION
ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE
NOTE:
Add correction to desired altitude to obtain indicated altitude to flv.

Windows closed, ventilators closed, cabin heater, cabin air, nd defroster on
maxrmum.
CONDITIONS:
Power required for level flight or maximum power descent cruise configura-
tion. Altimeter corrections Tor the takeoff and landing configuration are less
than 50 feet.
CONDITION CORRECTION TO BE ADDED-FEET

FLAPS KIAS - alternate static source ON
UP 60 80 100 120 140 160
S.L. 20 -10 -30 -60 -90 -120
2000 ft. 20 -10 -30 -60 -90 -1 30
4000 ft. 20 -10 -30 -70 100 -140
6000 ft. 30 -10 -40 -70 110 -140
8000 ft. 30 -10 -40 -80 110 -150
10,000 t. 30 -10 -40 -80 't20 -160
12,000 ft. 30 -10 -40 -80 120 -170
14,000 ft. 30 -10 -50 -90 't20 -1 80
Figure 5-2. Altimeter Correction
Feb 3/97 5-11

SECTION 5 CESSNA
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION CHART
F
H60
z
I.JJ
fr
T
+40
U)
UJ
]U
.
fl20
o
DEGREES - CELSIUS
Figure 5-3. Temperature Conversion Chad
5-12 Feb 3/97

CESSNA sEcTroN 5
STALL SPEEDS AT 31OO POUNDS
Conditions:
Power Off
MOST REARWARD CENTER OF GRAVITY
ANGLE OF BANK
FLAP
SETTIN( 00 30' 45" 60'
KIAS KCAS KIAS KCAS KIAS KCAS KIAS KCAS
UP 40 54 43 58 48 64 57 76
20" 29 50 31 54 34 59 41 71
FULL 35 49 38 53 42 58 49 69
MOST FORWARD CENTER OF GRAVITY
ANGLE OF BANK
FLAP
00 300 450 600
SETTINC
KIAS KCAS KIAS KCAS KIAS KCAS KIAS KCAS
UP 43 56 46 60 51 67 61 79
20" 35 52 38 56 42 62 49 74
FULL 36 50 39 54 43 59 51 71
NOTES:
1. Altitude loss durinq a stall recovery mav be as much as 250 feet.

2. KIAS values are aproximate.
Figure 5-4. Stall Speeds
Feb 3/97 5-13

sEcTroN 5 CESSNA
WIND COMPONENTS
NOTE
Vaximum demonstrated crosswind velocity is 15 knots (not a limitation).
f
35
30
o 25
z
o
t-<= 20
cl
z-
V
J
15
I
t-
z
l
10
z
o

5
o
= 0
o
c
2a 5
-=J
== 10
= 15
0510f520253035
CROSSWND COMPONENT . KNOTS
Figure 5-5. Crosswind Components
5-14 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 5
SHORT FIELD TAKEOFF DISTANCE

AT 31OO POUNDS
CONDITIONS:
Flaps 20'
2400 RPM, Full Throttle and Mixture Set Prior to Brake Release
Cowl Flaps Open
Paved, Level, Dry Bunwav
Zero Wind
Lift Off: 49 KIAS
Speed at 50 Ft: 58 KIAS
0'c 10'c 20'c 30"c 40"c

Press Grnd Iotal Grnd fotal Grnd l-otal Grnd otal Grnd Total
Roll =t To Roll To Roll :t ro Roll Ft TO Roll Ft To
Att =t
Ft llear Ft llear Ft ]lear Ft Clear Ft Clear
ln 50 Ft t0 Ft t0 Ft 50 Ft 50 Ft
Feet f,bst f,bst fbst Obst Obst
S. L. 715 1 365 765 1460 825 1570 885 1680 945 1800
1000 775 1490 835 1600 900 't720 965 1 845 1030 1 980
2000 850 1 635 915 1760 980 1 890 1055 2035 1 130 2190
3000 925 1800 995 1 940 1070 2090 1 150 2255 1235 2435
4000 1015 1 990
'1090 2150 1175 2325 1260 2515 1355 2720
5000 1110 2210 1 195 2395 1290 2595 1 385 2820 1485 3070
6000 1220 2470 1315 2690 1415 2930 1520 3200 I 635 3510
7000 1 340 2785 1445 3045 1560 3345 1675 3685
8000 1480 3175 1 595 3500 1720 3880
NOTES:
1. Short field technique as specified in Section 4.

S 2. Prior to takeoff, the mixture should be leaned to the Maximum Power
Fuel Flow placard value in a full throttle, static runup.
3. Decrease distances 1Oo/" for each 9 knots headwind. For operation
with tail winds up to 10 knots, increase distances by 1eo/" lor each 2
knots.
4. For operation on dry, grass runway, increase distances by 15% of
the "ground roll" figure.
Figure 5-6. Short Field Takeotf Distance (Sheet 1 of 3)
Nov 15/00 5-15

SECTION 5 CESSNA

AT 27OO POUNDS
CONDITIONS:
Flaps 20"
2400 RPM. Full Throttle and Mixture Set Prior to Brake Release
Cowl Flaps Open
Paved, Level, Dry Runway
Zero Wind
Lift Off: 45 KIAS
0"c 10'c 20"c 30'c 40'c

Grnd l-otal Grnd l-olal Grnd Total Grnd Total Grnd otal
Roll :t To Roll To Roll Ft To Roll Ft To Roll Ft To
Press =t
Alr Ft llear Ft llear Ft Clear Ft Clear Ft Clear
i0 Ft 50 Fr 50 Ft 50 Ft 50 Ft
ln )bst f,bst Obst Obst Obst
Feet
S. L. 520 995 560 1065 600 11 35 645 1215 690 1295
1 000 565 1 080 610 1 155 655 1235 700 1320 750 1410
2000 615 1 180 66s 1260 710 1 350 765 1445 820 1545
3000 675 1285 725 1 380 775 1480 835 1 585 895 1695
4000 735 1410 790 1510 850 1625 910 1740 975 1870
5000 80s 1 550 865 1 665 930 1790 1000 1 920 1 070 2065
6000 880 1705 950 1840 1020 1 980 1095 2135 1175 2300
7000 965 1 890 1 040 2040 1 120 2205 1200 2380 1 290 2575
8000 1060 2100 1 145 2275 1230 2465 1320 2675 1420 2910
NOTES:

2. Prior to takeoff, the mixture should be leaned to the Maximum Power
3. Decrease distances 1O"/" lor each 9 knots headwind. For operation
with tail winds up to 10 knots, increase distances by 10% for each 2
knots.
Figure 5-6. Short Field Takeoff Distance (Sheet 2 of 3)
s-16 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 5

AT 23OO POUNDS
CONDITIONS:
Flaps 20"
2400 RPM, Full Throttle and Mixture Set Prior to Brake Release
Cowl Flaps Open
Paved, Level, Dry Runway
Zero Wind
Lift Off: 42 KIAS
0'c 10'c 20'c 30"c 40'c

Grnd fotal Grnd fotal Grnd fotal Grnd fotal Grnd Iotal
Press Roll =t To Roll t To Roll =t To Roll Ft To Roll =t To
Alr Ft llear Ft llear FI llear Ft llear Ft llear
i0 Fr i0 Ft t0 Ft t0 Ft t0 Ft
ln )bst )bst f,bst f,bst f,bst
Feet
S. L. 365 705 390 750 420 800 450 850 480 905
1 000 395 765 425 815 455 870 490 925 520 985
2000 430 830 460 885 495 940 s30 1 005 565 1070
3000 470 900 505 960 540 1025 580 1 090 620 1165
4000 510 980 550 1 045 590 1115 630 1 190 675 '1270
5000 555 1 065 600 1140 640 1220 690 1 305 735 1390
6000 610 1165 655 1 250 700 1335 755 1430 805 1530
7000 665 1275 715 't370 770 1470 825 1570 885 1685
8000 730 1 405 785 1510 845 1 620 905 1 735 970 1865
NOTES:

S 2. Prior to takeoff, lhe mixture should be leaned to the Maximum power
3. Decrease distances 1O"/" lor each 9 knots headwind. For operation
with tail winds up to 10 knots, increase distances by 10%for each2
knots.
Figure 5-6. Short Field Takeoff Distance (Sheet 3 of 3)
Nov 15/00 S-'t7

SECTION 5 CESSNA
MAXIMUM RATE.OF.CLIMB AT 31OO POUNDS
CONDITIONS:
Flaps Up
2400 RPM, Full Throttle, Mixture Set to Maximum Power Fuel F ow p acard
value
Cowl Flaps Open
\
PRESS CLIMB RATE OF CLIMB - FPM

ALT SPEED
FT KIAS -20"c 0"c 20"c 40'c
S.L. 80 1 055 980 905 835
2000 79 945 875 805 735
4000 78 840 770 705 635
6000 77 735 670 605 535
8000 75 625 560 495 430
10,000 74 520 455 390 330
12,000 73 410 350 285 225
14,000 72 310 250 190 130
Figure 5-7. Maximum Rate of Climb
5-18 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 5
TIME, FUEL AND DISTANCE TO CLIMB

AT 31OO POUNDS
MAXIMUM RATE OF CLIMB
CONDITIONS:
Flaps Up
2400 RPM, Full Throttle, Mixture Set to Maximum Power Fuel Flow placard
value
Cowl Flaps Open
Standard Temperature \
PRESS RATE FROM SEA LEVEL

CLIMB
ALT OF TIME FUEL
SPEED DIST
FT
KIAS
CLIMB IN USED
FPM NM
MIN GAL
S.L. 80 925 0 0.0 0
2000 79 835 2 0.8 3
4000 78 750 5 1.5 7
6000 77 660 8 2.3 11
8000 75 565 11 3.2 16
10,000 74 470 15 4.2 21
12,000 73 375 20 5.2 29
14,000 72 285 26 6.5 38
NOTES:
Figure 5-8. Time, Fuel and Distance to Climb (Sheet 1 o 2)
Nov 15/00 5-19

SECTION 5 CESSNA
TIME, FUEL AND DISTANCE TO CLIMB

AT 31OO POUNDS
NORMAL CLIMB .90 KIAS
CONDITIONS:
Flaps Up
2400 RPM, 23 in. Hg. or Full Throttle (whichever is less), Mixture 15 GPH or
Full Rich (whichever is less)
Cowl Flaps As Required.
Standard Temoerature
PRESS RATE FROM SEA LEVEL

CLIMB
ALT SPEED OF TIME FUEL
FT CLIMB DIST
KIAS IN USED
FPM NM
MIN GAL
S.L. 90 665 0 0.0 0
2000 90 625 3 0.8 5
4000 90 580 6 1.6 10
6000 90 540 10 2.5 16
8000 90 455 14 3.5 23
10,000 90 370 19 4.6 31
NOTES:
1. Add 1.7 e start, taxi and takeoff allowance.

S 2. smooth
Mixture Power Fuel Flow placard value for
creased power.
3. lncrease time. fuel and distance bv 10% for each 10"C above
standard temperature.
4. Distances shown are based on zero wind.
Figure 5-8. Time, Fuel and Distance to Climb (Sheet 2 o 2)
5-20 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 5
CRUISE PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE ALTITUDE SEA LEVEL
CONDITIONS:
3100 Pounds
Recommended Lean Mixture
Cowl Flaps Closed
NOTE: Maximum cruise power is 80% MCP. Those powers above that
value in the table are for interpolation purposes only-
2O'C BELOW STANDARD 20"C ABOVE

STANDARD TEMF TEMPERATURE STANDABD TEMF
RPM MP -5"c 1s"c 35'C
o/
/o %
BHP KTAS GPH KTAS GPH KTAS GPH
BHP BHP
2400 27 83 137 14.0
26 82 134 13.7 79 135 13.3
25 80 130 13.4 77 131 13.0 75 131 12.6
24 to 127 12.7 73 127 I Z-J 71 128 11.9
23 71 123 12.O a 124 11.6 66 125 11.3
22 ot 120 11.3 64 121 't0.9 62 121 10.6
t 62 117 10.6 60 117 10.3 58 117 10.0
20 JI 112 10.0 CJ 1t3 9.7
113 9.4
2300 27 83 134 13.9 80 135 13.4

26 82 't31 13.7 t9 132 13.2 76 132 12.8
25 T7 128 12.9 75 129 I .J 72 129 12.1
24 73 125 12.3 70 126 11.9 68 127 11.5
23 69 122 11.6 66 123 'l't.2 64 123 10.9
22 64 119 10.9 62 119 10.6 60 't 19 10.3
21 60 115 10.3 58 115 10.0 co 115 9.8
qA
20 '1
11 9.7 54 111 9.4 52 111 9.2
2200 27 83 131 13.8 80 132 13.3 77 133 12.9

26 78 129 13.1 76 129 12.7 73 130 '12.3
25 74 126 12.5 72 126 't2.1 69 128 11.7
24 70 123 11.8 o 124 11.5 66 124 11.1
23 66 120 11.2 64 121 10.9 62 121 10.6
zz 62 117 10.6 60 1't7 10.3 58 117 10.0
21 58 113 10.0 30 113 9.7 54 113 9.5
20 54 109 9.4 5Z 109 J. 't 09 .v
Figure 5-9. Cruise Performance (Sheet 1 of 10)
Nov 15/00 5-21

5
SECTION CESSNA
PERFORMANCE MODEL 1825
CRUISE PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE ALTITUDE SEA LEVEL
CONDITIONS:
3100 Pounds
Cowl Flaps Closed
value in the table are for interpolation purposes only.
2O"C BELOW STANDARD 2O"C ABOVE

STANDARD TEMF TEMPERATUBE STANDARD TEMT
RPM MP -s'c 15"C 35'C
o/
KTAS GPH % KTAS GPH %
KTAS GPH
BHP BHP BHP
2 1 00 2t 79 129 3.2 76 130 2.t t JU lz.3
26 75 126 12.5 72 127 12.1 70 't28 11.8
25 71 123 11.9 68 124 1 1.5 66 125 '11.2
24 67 120 11.3 64 't21 1 1.0 62 't21 10.7
23 63 118 10.7 61 117 10.4 59 118 10.2
22 59 114 10.2 57 114 9.9 55 114 9.6
21 55 110 9.6 53 111 9.4 51 111 9.'l
2000 27 74 126 12.5 72 127 12.1 70 't28 11.7

26 71 123 11.9 68 124 11.5 66 125 112
25 67 121 11.4 65 122 11.0 63 121 107
24 63 118 10.8 61 118 10.5 59 118 102
23 60 114 10.3 58 115 10.0 56 115 9.7
22 co 111 9.8 54 111 9.5 52 1',t2 92
21 52 108 9.2 50 108 9.0 49 108 88
5-22 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 5
CRUISE PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE ALTITUDE 2OOO FEET
CONDITIONS:
3100 Pounds
Cowl Flaps Closed
NOTE: Maximum cruise power is 8O% MCP. Those powers above that
2O'C BELOW STANDARD 2O"C ABOVE

STANDARD TEMF TEMPERATURE STANDARD TEMF
RPM MP -9'C 11'C 31'c
%
KTAS GPH KTAS GPH KTAS GPH
BHP BHP BHP
Z+UU 6 39 1 3.7
25 83 't34 13.9 80 135 13.4 77 135 129

24 78 131 13.1 75 131 12.7 73 132 123
23 74 127 12.4 71 128 't2.0 69 129 11.6
22 69 124 11.6 67 125 11.3 64 125 109
2'l o+ 121 10.9 62 120 10.6 60 121 10.3
20 60 116 10.3 58 117 10.0 56 't17 9.7
2300 26 81 136 13.6 78 136 131

25 t" 132 13.3 77 '132 12.9 74 133 12.5
24 75 't29 12.6 73 129 12.2 70 131 11.8
23 71 '125 11.9 68 126 11.6 66 127 11.2
22 oo 122 11.3 64 123 't0.9 62 123 106
21 62 118 10.6 60 119 10.3 58 119 10.0
20 58 114 10.0 56 1't5 9.7 54 115 9.5
2200 26 81 132 13.5 78 133 13.1 75 134 126

25 77 130 12.8 74 130 12.4 71 131 12.O
24 72 126 12.2 70 127 11.8 68 128 114
23 68 124 11.5 bb 't24 11.2 b+ 124 10.9
22 o+ 120 10.9 62 120 10.6 60 't21 103
21 60 1't6 10.3 58 117 10.0 56 117 97
20 56 113 9.7 54 113 9.4 52 113 9.2
Nov 15/00 5-23

5
SECTION CESSNA
CRUISE PERFORMANCE
CONDITIONS:
3100 Pounds
Cowl Flaos Closed
NOTE: Maximum cruise power is 80% MGP. Those powers above that
2O"C BELOW STANDARD 2O'C ABOVE

RPM MP -9.C 11"C 31'C
%
BHP BHP BHP
21 00 26 77 1 30 .v 74 1 30 12.4 72 1 31 12.1
25 7S 127 122 70 128 11.8 68 128 1't.5
24 69 124 116 66 125 1't.3 64 125 10.9
23 65 121 110 63 121 10.7 61 122 10.4
22 61 117 10.5 59 118 10.2 57 118 9.9
21 57 114 9.9 55 114 9.6 53 114 9.4
20 53 110 9.3 51 t10 9.1 49 110 8.8
2000 73 127 128 't 't28 11.5

26 12.2 70 1.8 68
25 69 124 1't.7 67 125 11.3 64 't25 11.0
24 65 122 11.1 63 121 10.8 61 122 10.5
23 62 118 10.6 59 118 10.2 57 119 10.0
22 58 115 10.0 56 115 9.7 54 115 9.5
2'l 54 111 9.5 52 111 9.2 50 111 9.0
5-24 Nov 15/00

CESSNA sEcTloN 5
CRUISE PERFORMANCE
CONDITIONS:
.3100 Pounds .Recommended Lean Mixture .Cowl Flaos Closed
RPM -13'C 7"C 27"C
MP
o/
GPH KTAS GPH GPH
BHP KTAS BHP BHP
KTAS
Z UU 25 z 1 39 13. U 4U l3.u
24 81 135 13.5 78 135 13.0 TJ 137 12.6
23 76 131 't2.8 73 132 12.3 71 133 11.9
22 128 12.O a 129 11.6 67 129 I t.J
2'l 67 125 11.3 64 124 10.9 62 125 10.6
20 62 120 10.6 60 121 10.3 58 121 10.0
2300 25 82 't
36 13.8 79 136 13.3 77 '137 12.8
24 78 133 13.0 75 133 '12.6 72 135 12.2
23 73 129 12.3 71 130 11.9 o 130 11.5
22 69 126 11.6 oo 126 11.2 64 127 10.9
21 64 122 1t o 62 123 10.6 60 123 10.3
20 60 118 10.3 <A 119 10.0 30 119 oa
2200 25 79 13.2 1U 12.7 73 135 12.3

24 T3 130 12.5 72 131 12.1 70 t 11.7
23 70 127 11.9 68 128 11.5 66 't28 11.1
22 66 124 11.2 64 124 10.9 62 125 10.6
21 62 120 10.6 60 121 10.3 121 10.0
20 58 116 10.0 56 116 9.7 117 9.4
2100 25 75 130 12.6 72 132 12.2 70 132 11.8

24 128 129 'I 1.6 oo
71 11.9 68 128 11.2
OT 125 11.3 65 125 11.0 62 125 10.7
22 63 121 10.7 61 122 10.4 59 '122 10.1
21 't17 10.2 57 118 9.9 55 118 9.6
20 55 1't4 9.6 53 114 9.3 51 113 o1
2000 25 71 128 12.O 69 129 I t.o 66 129 11.2

24 67 125 11.4 65 125 11.0 OJ 126 10.7
23 63 121 10.8 61 122 10.5 59 122 10.2
22 60 118 10.3 58 118 10.0 co 119 o7
21 56 115 9.7 c+ 115 9.5 52 115 9.2
( Figure 5-9. Cruise Performance (Sheet 5 of 1O)
Nov 15/00 5-25

SECTION 5 CESSNA
CRUISE PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE ALTITUDE 6000 FEET
CONDITIONS:
3100 Pounds
Cowl Flaps Closed
zO"C BELOW STANDARD 2O'C ABOVE

-17"C 3"C 23"C
RPM MP
% GPH GPH
KTAS GPH KTAS KTAS
BHP BHP BHP
2400 23 7S 1 35 13.2 76 136 12.7 73 137 12.3
22 74 132 12.4 71 133 12.O 69 133 11.6
21 69 129 11.7 67 128 11.3 64 129 10.9
20 64 124 10.9 62 125 10.6 60 't25 10.3
19 60 120 10.3 57 120 10.0 55 120 9.7
2300 23 76 133 12.7 73 134 12.2 70 135 11.9

22 71 130 12.0 68 130 11.6 66 131 11.2
21 66 126 11.3 64 127 10.9 o 127 10.6
20 62 122 10.6 60 122 10.3 58 123 10.0
19 57 118 10.0 55 118 9.7 53 118 9.4
2200 23 7S 131 12.2 70 132 11.8 68 132 11.4

22 68 128 11.5 oo 't28 1't.2 64 129 10.8
21 64 124 10.9 62 124 10.6 60 't24 10.3
20 60 120 10.3 57 120 10.0 5b 120 9.7
19 55 116 9.7 53 116 9.4 52 115 9.1
2100 23 69 129 11.6 128 11.3 64 't29 10.9

22 65 125 11.0 63 125 10.7 60 125 10.4
21 61 121 10.4 59 12'l 10.1 57 121 9.9
20 57 117 9.9 bb 't17 9.6 53 117 9.3
19 53 113 9.3 51 113 9.0 49 112 8.8
2000 23 65 125 11.1 63 126 10.8 61 126 10.5

22 62 122 10.5 59 122 10.2 57 122 10.0
21. 58 118 10.0 56 118 9.7 54 118 9.4
20 54 114 9.5 52 114 9.2 50 lf3 8.9
19 50 110 8.9 48 109 8.7 47 108 8.4
5-26 Nov 15/00

CESSNA sEcTroN 5
CRUISE PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE ALTITUDE EOOO FEET
CONDITIONS:
3100 Pounds
Recommended Lean Mixtur.
Cowl Flaos Closed

RPM MP -2'l"c -1'C 19'C
o/
KTAS GPH KTAS GPH "/o KTAS GPH
BHP BHP BHP
2400 21 71 133 12.O 69 133 1 1.6 66 134 11.3
20 67 128 11.3 64 129 10.9 62 129 10.6
19 62 't24 10.6 59 't24 10.3 57 124 10.0
18 57 119 9.9 55 119 9.6 53 119 9.3
2300 21 69 130 11.6 66 131 11.2 64 131 10.9

20 64 126 10.9 62 126 10.6 60 127 10.3
19 59 122 10.3 57 122 9.9 55 122 9.7
18 55 117 9.6 53 1't7 9.3 51 116 9.1
2200 21 66 127 11.2 64 128 10.8 61 128 10.5

20 62 124 10.6 59 124 10.2 57 124 9.9
19 57 119 9.9 55 120 9.6 53 119 9.4
18 53 115 9.3 51 114 9.0 49 113 8.8
21 00 21 63 '125 10.7 60 125 10.4 58 't25 10.1

20 59 12'l 10.1 56 121 9.8 54 121 9.6
19 54 117 9.5 52 116 9.3 51 115 9.0
18 50 112 9.0 48 111 8.7 47 109 8.5
2000 21 59 122 10.3 57 122 9.9 55 122 9.7

20 56 118 9.7 54 118 9.4 52 117 9.2
19 52 114 9.1 50 113 8.9 48 111 8.6
Nov 15/00 5-27

SECTION 5 CESSNA
CRUISE PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE ALTITUDE 1O,OOO FEET
CONDITIONS:
3100 Pounds
Gowl Flaps Closed

STANDAHD TEMF TEMPERATURE STANDARD TEMF
-25"C -5"C 15'C
RPM MP
% /o
GPH KTAS GPH
KTAS GPH KTAS
BHP
BHP BHP
2400 20 69 132 11.6 66 133 't1.2 64 133 10.9
19 64 128 10.9 62 128 10. 59 128 10.3
18 59 123 10.2 57 123 9.9 55 123 9.6
2300 20 66 130 11.2 64 131 10.9 62 131 10.6

19 62 126 10.6 59 126 10.2 57 't26 9.9
18 57 121 9.9 55 121 9.6 53 120 9.3
2200 20 64 128 10.8 61 128 10.5 59 128 10.2

19 59 123 10.2 57 124 9.9 55 123 9.6
18 55 119 9.6 53 118 9.3 51 117 9.0
21 00 20 60 125 10.4 58 125 10.1 56 't25 9.8

19 56 120 9.8 54 120 9.5 52 119 9.2
18 52 115 9.2 50 114 8.9 48 113 8.7
2000 20 57 't21 9.9 55 122 9.6 53 121 9.4

19 53 117 9.4 51 116 9.1 50 115 8.9
18 49 112 8.8 48 110 8.6 46 108 8.3
Figure 5-9. Cruise Performance (Sheet I of 10)
5-28 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 5
CRUISE PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE ALTITUDE 12.OOO FEET
CONDITIONS:
3100 Pounds
Cowl Flaps Closed
\
RPM MP -29'C -9'C 11'C
%
BHP BHP BHP
2400 18 61 127 10.5 59 't28 10.2 57 127 9.9
17 56 122 9.8 54 121 9.5 52 120 9.2
16 51 116 9.1 49 114 8.8 48 112 8.6
2300 18 59 125 10.2 57 125 9.9 55 124 9.6

17 54 120 9.5 52 119 9.2 50 117 9.0
16 49 113 8.8 48 111 8.6 46 107 8.3
2200 18 57 123 9.8 54 122 9.5 52 121 9.3

17 52 117 9.2 50 115 8.9 48 114 8.7
2100 18 54 119 9.4 52 118 9.2 50 116 8.9

17 49 113 8.9 48 112 8.6 46 108 8.3
2000 18 51 115 9.1 49 114 8.8 47 111 8.5
Nov 15/00 s-29

. SECTION 5 CESSNA
CRUISE PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE ALTITUDE 14.OOO FEET
CONDITIONS:
3100 Pounds
Cowl Flaps Closed
2O'C BELOW STANDARD 2O'C ABOVE

-33"C -13"C 7"C
RPM MP
o/
%
BHP BHP BHP
2400 16 53 120 9.4 51 118 9.1 49 116 8.8
15 48 112 8.7 46 109 8.4 45 104 8.2
2300 16 51 117 9.1 49 115 8.8 48 111 8.6
2200 16 49 114 8.8 47 111 8.6 46 107 8.3
21 00 16 47 110 8.5 45 105 8.2 43 103 8.0
5-30 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 5
RANGE PROFILE
45 MINUTES RESERVE
65 GALLONS USABLE FUEL
CONDITIONS:
3100 Pounds
Maximum Performance Climb with Placard Mixture
Recommended Lean Mixture for Cruise
Standard TemDerature
Zero Wind
NOTE:
This chart allows for the fuel used for engine start, taxi, takeoff and climb,
cruise al the designated power, and the time during a normal climb up to
10,000 feet and maximum climb above 10.000 feet.
14,000
12,000
10,000
t-
uJ
Lll
LL
I
8000
t!
o
f
l- 6000
F
J
4000
2000
550 600650 700

RANGE - NAUTICAL MILES
Figure 5-10. Range Profile (Sheet 1 o 2)
Feb 3/97 5-31

SECTION 5 CESSNA
RANGE PROFILE
45 MINUTES RESERVE
CONDITIONS:
3100 Pounds
Standard Temperature
Zero Wind
NOTE:
cruise at the designated power, and the time during a normal climb up to
10.000 feet and maximum climb above 10,000 feet.
14,000
124-
fiAS
12,000
10,000 fi
t-
uJ
l
fl aooo l' 20
fiAS
6-
t KTA
3 oooo
\ 37
t- fAs
--f'- ...i.....i
t
s
ffi
!
.--+-. .._.i...._l
5 E I
< *ia
!C ),
-__-L--_
4ooo
-'
irl lx s
-lPl
8/ -'81
2000
129 122 1121
KTAS, , ,KTAS ll.fA KT
.i u
700 750 800 850 900 950 1000
RANGE - NAUTICAL MILES
Figure 5-10. Range Profile (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-32 Feb 3197

CESSNA SECTION 5
ENDURANCE PROFILE
45 MINUTES RESERVE
CONDITIONS:
3100 Pounds
Zero Wind
NOTE:
cruise at the designated power, and the time during a normal climb up to
10,000 feet and maximum climb above 10,000 feet.
14,000 if l
il
12,000
10,000
8000
l-
Lrl
LrJ
I
uJ
eooo
o
l
F
F- 4000
fr ttrt fI
J -3
o -*-3 _c
2000
slc -8
-s
fI
-s
l'- i
S.L.
34567
ENDURANCE - HOURS o785c1oos
Figure 5-11. Endurance Profle (Sheet 1 ol 2)
Feb 3197 5-33

SECTION 5 CESSNA
ENDURANCE PROFILE
45 MINUTES RESERVE
CONDITIONS:
3100 Pounds
Zero Wind
the fuel used for enqine start, taxi, takeoff and climb'
ted power, and the [ime during a normal climb up to
mum climb above 10,000 feet.
14,000
f
12,000 9
..i.....i4
-i-*f
10,000
-i#

tu
eooo
LL
I
S oooo
l '/,-
F
tr
t +ooo eCE
-=TJJ
"ct
Lr
-3
?
II
I
o
2000 < ' !,o:
-lft
!F o
il-
S.L.
56789
ENDURANCE - HOURS
0785C1 006
Figure 5-11. Endurance Profile (Sheet 2 ol 2)
5-34 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 5
SHORT FIELD LANDING DISTANCE

AT 2950 POUNDS
CONDITIONS:
Flaos FULL
Power Off
Maximum Brakino
Paved, level, dry-runwav
Zero Wind
0"c 10'c 20"c 30'c 40'c

Grnd Total Grnd l'otal Grnd l-otal Grnd fotal Grnd Total
Roll Ft To Roll :t To Roll :t To Roll Ft To Roll Ft To
Press
Att Ft Clear Ft llear Ft llear Ft Slear Ft Clear
50 Ft i0 Ft t0 Fr r0 Ft 50 Fr
ln Obst fbst )bst Cbst Obst
Feet
S. L. 560 300
1 580 1 335 600 1 365 620 1400 640 1 435
1000 580 1 265 600 1 365 620 1400 645 1440 665 1478
2000 600 1370 625 1405 645 1440 670 1 480 690 1515
3000 625 1410 645 '1445 o/u 1 485 695 1 525 715 1 56C
4000 650 1450 670 1485 695 1525 720 1 565 740 1 60C
5000 670 695 1525 720 1 565 745 1610
1485 770 1 65C
6000 700 530 725 1575 750 1615 775 1 660
1 800 170C
7000 725 1575 750 1615 780 1 665 80s 1710 830 175C
8000 755 1625 780 1655 810 1715 835 1 760 865 1 805
NOTES:
'l . Short field technique as specified in Section 4.

2. Decrease distances 10o/" fo each 9 knots headwind. For operation
with tail winds up to 10 knots, increase distances by 10% for each 2
knots.
4. lf a landing with flaps up is necessary, increase the approach speed
by 10 KIAS and allow for 4OL longer distances.
Figure 5-12. Short Field Landing Distance
Feb 3/97 5-3s/(5-36 blank)

CESSNA SECTION 6
MODEL 182S WEIGHT & BALANCE/EQUIPMENT LIST
SECTION 6
WEIGHT & BALANCEI
EQUIPMENT LIST
lntroduction 6-3
Airplane Weighing Procedures 6-3
Weight And Balance 6-5
Baggage Tie-Down 6-7
Comprehensive Equipment List 6-17
Dec 1197 6-1/(6-2 blank)

CESSNA SECTION 6
INTRODUCTION
It t specific information regarding the weight,

arm, d equipment for this airplane as delivered
from be found in the plastic envelope carried in
the b
[, wnnulc
IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE PILOT TO
ENSURE THE AIRPLANE IS LOADED
PROPERLY. OPERATION OUTSIDE OF
PRESCRIBED WEIGHT AND BALANCE
LIMITATIONS COULD RESULT IN AN ACCIDENT
AND SERIOUS OR FATAL NJURY.
AIRPLANE WEIGHING PROCEDURES

1. Preparation:
a. lnflate tires to recommended operating pressures.
b. Defuel airplane. Refer to Modl 182S-,'Series 1996 and On,l
Maintenance Manual.
c. Service engine oil as requred to obtain a normal full_
, indication. (8 quarts on dipstick.)
d. Move sliding seats to the most forward position.
I
e.
Raise flaps to the fully retracted position.
f.
Place allcontrolsurfaces in neutral position.
g. Remove all non-required items from airplane.
2. Leveling:
a. Place scales under each wheel (minimum scale capacity,
1000 pounds).
b. Deflate the nose tire ancl/or lower or raise the nose strut to
properly center the bubble in the level (Refer to Figure 6-1).
Nov 15/00 6-3

SECTION 6 CESSNA
WEIGHT & BALANCE / EQUIPMENT LIST MODEL 182S
AIRPLANE WEIGHING FORM
REFERENCE
g) 150 DATUM
LJ
I
proo
uo
z_0
t,rJ
J
t
tJJ
ln rs rHE REsPoNStBtLtrY
\,,r\
-50'
-so loF THE PTLOT TO ENSURE
LEVELING linr re ernpLANE tS
= SCREWS IIonoeoPROPERLY.
't00
-'t00
-1 oo -50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
FUSELAGE STATION (FS) - INCHES
MEASURING A AND B
tNG HAilDAOOK IISIRUCnOXS fO A9
stsf n LocAilo oo vYITH NhPLNE
WEIGIG' ON Ifl'IIO GEAF
LOCATNG CG WI}I AIRPLANE ON LANDING GEAR

for Longlhdhsl CG
FORMULA
lnch4
m _ rar'' . (No @r Nel Welghl)( ) x (B) ( = f' )Aftol
'- Noseandhh lndhC Oarwelghl Totaled ) Datum
LOCATING PERCENT MAC

FORMUI-A lor Peent lrAC
ami!.llllPlane) ' 25 98
cc percenr MAc -(cG
DFAINEI.-E UNUSABLE FUEL

AT 6 O POUNDS PEN GLLON
07851022
Flgure 6-1. Airplane Weighing Form
6-4 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 6
3. Weighing:
4. Measuring:
a. Obtain measurement A by measuring horizontally (along -
the airplane centerline) from a line stretched between the I
main wheel centers to a plumb bob dropped from the
firewall.
b. Obtain measurement B by measuring horizontally and.
parallel to the airplane centerline, from center of nose I
wheel axle, left side, to a plumb bob dropped from the line
between the main wheel centers. Repeat on right side and
average the measurements.
5. Using weights from item 3 and measurements from item 4, the
airplane weight and C.G. can be determined.
6. Basic Empty Weight may be determined by completing Figure
6-1.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

The following information will enable you to operate your Cessna
within the prescribed weight and center of gravity limitations. To -
determine weight and bdnce, use the Samte Lading Problem, I
Loading Graph, and Center of Gravity Moment Envelope as follows:
Take the basic empty weight and moment from appropriate

weight and balance records carried in your airplane, and enter them
in the column titled YOUR AIRPLANE on the Sample Loading
Problem.
NOTE
ln addition to the basic empty weight and moment noted on

these records, the C.G. arm (fuselage station) is also shown,
but need not be used on the Sample Loading Problem. The
moment which is shown must be divided by 1000 and this
value used as the momenV1000 on the loading problem.
Use the Loading Graph to determine the momenU1000 for each

additional item to be carried; then list these on the loading problem.
Nov 15/00 -5
+l
5v)
m
+o
c)+
SAMPLE WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD
. (coNTtNuous HtsToRy oF cHANcEs tN STRUcTURE oR EQUTPMENT AFFECTING WEIGHT AND BAI-ANCE) ;z
f!
(o @
E AIRPI.ANE MODEL SERIAL NO. IPAGE NUMBER
WEIGHT CHANGE RUNNING z
o)
I
le
ITEM NO.
DESCRIPTION
ADDED ( +) REMOVED G)
]ASIC EMPTY
WEIGHT om
OF ARTICLE OR
a
qt
DATE
MODIFICATION wT. ARM
(tN.)
ilOEM
/1000.
ARM
(tN.)
MOMEM
/1 000
WT.
(LB.)
MOMEI{
n000 m
N OUT (LB.)
3
E \S
g
o DELIVERED -Tl
m
fP.
(o
J
z-{
It t-
5 (n
o- -{
(D
9)
qt
f
o
o

o
C)
o
a o o
f'$
oo H.,
I-m
cr* (l)
EE
(o
- (t,
@
luz
{ cD>
CESSNA SECTION 6
MODEL 182S WEIGHT & BALANCE/EOUIPMENT LIST
NOTE
Loading Graph information for the pilot, passengers and

baggage is based on seats positioned for average
occupants and baggage loaded in the center of the baggage
areas as shown on the Loading Arrangements diagram. For
loadings which may differ from these, the Sample Loading
Problem lists fuselage stations for these items to indicate
their fonruard and aft C.G. range limitations (seat travel and
baggage area limitation). Additional moment calculations,
based on the actual weight and C.G. arm (fuselage station)
of the item being loaded, must be made if the position of the
load is different from that shown on the Loading Graph.
Total the weights and moments/1000 and plot these values on

the Center of Giavity Moment Envelope to dtermine whether thel
point falls within the envelope, and if the loading is acceptable.
BAGGAGE TIE.DOWN
A nylon baggage net having tie-down straps is provided as

standard equipment to secure baggage in the area aft of the rear
seat (baggage areas A, B and C). Eight eyebolts serve as attaching
points for the net. A placard on the baggage door defines the weight
limitations in the baggage areas.
When baggage area A is utilized for baggage only, the four

forward eyebolts should be used. When only baggage area B is
used, the eyebolts just aft of the baggage door and the eyebolts
above or below the shelf area may be used. When only baggage
area C is utilized, the eyebolts above and below the shelf area
should be used. When the cabin floor (baggage areas A and B) is
utilized for baggage, the four forward eyebolts and the eyebolts
mounted above or below the shelf area should be used. When there
is baggage in areas B and C, the eyebolts just aft of the baggage
door and the eyebolts above and below the shelf area should be
used. When baggage is contained in all three areas, the two forward
eyebolts on the cabin floor, the eyebolts just aft of the baggage door
or the eyebolts at the bottom of the forward portion of the shelf area
and the eyebolts near the upper forward surface of the shelf area
should be used.
Nov 15/00 6-7

SECTION 6 CESSNA
The rear bench seat can be removed to access the floorboard

area of the rear cabin own using ten
tiedown eyebolts to s in the interior
area of the airplane (s The maximum
allowable floor loading pounds/square
foot; however, when items with small or sharp support areas are
carried, the installation of a 1/4" plywood floor is recommended to
protect the airplane structure.
The maximum rated load weight capacity for each of the ten tie-
downs is 140 pounds. Rope, strap or cable used for tie-down should
be rated at a minimum of ten times the load weight capacity of the
tie-down fittings used. Weight and balance calculations for items in
the area of tlte rear seat and baggage area can be figured on the
Loading Graph using the lines labeled 2nd Row Passengers or
cargo.
6-8 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 6
LOADING ARRANGEMENTS
c.G. c.G.
ARM ANM
"37 *37
(32 - 50) (32 - 50)
**74
**97 ** 97
**116 **11
129
STANDARD 2ND ROW

SEATING SEAT REMOVED
* Pilot or passenger center of gravty on adjustable seats postionedfor average

occupant. Numbrs in parentheses indicate torward and aft limits of occupant
center of gravity range.
" Arms measured to the center of the areas shown.

NOTES: 1. The usable fuel C.G. arm is located at station 46.5
2. The aft baggage wall (approximate staton 1 34) can be used as
a conveneen-t interio idference point for determnng the
location of baggage area fuselage statons.
07851 021
Figure 6-3. Loading Arrangements
Feb 3/97 6-9

SECTION 6 CESSNA
WEIGHT & BALANCE / EOUIPMENT LIST MODEL 182S
CABIN HEIGHT MEASUREMENTS
AFT BAGGAGE AREA
t3
_L
I
I
FIREWALL
DOOR OPENING DIMENSIONS
WIDTH WIDTH HEIGHT HEIGHT

) (roP) (BorroM) (FRON (REAR)
CABIN DOORS 32" 36" 41" 38+"
BAGGAGE DOOR 15+" 1 5*" 22" 20+"
07851 01 I
Figure 6-4. lnternal Cabin Dimensions (Sheet 'l ot 2)
6-10 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 6
CABIN WIDTH MEASUREMENTS
EAR DOORPOST BULKHEAD
R|NGS (10)
/!'t
t%l
c41t" o42" /;,t.i4L"
I
*?4" x36" ,/t';*91" I

I
I
I
/-*"i-=
I
0 10 20 .|o olo u|o u[l

CABIN 'f 't
65.3
'b
STATIONS
(c.G.ARMS)
WIDTH CODE LEGEND
o LOWER WINDOW LINE
x CABIN FLOOR
07851 020
Figure 6-4. lnternal Cabin Dimensions (Sheet 2 ol2)
Feb 3/97 6-11

SECTION 6 CESSNA
WEIGHT AND MOMENT

TABULATION
SAMPLE YOUR
ITEM DESCRIPTION AIRPLANE AIRPLANE
Moment Moment
Weight Weight (Lb-ins.
(Lb-ins, (lbs.)
(lbs.)
/1 oo0) /1000)
1. Basic Empty Weight (Use the
data pertaining to your
airplane as it is presently
equipped. lncludes unusable
fuel and full oil) 1925 71.9
2. Usable Fuel (At 6 Lbs./Gal.)
88 Gallons Maximum 528 24.6
Beduced Fuel
(65 Gallons)
3. HilOl ano Fronl Fassenger
(Station 32 to 50) 340 12.6
4. SecondRowPassengers 200 148
Cargo Replacing Second
Row Seats (Sta. 651o 82)
5. -Baggage Area A (Station 82
to 109; 120 Lbs. Max.) 100 97
6. *Baggage Area B (Station 109
To124;80 Lbs. Max.) 17 17
7. *Baooaqe Area C (Station 124
ro 154;o los. vai.)
8. RAMPWEIGHTANDMOMENT 3110 135.3
L Fuel allowance tor enoine
start, taxi and runup -10 -05
lO.TAKEOFF WEIGHT AND
MOMENT (Subtract Step 9
from Step 8) 3100 134.8
Figure 6-5. Sample Loading Problem (Sheet 1 of 2)
6-12 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 6
YOUR YOUR YOUR

AIRPLANE AIRPLANE AIRPLANE
configurations are representative of your

useful to fill out one or more of the above columns so
are available at a qlance.
Figure 6-5. Sample Loading Problem (Sheet 2 o 2)
Feb 3197 6-13

SECTION 6 CESSNA
LOAD MOMENT/1 000 (KILOGRAM-MILLIMETERS)

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
550
6'500
o
6
2450 200 fE
f,
CI
8+oo 175 o
J
350 150 Y
-g 300 ;
uJ 125 :E
250 o
= 100 uJ
Q zoo
o 75 o
=
-r 150
50 -J
o
100
50 25
oo"
51015202530
LOAD MOMENT/1000 (POUND{NCHES)
NOTE: Pilot and front

able seats
r to the Loading
limits of
occupant c.G. range.
0785C1008
Figure 6-6. Loading Graph
6-14 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 6
LOADED AIRPLANE MOMENT/1 OOO

(KTLOGRAM-MrLLr METERS)
1350 1
I 1450 1 650
I 450
31 00 1400
3000 1 350
2950
2900
300
8'ttoo fr
zf 250 o
o
J
327o0 g
200
I
g
2600
t-
150 I
2500 g
[rJ
100
2z+oo =
f zsoo 050 J
IIJ
z
ft
fr
000
fi 2200 o
o UJ
$ zroo o
J o
J
2000
1 900
1 800
55 65 75 85 95 105 115 125 135 145
LOADED AIRPLANE MOMENT/1 OOO
(POUND-TNCHES)
0785c1 009
Figure 6-7. Center of Gravity Moment Envelope
Feb 3197 6-15

SECTION 6 CESSNA
AIRPLANE C.G. LOCATION -

MTLLIMETERS AFT OF DATUM (STA. 0.0)
10.00 1050 11p0 110 12po 1
31 00
3000 350
2950-
2900
300
6
2800 E,
z
f
250 CI
o
J
2700
R 200 3
, 2600 t-
T
T 150 g
fr zsoo Lll
100
u 2400
= =
trJ
z z
050 J
t'c. zsoo fL
.
000
2200 o
lrJ trJ
o
? zroo
o
9 J
2000
1 900
1 900 Ht
32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
AIRPLANE C.G. LOCATION -
TNoHES AFT OF DATUM (STA. o.o)
0785C1010
Figure 6-8. Center of Gravity Limits
6-16 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 6
MODEL 182S WEIGHT & BALANCE/EOUIPMENT LIST
COMPREHENSIVE EQUIPMENT LIST

The following figure (Figure 6-9) is a comprehensive list of all Cessna equipment
which is available for the Model 1825 airplane. Ths comprehensve equipment
list provides the following information in column form:
ln the ITEM NO column, each item is assigned a coded number. The first
two digits of the code represent the assignment of the item within the Air
Transport Association Specifcation 100 breakdown (1 1 for Paint and
Placards; 24 lot Elecrical Power; 77 for Engne lndcating, etc...). These
assignments also correspond to the Maintenance Manual chapter
breakdown for the airplane. After the first two digts (and hyphen), items
receive a unique sequence number (01, 02, 03, etc...). After the sequence
number (and hyphen), a suffix letter is assigned to identify equipment as a
required item, a standard item or an optonal item. Suffix letters are as
follows:
R = required items or equipment for FAA certification

S = standard equipment tems
O = optional equipment tems replacing required or standard items
A = optional equipment items which are in addition to required or
standard tems
ln the EQUIPMENT LIST DESCRIPTION column, each item is assigned a

descriptive name to help identify its function.
ln the REF DRAWING column, a Cessna drawing number is provided which

corresponds to the item.
NOTE
lf additionl equipment is to be instlled, it must be done in accordance

with the reference drawing, service bulletn or a separate FAA approval.
ln the WT LBS and ABM INS columns, information is provided on the weight
(in pounds) and arm (in inches) of the equipment tem.
NOTES
Unless otherwse indicated, true values (not net change values) for the
weght and arm are shown. Postive arms are distances att of the airplane
datum; negative arms are distances forward of the datum.
Asterisks (') in the weight and arm column ndcale complete assembly
inslallatons. Some major components oi the ssembly are listed on the
lines immediately following. The sum of these maior components does not
necessarly equal the complete assembly installation.
Dec 1197 6-17

SECTION 6 CESSNA
TEM WT ARM
EQUIPMENT LIST DESCRIPTION REF DRAWING
NO LBS INS.
11 . PAINT AND PI.ACARDS

1 1-01-S CORROSION PROOFING, INTERNAL 20.1 70.0
1 1-02-S PAINT, OVERALL EXTERIOR )704056 19.6' 92.9-
.OVERALL WHITE 18.8 91.5
-COLORED STRIPE DECALS 0.8 135.9
1 1 -03-S IFR DAY & NIGHT LIMITATIONS PLACARD )505087-9 0.0 17.3
1'l-04-o IFR DAY & NIGHT LIMITATIONS PLACARD. I 205085 0.0 17.3
BRAZILIAN
1 1-05-O IFR DAY & NIGHT LIMITATIONS PLACARD, 0.0 I l.J
GERMAN
22. AUO FLIGHT
22-01 -S SINGLE AXIS AUTOPILOT. KAP 140 1900007-1 8.4- 50 3'
- KC 140 SINGLE AXIS COMPUTER )65-001 76-2501 2.O 12.4
- KS 27.IC ROLL SERVO )65{0179-0100 2.4 52.O
. CABLE ASSY, ROLL ACTUATOR 39241 1 0-1 o.4 66.0
. CABLE ASSY, KC
.I4O
AUTOPILOT 3924104-1 0.9 2.O
- KMC 1OO CONFIGURATION MODULE 171 -00073-5000 0.1 '12.o
- ANNUNCIATOR OSEWCA.OI o.4 16.0
22-02-0 DUAL AXIS AUTOPILOT, KAP 140 3900008-1 13.1' 1 37.1',
- KC 140 DUAL AXIS COMPUTER WITH t65-001 76-5001 2.0 12.O
ELECTRIC ELEVATOR TRIM
- KS-270C PITCH SERVO c701 1 45-1 4.2 171.3
- KS-270C PITCH TRIM SERVO 0701 1 46-1 4.1 180.8
- KS-2TICROLLSERVO 065-001 79-01 00 2.4 s2.0
- CABLE ASSY, ROLLACTUATOR 39241 1 0-1 0.4 66.0
- CABLE ASSY, KC 140 AUTOPILOT 3924104-1 1.8 87.3
- KMC 1OO CONFIGURATION MODULE 071 -00073-5000 0.1 12.O
. ANNUNCIATOR CSEWCA.O3 0.4 16.0
23. COMMUNICATIONS
23-01 -S STATIC DISCHARGE WICKS. SET OF 1O 1201131-2 0.3 152.9
23-02-S NAV/COM #1 INSTALLATION 3900006-1 I t.4
- KX 15sA NAV/COM with GS 066-01 032-01 01 c.t 12.4
. KI 2O9A CDI INDICATOR 066-03056-001 1 1.2 13.9
- CI128A VHF COMM ANTENNA #1 39601 1 3-8 0.5 63.3
. HARDWARE AND CABLE ASSEMBLY 3921 1 00-1 4.O 76.5
23-03-S NAV/COM #2 INSTALLATION 3900006-1 8.9- 19.0t
- KX'1554 NAV/COM no GS 066-01 032-0201 c. I 12.4
- Kt 208 CDt |ND|CATOR 066-03056-0002 1.0 13.9
. CI128A VHF COMM ANTENNA #2 39601 t3-9 0.5 o.
. ANTENNA COUPLEB 3940405-1 o2 12.O
. HARDWARE AND CABLE ASSEMBLY 3921 101-1 2.0 29.0
23-04-S AUDIO/INTERCOM/MARKER BEACON INSTL 3900006-1 6.5' 50.2'
- KMA 26 AUDIO PANEL 066-01 1 55-01 01 lc 14.4
Figure 6-9. Equipment List Description (Sheet 1 of 6)
6-1 I Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 6
ITEM ARM
NO LBS INS.
. MARKER BEACON ANTENNA 9601 93-1 0.8 'I 31 5

- HARDWARE AND CABLE ASSEMBLY ]921 1 08-1 3.9 52.8
24 - ELECTFICAL POWER
1'V l'tALTERNATOR,28 VOLT, 60 AMP )91 0591 -5 10.0 -33.4
24-02-R BATTERY, 24 VOLT, 12.75 A.H. MANIFOLD 161 4002-01 01 23.2 132.1
TYPE
24-O3-O BATTERY, 24VOLT, HEAVY DUTY a+ 27.2 132.1
24-04-R POWER JUNCTTON BOX (PRECTStON 6.4* -2.s',
AIRMOTTVE CORP. MC01-2A) TNCLUDES:
- ALTERNATOR CONTROL UNIT \cc2101 0.2 -2.5
. MASTER CONTACTOR X61-OOO7 270101 o.7 -.c
. STARTER CONTACTOR X61-0012 930400-1 0.7 -25
. AMMETERTRANSDUCER t930417.2 01 -2.O
24-05-S BASIC AVIONICS KIT INSTALLATION 1900006-1 4.3'
- SUPPORT STRAPS INSTALLATION 270101-1,-3 0.1 10.0
. AVIONICS COOLING FAN INSTL 940406-1 t.o 3.0
- AVIONICS GROUND INSTALLATIONS r940358-1 0.1 41.O
. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL INSTL r930299-1 16,5
- MICROPHONE INSTL 19701 39-2 0.2 18.5
- OMNI ANTENNA INSTL 1960142-8 0.5 252.1
. OMNI ANTENNA CABLE ASSY INSTL r9501 62-1 0.3 248.0
25 - EOUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS
25-01 -R SEAT, PILOT, ADJUSTABLE, CLOTH COVER l5'14212-3 33.8 41.5
25-02-A SEAT, PILOT, ADJUSTABLE, LEATHR COVER ts't4212-25 34.5 41.5
25-03-S SEAT, COPILOT, ADJ., CLOTH COVER t514212-4 33.8 41.5
25-04-A SEAT, COPILOT, ADJ., LEATHER COVER t514212-25 34.5 41.5
25-05-S SEAT, REAR, TWO PIECE BACK, CLOTH )71 4065-1 50.0 82.0
COVER
25-06-A SEAT, REAR, TWO PIECE BACK, LEATHER t714065-2 51.4 82.O
COVER
25-07-R SEAT BELT AND SHOULDER HARNESS, t714070-1 5.2 2
INERTIA REEL, PILOT AND COPILOT
25-08-A SEAT BELT AND SHOULDER HARNESS, ,714070-2 4.O
MANUAL ADJUST., PILOT AND COPILOT
25-09-S SEAT BELT AND SHOULDEH HARNESS, t714070-1 ca 87.8
INERTIA REEL, REAH SEAT
c- I u-A SEAT BELT AND SHOULDER HARNESS, t714070-2 4.O 87.8
MANUAL ADJUST., REAR SEAT
25-1 1-S SUN VISORS, SET OF 2 )514166-3 1.2 33.0
c- I - BAGGAGE RETAINING NET 215171-1 0.5 108.0
25-1 3-S CARGO TIE DOWN RINGS, SET OF 1O 211203-1 0.4 108.0
25-14-S PILOT'S OPERATING CHECKLIST ISTOWED )700765-1 0.3 15.0
IN INSTRUMENT PANEL MAP CASE)
25-1 5-R PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK AND FAA t700765-1 61.5
(STOWED IN PILOT'S SEAT BACK)
Nov 15/00 6-19

SECTION 6 CESSNA
]TEM WT ARM
NO LBS rNs.
25-16-S FUEL SAMPLING CUP )2107-1 0.1 143

25-17-S TOW BAR, NOSE GEAR (STOWED) )50101 9-1 1.7 108.0
25-18-R EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER 940409-1 2.2- 134.8-
INSTL
- ELTTRANSMITTER 000-1 1 1.7 135.0
- ANTENNA AND CABLE ASSY 003-45 0.4 133.0
- HARDWAHE 1940409-1 0-1 138.0
26 - FIRE PROTECTION
26-01 -S FIRE EXTINGUISHER INSTALLATION )501 01 1 -2 5.3- 29.o',
- FIRE EXTINGUISHER 1421 001 -0201 4.8 29.0
. MOUNTING CLAMP & HARDWARE )421001-0202 29.O
27. FLIGHT CONTROLS

27-01-S DUAL CONTROLS INSTL. RIGHT SEAT )706010- 1 A+ 12.9'
.CONTROL WHEEL. COPILOT )713377-2 2.O 26.0
- RUDDER &BRAKE PEDAL INSTL, )760650-3 4.3 6.8
COPILOT
28. FUEL
28-01-R FUEL QUANTITY INDICATORS. LEFT & RIGHT i331 7-3 o.7 16.0
28-O2-R AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP ;1 00-00-3 1.9
31 - INDICATING/RECORDING SYSTEM
31-01-S CLOCK and OAT INDICATOR INSTALLATION v8038-2 0.3t 16.7'
.TEMPERATURE PROBE .0/28UrB 0.1 49.0
31 -02-S FLIGHT HOUR RECORDER 3664503-01 03 r 17.O
31-03-R ANNUNCIATOR PANEL AND LIGHTS 30-44001 - t u-5 15.9
31-04-R STALL WARNING INDICATOR 171 8007-1 1.0 17.5
32. LANDING GEAR
32-0 t -R WHEEL BRAKE AND TIRE, 6.00 X 6 MAIN J741625-12 37.8', 58.6-
. WHEEL ASSY (EACH) c1 63001 -030 1 I- 58.9
. BRAKE ASSY (EACH) c1 63030-0303 1.8 ccc
- TrRE (EACH) c262003-O204 8.0 58.9
. TUBE (EACH) c2620234102 1a 58.9
32-02-R WHEEL AND TIRE ASSY. 5.OO X 5 NOSE 0540000-2 8.8'
- WHEELASSY 1241156-12 2.8
. TIRE c262003-0202 4.6
.TUBE c262023-01 01 1.1
32-03-A WHEEL FAIRING AND INSTALLATION 0741 638-1 18.3' 44.1',
- NOSE WHEEL FAIRING 0543079-7 3.9 -6.0
. MAIN WHEEL FAIRINGS. SET OF 2 0541223-22, -23 10.3 ou.
- BRAKE FAIRINGS, SET OF 2 0741641-14,-15 1E 58.0
- MOUNTING PLATE, SETOF2 1241141-1.-2 0.9 60.0
6-20 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 6
fTEM WT ARM
EQUIPMENT LST DESCRIPTION REF DRAWING
NO LBS tNs,
33. LIGHTS
33-01 -S MAP LIGHT IN CONTROL WHEEL 170601 0-1 o.2 t.c
33-02-S COURTESY LIGHTS UNDER WING 170061 s-1 I o.7 61.7
33-03-S NAVIGATION LIGHT DETECTORS 1221201-3,-4 0.0 497
33-04-S FLASHING BEACON ON VERTICAL FIN TIP )701042-5 0.8 253.1
s3-05-s WING TIP STROBE LIGHT INSTALLATION 1501027-6 3.4 38.7
33-06-S LANDING AND TAXI LIGHT INSTALLATION 1221059-7,-8 26.8
34 - NAVIGATION
34-01-R INDICATOB, AIRSPEED s3325-5 0.7 16.2
34-02-S ALTERNATE STATIC AIR SOURCE )70'1028-4 o.2 15.5
34-03-R ALTIMETER. SENSITIVE WITH 20 FT. )- | 0.9
MARKINGS, INCHES OF MERCURY
34-04-O ALTIMETER. SENSITIVE WITH 20 FT. 33371 0.9 I C.J
MARKINGS. MILLIBARS
34-05-S BLIND ALTITUDE ENCODER INSTALLATION 1940408-1 0.8 15.0
34-06-R COMPASS INSTL, MAGNETIC I 3679-3
21 0.5 18.0
34-07-S GYRO, TNSTALLATTON (ROS, 37-01 -s) )706009-1 7.6- 11 0-
. DIRECTIONAL GYRO INDICATOR i3330-1 2.8 15.2
. ATTITUDE GYRO INDICATOR s3326-1 2.1 14.O
- HOSE AND MISC HARDWARE )706009-1 2.7 4.5
34-08-S TURN COORDINATOR INDICATOR i3291 -1 1.2
34-09-S VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR >t - | 15.3
34-10-A ADF INSTALLATION 1900006-1 6,4' 20.4',
- KR-87 ADF RECEIVER )66-01 072-001 4 3.2 12.4
. Kl227 ADF INDICATOR )66{3063-0000 o.7 13.9
- ADF ANTENNA t9601 92-1 39.6
. ADF CABLE ASSEMBLY )922101-1 1.0 22.O
34-1 1-S GPS INSTALLATION 1900006-1 5.5' 18.8-
- KLN 898 GPS RECEIVER )66-01148-1111 3.3 12.7
- GPS ANTENNA 19601 94-1 0.6 43.4
- GPS CABLE ASSEMBLY t9281 01 -1 t.o 22.0
34-1 2-S MODE C TRANSPONDEF INSTL 900006-1 5.3' 18.8'
. KT76C TRANSPONDER )66-01 1 s6-01 01 3.1 12.7
- TRANSPONDER ANTENNA ]9601 95-1 0.2 .c
. HARDWARE AND CABLE ASSEMBLY t923102-1 2.O 21.4
34-13-A HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (NET t90001 5 14.O', 95.6'
TNcREASE) (RQS 22-02-O AUTOPTLOT
. GYRO SLAVING METER )71-012424006 0.3 16.0
- FLUX DETECTOR INSTL (IN LH WING) 1940362 0.6 52.6
- NAVCONVERTER INSTL t940361 131.0
. SLAVED GYRO FOR HSI (IN TAILCONE) t930363 5.1 136.8
- GYRO SYSTEM FOR HSI 10.6 1.9
Nov 15/00 6-21

SECTION 6 CESSNA
ITEM ARM
EOUIPMENT LIST DESCRIPTION REF DRAWING
NO LBS INS.
- STD GYRO SYSTEM REMOVED -13.8 4.5

- KA 209 NAV INDICATOR REMOVED -t. 13.9
- WIRING FOH HSI /.o 58.1
. HSI INDICATOR )66-03046-0001 3.4 14.1
37 - VACUUM
37-01-S DUAL VACUUM SYSTEM. ENGINE DRIVEN 1706009-1 6.z', -3.4',
. VACUUM PUMP, AIRBORNEzllc,o E21 lCC 1.9 -(n
- VACUUM PUMP, AIRBORNE2l2CW 1.9 -5.0
=212CW
- COOLING SHROUD, AIRBORNE2CDH 2CDH-A 02 -5.6
. FILTER INSTALLATION 1201075-2 0.3 125
- VACUUM RELIEFVALVE 2H3-45 u.5 2.1
. MANIFOLD 1H5-25 u-c -3.0
- VACUUM GAUGSAMMETER s3280-1 0.6 tc.o
53. FUSELAGE
53-01-S REFUELING STEPS AND HANDLE INSTL 9701127-1 1.8 JE ?
56. WTNDOWS
56-01 -S WINDOW, HINGED RIGHT DOOR 071 1 050-48 5.8 47.8
co-uz- WINDOW, HINGED LEFT DOOR 0711050-47 5.8 47.8
6I . PROPELLER
61-01-A PROPELLER ASSEMBLY, 2.BLADE P2357299-02 -47.4
MCCAULEY 82D34C235/9ODKB.8
61-02-A SPINNER INSTALLATION, 2.BLADE D-7267-2 4.4 -49.9
61 -03-R GOVERNOR, PROPELLER c161031-01 19 2.7 -42.5
61 -04-S PROPELLER ASSEMBLY. 3-BLADE P4317296-01 /o. I -47.5
MCCAULEY 83D36C431 /8OVSA.1
61 -0s-s SPINNER INSTALLATION. 3-BLADE D-7261-2 4.5 -49.9
71 - POWERPLANT
71{1-R FILTER, AIR INTAKE P1 98290 05 -JC,
71-O2-^ WINTER KIT INSTL. 0752733 0.3 -42.0
72. ENGINES
72-01-R ENGINE. LYCOMING IO-540 AB1A5 075061 9-1 400.4' -23.6'
73 - ENGINE FUEL and CONTROL
73-01 -R EGT and CYLINDER HEAD TEMP INDICATOR s3305-2 0.8 t4.c
77. ENGINE INDICATING
77-O1-R TACHOMETER INSTALLATION, RECORDING s3329-4 1.0 to.
77-O2-R MANIFOLD PRESSURE & FUEL FLOW s3304-1 1.0 15.0
77-03-R OIL PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE s3279-1 0.8 14.5
INDICATOR
Figure -9. Equipment List Description (Sheet 5 of 6)
6-22 Nov 15/00

CESSNA sEcTroN 6
ITEM WT AFM
EQUIPMENT LIST DESCRIPTION BEF DRAWING
NO LBS tNs.
78 - EXHAUST
78-01 -R EXHAUST SYSTEM INSTALLATION 2254003-3 1,-32 16.8'
- LEFTEXHAUSTSYSTEM 2254003-31 8.4
- RIGHT EXHAUST SYSTEM 2254003-32 4.4
79 - OIL
79-01 -R OIL COOLER INSTALLATION, STEWART t06 t0R c.J
WARNER
98 - MISCELLANEOUS
98-01 -A AIRCFAFT HOISTING RINGS, SET OF 4 )70061 2-1 1.5
98-02-S REFUELING STEPS AND HANDLES,SET OF 2 )701127-1 1.8
98-03-A FUDDER PEDAL EXTENSIONS, REMOVABLE, )50 1 082-1 2.9
SET OF 2 (INSTALLED ARM SHOWN)
98-04-A STABILIZER ABRASION BOOTS, SET OF 2 )500041 -3 2.7
98-05-S STAINLESS STEEL CONTROL CABLES )760007-1 0.0
98-06-A TAILCONE LIFT HANDLES, SET OF 2 2201 009-1 'L0
98-07-A TOW HOOK KIT (INSTALLED ARM SHOWN) )712643-1 0.6'
.TOW HOOK, SCHWEIZER ID-112-15 )500228-2 0.5
-NYLON RELEASE CHORD. 18 FEET )500228-3 0.0
LONG
AVIONICS PACKAGE OPTIONS
98-08-R STANDARD AVIONICS PACKAGE R Ar )t 1,
. KX 1554 NAV/COM with GLIDE SLOPE 900006- 1 11.4 37.3
- KX 155A NAV/COM 1900006-1 tt9 19.0
. KLN 89 GPS-VFR 1900006-1 18.8
. MD 41-230 GPS-NAV SELECTOR
- KMA 26 AUDIO/INTERCOM/MARKER 1 3.6 4 10
BEACON INSTALLATION '930404-
. KT 76C MODE C TRANSPONDER 1930404-1 4.5 15.2
. KAP 140 SINGLE AXIS AUTOPILOT 1900007-1 8.4
. BASIC AVIONICS KIT INSTL 900006-1 4.3
98-09-A OPTIONAL NAV IAVIONICS PACKAGE 11.1- 135.5'

(STANDARD AVIONICS PACKAGE PLUS THE
FOLLOWINGJ (NET CHANGE)
- KLN 898 GPS-|FR (EXCHANGE) r900006-1 0.0 18.8
- GPS-NAV SELECTOR, ANNUNCIATOR 1D41-228
(EXCHANGE)
. KR 87 ADF SYSTEM t6641072-0014 6.4 20.4
- KAP .I40 TWO AXIS AUTOPILOT WITH 1900008-1
ELECTRIC TRIM {EXCHANGE)
Nov 15/00 6-231(6-24 blank)

CESSNA SECTION 7
MODEL 182S AIRPLANE & SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
SECTION 7
AIRPLANE & SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
lntroduction 7-5
Airframe 7-5
Flight Controls 7-6
Trim System 7-6
lnstrument Panel 7-6
Pilot Side Panel Layout . . . . 7-9
Center Panel Layout . . . . 7-9
Copilot Side Panel Layout 7-12
Center Pedestal Layout 7-12
Ground Control 7-12
Wing Flap System 7-13
Landing Gear System 7-14
Baggage Compailment ... 7-14
Seats 7-14
lntegraled Seat BelVShoulder Harness 7-15
Entrance Doors And Cabin Windows 7-171
ControlLocks 7-18
Engine 7-1 sl
Engine Controls 7-19
Engine lnstruments 7-19
New Engine Break-ln And Operation 7-211
Engine Lubrication System 7-22
lgnition And Starter System 7-22
System
Air lnduction 7-23
Exhaust System 7-23
Cooling System 7-23
Nov 15/00 7-1

SECTION 7 CESSNA
AIRPLANE & SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION MODEL 182S

Page
Propeller 7-24
FuelSystem 7-25
Fuel Distribution 7-25
Fuel lndicating System 7-27
Auxiliary Fuel Pump Operation 7-28
FuelVenting 7-28
Fuel Selector Valve 7-28
Fuel Drain Valves 7-29
BrakeSystem .:.... 7-32
Electricalsystem 7-32
Annunciator Panel . 7'33
Master Switch 7-34
Avionics Master Switch 7-35
Ammeter 7-35
Low Voltage Annunciation 7-36
Circuit Breakers And Fuses 7-36
Ground Service Plug Receptacle 7-37
Lighting Systems 7-38
Exterior Lighting 7-38
lnterior Lighting 7-38
Cabin Heating, Ventilating And Defrosting System 7-40
Pitot-Static System And lnstruments 7-42
Airspeed lndicator 7-43
Vertical Speed lndicator 7-43
Altimeter 7-44
l,-, Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 7
MODEL 182S AIRPI.ANE & SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION

Page
Vacuum System And lnstruments 7-44

Attitude lndicator 7-44
Directional lndicator 7-44
Vacuum Gauge 7-461
Low Vacuum Annunciation 7-46
Clock/O.A.T. lndicator 7-471
StallWarning System 7-47
Standard Avionics 7-48
Avionics Support Equipment 7-49
Avionics Cooling Fan 7-45
Microphone And Headset lnstallations 7-49
Static Dischargers 7-50
Cabin Features 7-50
Emergency Locator Transm itter 7-50
Cabin Fire Extinguisher 7-51
Nov 15/00 7-3/(7-4 blank)

CESSNA SECTION 7
INTRODUCTION
This s eration of the airplane
and its e herein is optional and
may no n r to the Supplements,
Section th and equipment.
AIRFRAME
The airplane is an all metal, four-place, high-wing, single-enginel
airplane equipped with tricycle landing gear and is designed for-
general utility purposes.
The construction of the fuselage is a conventional formed sheet
metal bulkhead, stringer, and skin design referred to as
The externally braced wings, containing integral fuel tanks, are

constructed of a front and rear spar with formed sheet metal ribs,
The empennage (tail assembly) consists of a conventional

vertical stabilizer, rudder, horizontal stabilizer, and elevator. The
vertical stabilizer consists of a forward and aft spar, formed sheet
metal ribs and reinforcements, four skin panels, formed leading
edge skins and a dorsalfin.
The rudder is constructed of a forward and aft spar, formed sheet
metal ribs and reinforcements, and a wrap-around skin panel. The
top of the rudder incorporates a leading edge extension which
contains a balance weight.
Nov 15/00 7-5

SECTION 7 CESSNA
FLIGHT CONTROLS
The airplane's flight control system (Refer to Figure 7-1) consists
of conventional aileron, rudder, and elevator control surfaces. The
operated through mechanical linkage
the ailerons and elevator, and
dder. The elevator control system is
which proiide improved stoitity in
flight.
TRIM SYSTEMS
rotation will trim nose-up.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
The instrument panel (Refer to Figure 7-2) is of all-metal
construction, and is designed in segments to allow related groups of
instruments, switches and controls to be removed without removing
the entire panel. For specific details concerning the instruments,
switches, circuit breakers, and controls on the instrument panel,
refer to related topics in this section.
7-6 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 7
AILEHON CONTROL SYSTEM
RUDDER AND RUDDER TRIM

CONTROL SYSTEMS
07851 01 7
07851 023
Figure 7-1. Flight Control and Trim Systems (Sheet 1 o 2)
Feb 3/97 7-7

SECTION 7 CESSNA
ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
ELEVATOR TRIM
CONTROL SYSTEM
g33l3l?
Figure 7-1. Flight Control and Trim Systems (Sheet 2 of 2)
7-8 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 7
PLOT SIDE PANEL LAYOUT

Flight instruments are contained in a single panel located in front
of the pilot. These instruments are designed around the basic "T"
configuration. The gyros are located immediately in front of the pilot,
and arranged veftically over the control column. The airspeed
indicator and altimeter are located to the left and right of the gyros,
respectively. The remainder of the flight instruments are clustered
around the basic "T".
To the right of the flight instruments is a sub panel which
contains engine tachometer and various navigational instruments.
To the left of the flight instruments is a sub panel which contains a
fuel quantity indicator, an oil temperature/oil pressure indicator, al
vacuum gauge/ammeter, an EGT/CHT indicator, a cloct</OATI
indicator and manifold pressure gauge/fuelflow indicator. I
Below the engine and flight instruments are the circuit breakers
and switches used throughout the airplane. MASTER, AVIONICSI
MASTER, the ignition switches and lighting controls are located inl
this area of the panel.
CENTER PANEL LAYOUT
The center panel contains various avionics equipment arranged
in a vertical rack. This arrangement allows each component to be
removed without having to access the backside of the panel. Below
the panel are the throttle, prop RPM, mixture, alternate static air.
A multi-function annunciator is located above the radio stack and

provides cauton and warning messages for fuel quantity, oil
pressure, low vacuum and low voltage situations.
Nov 15/00 7-9

SECTION 7 CESSNA
57 911 13
17 18 19 20 Zt
31 28 27 >6 25 43 24
32
40
41
Figure 7-2. lnstrument Panel (Sheet 1 of 2)
7-10 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 7
1. Oil Temperature and Oil 23. Hour Meter

Pressure lndicator a
2. Vacuum Gauge/Ammeter ?f 24. Glove Box
3. Fuel Quantity lndicators 1f 25. Gabin Heat Control
4. EGT/CHT lndicator 1l 26, Cabin Air Control
5. Digital CIocUOAT lndicator Al 27. Flap Switch and lndicator
6. Turn Coordinator 28. Mixture Control
7. Airspeed lndicator 29. Alternate Static Air Control
8. Directional Gyro 30. Throttle Gontrol
9. Attitude lndicator 31. Radio and Panel Dimming
Control
10. Tachometer 32. Glareshield and Pedestal
Dimming Control
1'1. Vertical Speed lndicator 33. Fuel Selector
12. Altimeter 34. Elevator Trim and lndicator
13. Annunciator Panel 35. Avionics Master Switch
14. ADF Bearing lndicator 36. Gircuit Breakers and
Switch/Breakers
15. Course Deviation and 37. Master Switch
Glide Slope Indicators
16. Audio Control Panel 38. Ignition Switch
17. GPS Receiver 39. Avionics Circuit Breaker
Panel
18. Nav/Com Radio #1 1f 40. Propeller Control
19. Nav/ComRadio#2 1f 41. RudderTrim
20. ADF Receiver 42. Cowl Flap Control f
2'1.Transponder 43. DefrostControl
22. ELT Remote Test Button 44. Manifold Pressureuel Flow
lndicator
Figure 7-2. lnstrument Panel (Sheet 2 of 2)
Nov 15/00 7-11

SECTION 7 CESSNA
COPILOT SIDE PANEL LAYOUT

The copilot sub panel contains the hour meter, ELT switch, and
room for expansion of indicators and other avionics equipment.
Below this sub panel are the glove box, cabin heat, defroster and
cabin air controls, and wing flap lever.
CENTER PEDESTAL LAYOUT
The center pedestal, located below the center panel, contains the
elevator and rudder trim control wheels and position indicators, and
provides a bracket for the microphone. The fuel selector valve
handle is located at the base of the pedestal. A parking brake
handle is mounted below the switch and control panel in front of the
pilot.
GROUND CONTROL
Effective ground control while taxiing is accomplished through
nose wheel steering by using the rudder pedals; left rudder pedal to
steer left and right rudder pedal to steer right. When a rudder pedal
is depressed, a spring loaded steering bungee (which is connected
to the nose gear and to the rudder bars) will turn the nose wheel
through an arc of approximately 11' each side of center. By
applying either left or right brake, the degree of turn may be
increased up to 29" each side of center.
Moving the airplane by hand s most easily accomplished by
attaching a tow bar to the nose gear strut. lf a tow bar is not
available, or pushing is required, use the wing struts as push points.
Do not use the vertical or horizontal surfaces to move the airplane. lf
the airplane is to be towed by vehicle, never turn the nose wheel
more than 29" either side of center or structural damage to the
nose gear could result.
The minimum turning radius of the airplane, using differential

braking and nose wheel steering during taxi, is approximately 27
feet. To obtain a minimum radius turn during ground handling, the
airplane may be rotated around either main landing gear by
pressing down on a tailcone bulkhead just forward of the horizontal
stabilizer to raise the nose wheel otf the ground. Care should be
exercised to ensure that pressure is exerted only on the bulkhead
area and not on skin between the bulkheads.
7-12 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 7
WING FLAP SYSTEM
Figure 7-3. Wing Flap System
Nov 15/00 7-13

SECTION 7 CESSNA
LANDNG GEAR SYSTEM

The landing gear is of the tricycle type, with a steerable nose
wheel and two main wheels. Wheel fairings are optional for both the
main and nose wheels. Shock absorption is provided by the tubular
_spring steel main landing gear struts and the airloil nose gear shock
lstrut. Each main gear wheel is equipped with a hydraulically-
actuated disc type brake on the inboard side of each wheel.
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
The baggage compartment consists of the area from the back of
the rear passenger seats to the att cabin bulkhead. Access to the
baggage compartment is gained through a lockable baggage door
on the left side of the airplane, or from within the airplane cabin. A
baggage net with tiedown straps is provided for securing baggage
and is aached by tying the straps to tiedown rings provided in the
airplane. For baggage area and door dimensions, refer to Section 6.
SEATS
The seating arrangement consists of two vertically adjusting crew
seats for the pilot and front seat passenger, and an infinitely
adjustable split back bench seat for rear seat passengers.
Seats used for the pilot and front seat passenger are adjustable
fore and aft, and up and down. Additionally, the angle of the seat
back is infinitely adjustable.
I Fore and aft adjustment is made using the handle located below
Ithe center of the seat frame. To position the seat, lift the handle,
slide the seat into position, release the handle and check that the
seat is locked in place. To adjust the height of the seat, rotate the
large crank under the right hand corner of the seat until a
comfoilable height is obtained. To adjust the seat back angle, pull
up on the release button, located in center front of seat, just under
the seat bottom, position the seat back to the desired angle, and
release the button. When the seat is not occupied, the seat back will
automatically fold forward whenever the release button is pulled up.
7-14 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 7
The rear passenger seat consists of a fixed, one-piece seatl

bottom and an infinitely-adjustable splt back. Seat back controls arel
located beneath each seat bottom and provide adjustment for each
seat back. To adjust the seat back, raise the lever, position the seat
back to the desired angle, release the lever and check that the back
is locked in place.
Headrests are installed on both the front and rear seats. To
adjust the headrest, apply enough pressure to it to raise or lower it
to the desired level.
INTEGRATED SEAT BELT/SHOULDER HARNESS

All seat positions are equipped with integrated seat
belts/shoulder harness assemblies (Refer to Figure 7-4).The design
incorporates an overhead iner.tia reel for the shoulder portion, and a
retractor assembly for the lap portion of the belt. This design allows
for complete freedom of movement of the upper torso area while
providing restraint in the lap belt area. ln the event of a sudden
deceleration, reels lock up to provide positive restraint for the user.
ln the front seats, the inertia reels are located on the centerline of
the upper cabin area. ln the rear seats, the inertia reels are located
outboard of each passenger in the upper cabin.
To use the integrated seat belVshoulder harness, grasp the link
with one hand, and, in a single motion, extend the assembly and
insert into the buckle. Posive locking has occurred wh-en al
distinctive "snap" sound is heard.
Proper locking of the lap belt can be verified by ensuring that the
belts are allowed to retract into the retractors and the lap belt is
snug and low on the waist as worn normally during flight. No more
than one additional inch of belt should be able to be pulled out of
the retractor once the lap belt is in place on the occupant. lf more
than one additional inch of belt can be pulled out of the retractor,
the occupant is too small for the installed restraint system and the
seat should not be occupied until the occuparit is propergl
restrained.
Removal is accomplished by lifting the release mechanism on,

the buckle or by pressing the release button on the buckle andl
pulling out and up on the harness. Spring tension on the inertia reel-
will automatically stow the harness.
Nov 15/00 7-15

SECTION 7 CESSNA
STANDARD INTEGRATED SEATBELT/

SHOULDER HARNESS WITH
INTERTIA REEL
VERTICAL
(HETGHT)
ADJUSTMENT
CRANK
SEAT BACK
ANGLE
BUTTON
FORE AND AFT

BUCKLE
ADJUSTMENT -!Z
LEVER
PRESS TO (NON ADJUSTABLE)
AILABLE MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT
i"iB=r-"N) \
LIFT TO
PUSH BUTTON RELEASE
RELEASE \
i't (LATCH)
<<1
051 4T1 004
Figure 7-4. Crew Seats, Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses
7-16 Nov 15/00

CESSNA sEcTtoN 7
A manually adustable seat belVshoulder harness assembly

available for all seats.
To use the manually adjustable seat belUshoulder harness
fasten and adjust the seat belVshoulder harness first. Lengthen
seat belt as required by pulling on the release strap on the belt
Snap the connecting link firmly into the buckle, then adjust
length. A properly adjusted harness will permit the occupant to le
forward enough to sit erect, but prevent excessive forwa
movement and contact with objects during sudden deceleration.
Also, the pilot must have the freedom to reach all controls easily.
Disconnecting the manually adjustable seat belVshoulder
harness is accomplished by pushing the button on the buckle to
release the connecting link.
ENTRANCE DOORS AND CABIN WINDOWS

. .Entry to, and exit from the airplane is accomplished through
either f two entry doors, one on edch side of the cbin at the fro-nt
seat positions (refer to Section 6 for cabin and cabin door
dimensions). The doors incorporate a recessed exterior door
fadle, a conventional interior door handle, a key operated door
lock (left door only), a door stop mechanism, and oenable windows
in both the left and right doors.
NOTE
The door latch design on this model requires that the

outside door handle on the pilot and front passenger doors
be extended out whenever the doors are opeh. When
closing the door, do not attempt to push the door handle in
until the door is fully shut.
To open the doors from outside the airplane, utilize the recessed
door handle near the aft edge of either door by grasping the forward
edge of the handle and pulling outboard. To close oi op-en the doors
from inside the airplane, use the combination door handle and arm
rest. The inside door handle has three positions and a placard at its
base which reads OPEN, CLOSE, and LOCK. The handle is spring
loaded to the CLOSE (up) position. When the door has been pulled
9!u! and latched, lock it by rotating the door handle forward fo the
LOCK position (flush with the arm iest). When the handle is rotated
to the LOCK position, an over center action will hold it in that
position. Both cabin doors should be locked prior to flight, and
should not be opened intentionally during flight.
Nov 15/00 7-'17

SECTION 7 CESSNA
NOTE
Exit from the airplane is accomplished by rotating the door

handle from the LOCK position, past the CLOSE position, aft to the
OPEN position and pushing the door open. To lock the airplane,
lock the right cabin door with the inside handle, close the left cabin
door, and using the ignition key, lock the door.
The left and right cabin doors are equipped with openable
windows which are held in the closed position by a detent equipped
-latch on the lower edge of the window frame. To open the windows,
lrotate the latch upwrd. Each window is equippO wtn a spring-
loaded retaining arm which will help rotate the window outward, and
hold it there. lf required, either window may be opened at any
speed up to 175 KIAS. The rear side windows and rear windows are
of the fixed type and cannot be opened.
CONTROL LOCKS
A control lock is provided to lock the aileron and elevator control
surfaces to prevent damage to these systems by wind buffeting
while the airplane is parked. The lock consists of a shaped steel rod
and flag. The flag identifies the control lock and cautions about its
removal before starting the engine. To install the control lock, align
the hole in the lop of the pilot's control wheel shaft with the hole in
the top of the shaft collar on the instrument panel and insert the rod
into the aligned holes. lnstallation of the lock wll secure the ailerons
in a neutral position and the elevators in a slightly trailing edge
down position. Proper installation of the lock will place the flag over
the ignition switch. ln areas where high or gusty winds occur, a
control suface lock should be installed over the vertical stabilizer
and rudder. The control lock and any other type of locking device
should be removed prior to starting the engine.
7-18 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 7
ENGINE
The airplane is powered by a horizontally opposed, six cylinder,
overhead valve, air cooled, fuel injected engine with a wet sump
lubrication system. The engine is a Lycoming Model |O-540-AB1A5
and is rated at 230 horsepower at 2400 RPM. Major accessories
include a starter and belt driven alternator mounted on the front of
the engine, and dual magnetos, dual vacuum pumps, and a full flow
oil filter mounted on the rear of the engine accessory case.
ENGINE CONTROLS
Engine manifold pressure is controlled by a throttle located on
the switch and control panel. The throttle is open in the forward
position and closed in the full aft position. A friction lock, which is a
round knurled knob, is located at the base of the throttle and is-
operated by rotating the lock clockwise to increase friction o{
counterclockwise to decrease it.
Engine speed is controlled by the propeller control. This system
is described under "Propeller" in this section.
The mixture control, mounted near the propeller control, is a red
knob with raised poinis around the circumference and is equipped
with a lock button in the end of the knob. The rich position is full
fonrvard, and full aft is the idle cutoff position. For small adjustments,
the control may be moved forward by rotating the knob clockwise,
and aft by rotating the knob counterclockwise. For rapid or large
adjustments, the knob may be moved forward or aft by depressing
the lock button in the end of the control, and then positioning the
control as desired.
ENGINE INSTRUMENTS
Engine operation is monitored by the following instruments: oil
pressure indicator, oil temperature indicator, tachometer, cylinderl
head temperature indicator (CHT), exhaust gas temperaturel
indicator (EGT), and manifold pressure gauge and fuel flowl
indicator.
The oil pressure/oil temperature indicator unit is located on thel
lower left side of the instrument panel. Markings for the pressurel
gauge indicate a minimum idling pressure of 20 PSI (red line), a
normal operating range of 50 to 90 PSI (green arc), and a
maximum pressure of 115 PSI (red line). Markings for the oil
temperature gauge indicated a normal operating range of 100 to
245"F (green arc), and a maximum temperature of 245"F (red line).
Nov 15/00 7-19

SECTION 7 CESSNA
Oil pressure signals are generated from a pressure

line/transducer combination. An oil pressure line is routed from the
upper front of the engine case to the rear engine baffle. At the
Ofie, the oil pressure line is connected to a transducer. This
transducer produces an electrical signal which translates into a
pressure reading at the instrument panel gauge.
Oil temperature signals are generated from a resistance{ype

probe located in the accessory case. As oil temperature changes,
ihe probe resistance changes. This resistance is translated into oil
temperature readings on the cockpit indicator.
the OIL PRESS light extinguishes.

NOTE
The low oil pressure switch is also wired into the Hobbs
(hour) meter. When pressure exceeds 20 PSl, a ground is
supplied to the hour meter, completing the hour meter
circuit.
I left side of the instrument

originating in the engine
as temperature portion of
I no range markings or red
lines. Marking for the cylinder head temperature portion of the
lindicator are in 5O'F increments, with numbers at 200'F, 300'F,
Normal operating temperatures (green arc) for
-+OO'F and 500'F.
Itne cHt indicator are 200'F td soo"f, with ied line at 500'F.
7-20 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 7
CHT signals are generated from a thermistor probe screwed into_

the cylinder head of the number 1 (right hand forivard) cylinder. Thel
resistance of the probe changes in proportion to the temperature,
and is registered on the indicator as a change in temperature.
The engine-driven mechanical tachometer is located on the rightl

side of the pilot's instrument panel. The instrument is marked in
increments of 100 RPM, and indicates both engine and propeller
speed. An hour meter in the lower section of the dial records
elapsed engine time in hours and tenths. lnstrument markings
include the normal operating range (green arc) of 2000 lo 24OO
RPM, and a maximum (red line) of 2400 RPM.
The manifold pressure gauge is part of the manifold pressure-

gauge/fuel flow indicator located on the left side of the pilot'sl
instrument panel. The gauge is direct reading and indicates
induction air manifold pressure in inches of mercury. lt has a normal
operating range (green arc) of 15 to 23 ln. Hg. The fuel flow.
indicator is a fuel pressure indicator calibrated in flow rate. The fuell
pressure is taken at the flow divider valve by a pressure transducer.
The pressure transducer receives a constant voltage from the
indicator and returns a variable voltage depending on the pressure,
as pressure increases, voltage increases. The indicator is marked
in gallons per hour and has a green arc from 0 to 15 gal./hr. There
is no red line or maximum fuelflow (pressure) limitation. There may
be some atmospheric conditions that would result in fuel flow rates
that exceed the maximum marked value on the indicator (i.e., very
low density altitude and full throttle). lf the indicator is pegged out
because of these conditions, the indicator will not be damaged, and
will return to operating range when the throttle is retarded to cruise
power settings.
NEW ENGTNE BREAK-|N AND OPERAT|ON I

The engine underwent a run in at the factory and is ready for the
full range of use. lt is, however, suggested that cruising be
accomplished a|75"/" power as much as practicable until a total of
50 hours has accumulated or oil consumption has stabilized. This
will ensure proper seating of the rings.
Nov 15/00 7-21

SECTION 7 CESSNA
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM

The engine utilizes a full-pressure, wet sump-type lubrication
system with aviation grade oil as the lubricant. The capacity of the
engine sump (located on the bottom of the engine) is nine quarts
(one additional quart is contained in the engine oil filter). Oil is
drawn from the sump through a filter screen on the end of a pickup
tube to the engine-driven oil pump. Oil from the pump passes
through a full-flow oil filter, a pressure relief valve at the rear of the
right oil gallery, and a thermostatically controlled remote oil cooler.
Oil from the remote cooler is then circulated to the left oil gallery
and propeller governor. The engine parts are then lubricated by oil
from the galleries. After lubricating the engine, the oil returns to the
sump by gravity. The filter adapter in the full flow filter is equipped
with a bypass valve which will cause lubricating oil to bypass the
filter in the event the filter becomes plugged, or the oil temperature
is extremely cold.
An oil dipstick/filler tube is located on the upper left side of the

engine case. The dipstick and oil filler tube are accessed through a
door located on the left center portion of the upper engine cowling.
The engine should not be operated on less than four quarts of oil.
To minimize loss of oil through the breather, fill to eight quarts for
normal flights of less than three hours. For extended flight, fill to
nine quarts (dipstick indication only). For engine oil grade and
specifications, refer to Section 8 of this handbook.
IGNITION AND STARTER SYSTEM

Engine ignition is provided by two engine driven magnetos, and
two spark plugs in each cylinder. The right magneto fires the lower
right and upper left spark plugs, and the left magneto fires the lower
-left and upper right spark plugs. Normal operation is conducted with
lboth magnetos due to the more complete burning of the fuel/air
mixture with dual ignition.
7-22 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 7
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
lower cowl area. An open alternate air door will result in an

approximate 107o power loss at full throtile. After passing through
the air box, induction air enters a fuel/air control unit nder te
engine, and is then ducted to the engine cylinders through intake
manifold tubes.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Exhaust gas from each cylinder passes through riser assemblies

to a muffler and tailpipe. Outside air is
pulled ln around shrouds
which are constructed around the outsid of the mufflers to form
heating chambers which supply heat to the cabin.
COOLING SYSTEM
Feb 3/97 7-23

SECTION 7 CESSNA
The pedestal is labeled OPEN, COWL FLAPS, CLOSED. Before
tions require them to be adjusted to keep the cylinder head tem-

perature at approximately two-thirds of the normal operating range
(green arc). During extended let-downs, it may be necessary to
lcompletely close the cowl flaps by pushing the cowl flap control
down to the CLOSED position.
A winterization kit is available for the airplane. Details of this kit

are presented in Section 9, Supplements.
PROPELLER
I The airplane has an all-metal, three-bladed, constant-speed,
lgovernor-regulated propeller. A two-bladed propeller is also
available. A setting introduced into the governor with the propeller
control establishes the propeller speed, and thus the engine speed
to be maintained. The governor then controls flow of engine oil,
boosted to high pressure by the governing pump, to or from a piston
in the propeller hub. Oil pressure acting on the piston twists the
blades toward high pitch (low RPM). When oil pressure to the piston
in the propeller hub is relieved, centrifugal force, assisted by an
internal spring, twists the blades toward low pitch (high RPM).
A control knob on the center area of the switch and control panel
is used to set the propeller and control engine RPM as desired for
various flight conditions. The knob is labeled PROPELLER, PUSH
INCR RPM. When the control knob is pushed in, blade pitch will
decrease, giving a higher RPM. When the control knob is pulled out,
the blade pitch increases, thereby decreasing RPM. The propeller
control knob is equipped with a vernier feature which allows slow or
fine RPM adjustments by rotating the knob clockwise to increase
RPM, and counterclockwise to decrease it. To make rapid or large
adjustments, depress the button on the end of the control knob and
reposition the control as desired.
7-24 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 7
FUEL SYSTEM
The airplane fuel 7-6) consists of two vented
integral fuel tanks( ng), a four-position selector
yalygr fuel strainer, engine-driven fuel pump, a
fuel/air control unit, ditributon valve and'fuel
injection nozzles.
L wnnnrne
UNUSABLE FUEL LEVELS FOR THIS AIRPLANE
WERE DETERMINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
FEDERAL AVIATION REGULATIONS. FAILURE
TO OPERATE THE AIRPLANE IN COMPLIANCE
WITH FUEL LIMITATIONS SPECIFIED IN
SECTION 2 MAY FURTHER REDUCE THE
AMOUNT OF FUEL AVALABLE tN FLIGHT.
FUEL FUEL LEVEL TOTAL TOTAL TOTAL USABLE

TANKS (QUANT|TY FUEL UNUSABLE ALL FLIGHT
EACH TANK) CONDITIONS
Two Full (46.0) 92.O 4.O 88.0
Two Reduced 69.0 4.O 65.0
(34.5)
Figure 7-5. FuelQuantity Data in U.S. Gallons
FUEL DISTRIBUTION
Feb 3197 7-25

SECTION 7 CESSNA
VENTED FU EL QUANTITY I NDICATORS

FILLER FUEL FUEL VENTED
OUANTITY QUANTITY CAP
TRANSMITTER TRANSMITTER
CAPACITY\ CAPACITY
STANDPIPE STANDPIPE
LEFT RIGHT
FUEL FUEL
TANK TANK
VENT DRAIN VENT

WITH VALVE VALVE WITH
CHECK (5 TOTAL) (5 TOTAL) CHECK
VALVE VALVE
FUEL SELECTOR
VALVE DRAIN PLUG
FUEL FUEL PUMP

SWITCH
FUEL
STRAINER
DRAIN AUXILIARY
FUEL
PUMP
THROTTLE
CONTROL
ENGINE
DRIVEN
FUEL PUMP
CODE
FUEL SUPPLY MIXTURE

\.
o
CoNTROL
VENT
MECHANICAL
LINKAGE
- ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION
TO
ENGINE
0785C1 007
Figure 7-6. Fuel System Schematic
7-26 Dec 1197

CESSNA SECTION 7
FUEL INDICATING SYSTEM
ln addition to low fuel annunciation, the warning circuitry is

designed to report failures with each transmitter causd by shrts,
opens or transmitter resistance which increases over time. lf the
circuitry detects any one of these conditions, the fuel level indicator
needle will go to the OFF position (below the O mark on the fuel-
gauge), and the amber annunciator will illuminate. lf the left tankl
transmitter has failed, the message will read L LOW FUEL. lf the
lght tank transmitter has failed, te message will read LOW FUEL
R. lf both tanks transmitters have failed, te message will read L
LOW FUEL R.
Nov 15/00 7-27

SECTION 7 CESSNA
Fuel pressure is measured by use of a transducer mounted near

the fuel manifold. This transducer produces an electrical signal
which is translated in the cockpit-mounted indicator as gallons-per-
hour. Normal operating (green arc) range is from 0 to 15 gallons-
per-hour.
AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP OPERATION
The auxiliary fuel pump is used primarily for priming the engine
starting. Priming is accomplished through the regular
ion system. lf the auxiliary fuel pump switch is accidentally
d in the ON position for prolonged periods (with master switch
d on and mixture rich) with the engine stopped, the intake
will be flooded.
The auxiliary fuel pump is also used for vapor suppression in hot
ather. Normally, momentary use will be sutficient for vapor
; however, continuous operation is permissible f
required. Turning on the auxiliary fuel pump with a normally
operating engine pump will result in only a very minor enrichment of
mixture.
It is not necessary to have the auxiliary fuel pump operating
ng normal takeotf and landing, since gravity and the engine-
/en pump will supply adequate fuel flow to the fuel injector unit.
the event of failure of the engine-driven fuel pump, use of the
fuel pump will provide sufficient fuel to maintain flight at
rcontinuous power.
FUEL VENTING
Fuel system venting is essential to system operation. Blockage of
the venting system will result in decreasing fuel flow and eventual
engine stoppage. Venting is accomplished by an interconnecting
line from the right fuel ank to the left fuel tank, and check valve
equipped overboard vents in each tank. The overboard vents
protrude from the bottom surfaces of the wings behind the wing
struts, slightly below the upper attach points of the struts. The fuel
filler caps are vacuum vented; the vents will open and allow air to
enter the fuel tanks in case the overboard vents become blocked.
FUEL SELECTOR VALVE
The fuel selector valve should be in the BOTH position for
takeoff, climb, landing, and maneuvers that involve prolonged slips
or skids of more than 30 seconds. Operation from either LEFT or
RIGHT tank is reserued for cruising flight.
7-28 June 13/97

CESSNA SECTION 7
NOTE
When the fuel selector valve handle is in the BOTH position
in cruising flight, unequal fuel flow from each tank may
occur if the wings are not maintained exactly level.
Resulting wing heaviness can be alleviated gradually by
turning the selector valve handle to the tank in the "heavy"
wing.
NOTE
It is not practical to measure the time required to consume
all of the fuel in one tank, and, after switching to the
opposite tank, expect an equal duration from the remaining
fuel. The airspace in both fuel tanks is interconnected by a
vent line and, therefore, some sloshing of fuel between
tanks can be expected when the tanks are nearly full and
the wings are not level.
NOTE
Unusable fuel is at a minimum due to the design of the fuel

system. However, with 1/4 tank or less, prolonged
uncoordinated flight such as slips or skids can uncover the
fuel tank outlets causing fuel starvation and engine
stoppage. Therefore, with low fuel reserves, do not allow
the airplane to remain in uncoordinated flight for periods in
excess of one minute.
FUEL DRAIN VALVES
The fuel system is equipped with drain valves to provide a means

for the examination of fuel in the system for contamination and
grade. The system should be examined before each flight and after
each refueling, by using the sampler cup provided to drain fuel from
each wing tank sump, the fuel reservoir sump, the fuel selector
drain and the fuel strainer sump. lf any evidence of fuel
contamination is found, it must be eliminated in accordance with the
Preflight lnspection checklist and the discussion in Section I of this
publication. lf takeoff weight limitations for the next flight permit, the
fuel tanks should be filled after each flight to prevent condensation.
June 13/97 7-2s I

SECTION 7 CESSNA
LOW VOLT
FIELD
I enouo
. SENSE
I
PoWER lN

ALT INPUT
1r
i\
.
I
STARTER
REB
\
++ TO ALT FLD
CIRCUIT
EXTERNAL BREAKER
POWER
0s85C2001
Figure 7-7. Electrical Schematic (Sheet 1 ol2l
7-30 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 7
TO HSI & GYRO (5)
AND IGNITION TO AUTO-PtLOT(4,5)

SWITCH
TO TRANSPONDER
LANDING TO ADF (2,3,4)
LIGHT
FLASHING TO NAV/COM23,4,5\
BEACON (2'3'4'5)
TO FLAPS f,R$rt"it
RCVR (2,3,4,5)
AVIONICS
MASTER
SWITCH
A TF 6
TO MASTER
SWITCH
AVN BUS 2
AVIONICS FAN
TO TURN
COORDINATOR
-TO
+
U) TO GPS (2,3,4,5)
TO NAV AND
m CONTROL WHEEL
J MAP LIGHTS O- TO NAV/COMI,
HEADSETI PWR,
o nv t1trAutr
NAV I-VVH,
COM1 SPEAKER PWR (1}
F MKR BCN RCVR'(1)
o TO AUTOPILOT (3)
LrJ
E
TO STROBE -
LIGHTS
TO TAXI LIGHTS O- ro ADF (5)
TO PITOT
HEAT
NAV I
NAV II
NAV II WITH 2-AXIS AP
NAV II WITH HSI II.AXIS OR 2.AXIS
0585C2001
Figure 7-7. Electrical Schematic (Sheet 2 of 2)
Nov 15/00 7-31

SECTION 7 CESSNA
BRAKE SYSTEM
wheel brakes may be set by utilizing the parking brake which is

operated by a handle under the left side of the instrument panel. To
aply the arking brake, set the brakes with the rudder pedals, pull
the handle aft, and rotate it 90o down.
For maximum brake life, keep the brake system properly

maintained, and minimize brake usage during taxi operations and
landings.
the pedals and then reaPPlY the

brakes become spongy or Pedal
ls should build braking Pressure.
s, use the other brake sParinglY
while using opposite rudder, as required, to offset the good brake.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7-32 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 7
Each primary bus bar is also connected to an avionics bus bar-

via a single avionics master switch. The primary buses are onl
anytime the master switch is turned on, and are not affected by
starter or external power usage. The avionics buses are on when
the master switch and avionics master switch are in the ON
position.
[ cnunoru
PRIOR TO TURNING THE MASTER SWITCH ON
OR OFF, STARTING THE ENGINE OR APPLYING
AN EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE, THE AVIONICS
MASTER SWITCH, LABELED AVIONICS MASTER,
SHOULD BE TURNED OFF THE PREVENT ANY
HARMFUL TRANSIENT VOLTAGE FROM
DAMAGING THE AVIONICS EOUIPMENT.
The airplane uses a power distribution module (J-Box), locatedl

on the left forward side of the firewall, to house all relays used
throughout the airplane electrical system. ln addition, the alternator
control unit and lhe external power connector are housed within the
module.
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
An annunciator panel (with integral toggle switch) is located

above the avionics stack and provides caution (amber) and warning
(red) messages for selected portions of the airplane systems. The
annunciator is designed to flash messages for approximately 10
seconds to gain the attention of the pilot before changing to steady
on. The annunciator panel cannot be turned ofi by the pilot.
lnputs to annunciator come from each fuel transmitter, the oil

temperature transducer, low oil pressure switch, the vacuum
transducers and the alternator control unit (ACU). lndividual LED
bulbs illuminate each message and may be replaced through the
rear of the annunciator. lllumination intensity can be controlled by
placing the toggle switch to either the DIM or DAY position.
Nov 15/00 7-33

SECTION 7 CESSNA
The annunciator panel can be tested by turning the Master

Switch On and holding the annunciator panel switch in the TST
position. All amber and red messages will flash until the switch is
released.
NOTE
When the Master Switch is turned ON, some annunciators

will flash for approximately 10 seconds before illuminating
steadily. When the TST switch is toggled up and held in
TST position, all remaining lights will flash until the switch is
released.
MASTER SWITCH
I The master switch is a split rocker-type switch labeled MASTER,

'and is ON in the up position and otf in the down position. The right
half of the switch, labeled BAT, controls all electrical power to the
airplane. The left half, labeled ALT, controls the alternator.
[ cnunon
PRIOR TO TURNING THE MASTER SWITCH ON
OR OFF, STARTING THE ENGINE OR APPLYING
. AN EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE, THE AVIONICS
I MASTER SWITCH, LABELED AVIONICS MASTER,
SHOULD BE TURNED OFF TO PREVENT ANY
HARMFUL TRANSENT VOLTAGE FROM
DAMAGING THE AVIONICS EOUIPMENT.
enough to open the battery contactor, remove power from the

alternator field, and prevent alternator restart.
7-34 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 7
AVIONICS MASTER SWITCH
Electrical power for Avionics Bus 1 and Avionics Bus 2 is

supplied through Primary Bus 1 and Primary Bus 2, respectively. A
rocker switch, located between the primary and avionics buses,
controls current flow to the avionics buses. Placing the rocker
switch in the up (ON) position supplies power to both buses
simultaneously. Placing the switch in the down (OFF) position
removes power from both buses. The switch is located on the lower
left side of the instrument panel.
NOTE
On some aircraft certified outside the United States, the

avionics master switch may be split. They are aligned for
independent operation of the buses.
With the switch in the off position, no electrical power will be

applied to the avionics equipment, regardless of the position of the
master switch or the individual equipment switches. The avionics
master switch should be placed in the OFF position prior to turning
the master switch on or off, starting he engine, or applying an
external power source.
Each avionics bus also incorporates a separate circuit breaker

installed between the primary bus and the avionics master switch. ln
the event of an electrical malfunction, this breaker will trip and take
the effected avionics bus off-line,
AMMETER
The ammeter/vacuum gauge is located on the lower left side of

the instrument panel. lt indicates the amount of current, in amperes,
from the alternator to the battery or from the battery to the airplane
electrical system. When the engine is operating and the master
switch is turned on, the ammeter indicates the charging rate applied
to the battery. ln the event the alternator is not functioning or the
electrical load exceeds the output of the alternator, the ammeter
indicates the battery discharge rate.
Dec 1/97 7-35

SECTION 7 CESSNA
LOW VOLTAGE ANNUNCIATION
The low voltage warning n the annunciator

panel and activates anytim 24.5 volts. lf low
vollage is detected, the r TS will flash for
approximately 10 seconds teadily. The pilot
cannot turn off the annunciator.
ln the event an overuoltage condition occurs, the alternator

control unit automatically pops the ALT FLD circuit breaker,
removing alternator field current and shutting down the alternator.
The battery will then supply system current as shown by a
discharge rate on the ammeter. Under these conditions, depending
on electrical system load, the low voltage warning annunciator will
illuminate when system voltage drops below normal. The alternator
control unit may be reset by resetting the circuit breaker. lf the
warning light extinguishes, normal alternator charging has resumed;
however, if the light illuminates again, a malfunction has occurred,
and the flight should be terminated as soon as practicable.
NOTE
lllumination of the low voltage light and ammeter discharge

indications may occur during low RPM conditions with an
electrical load on the system, such as during a low RPM
taxi. Under these conditions, the light will go out at higher
RPM.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND FUSES
All circuit breakers inside the airplane are of the "push to reset"
or "switch/breake/'type. The power distribution module uses spade
type (automotive style) fuses and one glass type fuse (controlling
the clock).
Spare fuses for the power distribution module are located inside
the module. lf one of the spare fuses is used, a replacement spare
should be obtained and reinstalled before the next flight.
I z-so Dec 1197

CESSNA sEcTtoN 7
GROUND SERVICE PLUG RECEPTACLE
used to avoid performing proper maintenance procedures on a low

battery.
NOTE
lf no avionics equipment is to be used or worked on, the

avionics master switch should be turned off. lf maintenance
is required on the avionics equipment, it is advisable to
utiljze a regulated external power source to prevent damage
to the avionics equipment by transient voltage. Do not crak
or start the engine with the avionics master switch turned
on.
NOTE
Just before connecting an external power source (generator

type or battery cart),- the avionics'master switc-and the I
master switch should be turned off.
- ..lf there is any question as to the condition of the battery, the

following check should be made after engine has been started and
external power source has been removed.
1. Master Switch - - OFF.

2. Taxi and Landing Light Switches - - ON.
3. Engine RPM - - REDUCE to idte.
4. Master Switch - - ON (with taxi and tanding lights turned on)
5. Engine RPM - - INCREASE to approximatety 1S0O RpM.
6. Ammeter and Low Voltage Annunciator - - CHECK.
Nov 15/00 7-37

SECTION 7 CESSNA
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
illumination for each cabin door area.
position.
NOTE
The strobes uld not be used when

flying throug flashing light reflected
from water in the atmosPhere,
particularly vertigo and loss of
orientation.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
lnterior lighting is controlled by a combination of flood lighting,

glareshield lghting, pedestal lighting, panel lighting, radio lighting
and pilot controlwheel lighting.
Flood lighting is accomplished using two lights in the front and a

single dome lht in the rear. All lights are contained in the
overhead console, and are turned on and off with push type
switches located near each light. The two front lights are individually
rotatable, providing directional lighting for the pilot and front
passenger. The rear dome light is a fixed position light and provides
for general illumination in the rear cabin area.
7-38 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 7
Glareshield lighting is accomplished using a fluorescent light

.cegsed into the glareshield. This light is controlled by rotating the
GLARESHIELD LT dimmer, located below the nav indictors.
Rotating the dimmer clockwise increases light intensity, and rotating
the dimmer counterclockwise decreases light intensity.
Panel lighting is accomplished using individual lights mounted in

each instrument and gauge. These lights are wired in parallel and
are controlled by the PANEL LT dimmer, located below the nav
Pilot control wheel lighting is accomplished by use of a rheostat

and light assembly, located underneath the pilot control wheel yoke.
The light provides downward illumination from the bottom of the
Regardless of the light system in question, the most probable

cause of a light failure is a burned out bulb. However, in the event
any of the lighting systems fail to illuminate when turned on, check
the appropriate circuit breaker. lf the circuit breaker has opened,
and there is no obvious indication of a shoft circuit (smoke or odor),
turn off the light switch of the affected lights, reset the breaker, and
turn the switch on again. lf the breaker opens again, do not reset it
Nov 15/00 7-39

SECTION 7 CESSNA
CABIN HEATING, VENTILATING AND

DEFROSTING SYSTEM
The temperature and volume of airllow into the cabin can be
regulated by manipulation of the push-pull CABIN HT and CABIN
AIR controls (Refer to Figure 7-8). Both controls are the double-
button locking-type and permit intermediate settings.
For cabin ventilation, pull the CABIN AIR knob out. To raise the
air temperature, pull the CABIN HT knob out approximately 1/4 to
1/2 inch for a small amount of cabin heat. Additional heat is
available by pulling the knob out farther; maximum heat is available
with the CABIN HT knob pulled out and the CABIN AIR knob
pushed full in. When no heat is desired in the cabin, the CABIN HT
knob is pushed full in.
Front cabin heat and ventilating air is supplied by outlet holes
control sliding valves in either defroster outlet to permit regulation of

defroster airflow.
windshield sillarea.
7-40 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 7
EXHAUST
MUFFLER
SHROUDS HEATER
VALVE
DEFROSTER
OUTLET FII AIR
VENTILATING
AIR DOOR
HEAT
DEFROSTER
CONTBOL
CONTROL
N AIR
CONTROL
CABIN FLOOR
AIR OUTLET
FORWARD
I
CABIN LOWER
AIR OUTLETS
fl FORWARD I
vsB[[^"J
AIR OUTLETS
REAB CABIN
VENTILATING
AIR OUTLETS
VENTILATING
AIR
HEATED AIR
BLENDED AIR
MECHANICAL
0785C1014
Figure 7-8. Cabin Heating, Ventilating and Defrosting System.
Feb 3/97 7-41

SECTION 7 CESSNA
PITOT.STATIC SYSTEM AND INSTRUMENTS

The pitot-static systems supply ram air pressure to the airspeed
indicator and static pressure to the airspeed indicator, vedical speed
indicator and altimeter. The systems are composed of a heated pitot
tube mounted on the lower surface of the left wing, two external
static ports on the lower left and right sides of the forward fuselage,
an alternate static source valve and the associated plumbing
necessary to connect the instruments to the sources.
The heated pitot system consists of a heating element in the pitot

tube, a 1O-amp switch/breaker labeled PITOT HEAT, and associated
wiring. The switch/breaker is located on the lower left side of the
instrument panel. When the pitot heat switch is turned on, the
element in the pitot tube is heated electrically to maintain proper
operation in possible icing conditions.
A static pressure alternate source valve is installed above the

throttle, and can be used if the external static source is
malfunctioning. This valve supplies static pressure from inside the
cabin instead of the external static port.
lf erroneous instrument readings are suspected due to water or

ice in the pressure line going to the standard external static
pressure source, the alternate static source valve should be pulled
on.
Pressures within the cabin will vary with open heater/vents and
windows. Refer to Section 5 for the configuration applicable to the
use of the alternate static source and the correction charts.
7-42 Feb 3197

CESSNA SECTION 7
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
The airspeed indicator is calibrated in knots and miles per hour.

It incorporates an internal, rotatable ring which allows true airspeed
to be read off the face of the dial. ln addition, the indicator
incorporates windows at the seven and twelve o'clock positions. The
window at the seven o'clock position displays true airspeed, and the
window at the twelve o'clock position displays pressure altitude
overlayed with a temperature scale.
Limitation and range markings (in KIAS) include the white arc (36
to 100 knots), green arc (43 to 140 knots), yetlow arc (14O to 175
knots), and a red line (175 knots).
To find true airspeed, first determine pressure altitude and

outside air temperature. Using this data, rotate the lower left knob
until pressure altitude aligns with outside air temperature in the
twelve o'clock window. True airspeed (corrected for pressure and
temperature) can now be read in the seven o'clock window. For
maximum accuracy the true airspeed should be read opposite the
calibrated airspeed value.
VERTCAL SPEED INDICATOR
The vertical speed indicator depcts airplane rate of climb or

descent in feet per minute. The pointer is actuated by atmospheric
pressure changes resulting from changes of altitude as supplied by
the static sources.
Feb 3/97 7-43

SECTION 7 CESSNA
ALTIMETER
Airplane altitude is depicted by a barometric type altimeter. A

knob near the lower left portion of the indicator provides adjustment
of the instrument's barometric scale to the current altimeter setting.
VACUUM SYSTEM AND INSTRUMENTS

I fne vacuum system (Refer to Figure 7-9) providesindicator.
vacuum
necessary to operate the attitude
lme systm cnsists of two en mps, two
pressure switches for measuring ugh each
pump, a vacuum relief valve, a vacuum system air filter, vacuum
operated instruments, a vacuum gauge, low vacuum warning on the
annunciator, and a manifold with check valves to allow for normal
vacuum system operation if one of the vacuum pumps should fail.
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
The attitude indicator is a vacuum air-driven gyro that gives a

visual indication of flight attitude. Bank attitude is presented by a
pointer at the top of the indicator relative to the bank scale which
has index marks at 10o,20",30o,60", and 90" either side of the
center mark. Pitch and roll attitudes are presented by a miniature
airplane superimposed over a symbolic horizon area divided into
two sections by a white horizon bar. The upper "blue sky" area and
the lower "ground" area have pitch reference lines useful for pitch
-attitude control. A knob at the bottom of the instrument is
provided
lfor in-flight adjustment of the symbolic airplane to the horizon bar
for a more accurate flight attitude indication.
DIRECTIONAL INDICATOR
The directional indicator is a vacuum air-driven gyro that displays

airplane heading on a compass card in relation to a fixed simulated
airplane image and index. The indicator will precess slightly over a
period of time. Therefore, the compass card should be set with the
magnetic compass just prior to takeoff, and readjusted as required
throughout the flight. A knob on the lower left edge of the instrument
is used to adjust the compass card to correct for precession. A knob
on the lower right edge of the instrument is used to move the
heading bug.
7-44 Nov 15/00

CESSNA sEcroN 7
OVERBOARD
CODE
ENGINE-
INLET AIR DRIVEN
VACUUM
PUMPS LOW VACUUM
VACUUM TRANSDUCERS
(ooNNECTED TO
DISCHARGI ANNUNCIATOR
v AIR PANEL)
VACUUM SYSTEM
MANIFOLD
AIR FILTER
CHECK VALVE
/ VACUUM
RELIEF
\ VALVE
ATTITUDE
INDICATOR
?

?
078sc1 01 3
Figure 7-9. Vacuum System Schematic
Feb 3197 7-45

SECTION 7 CESSNA
lvncuuu cAUcE
T The vacuum gauge is part of the vacuum gauge/ammeter'
located on the lwei left corner of the instrument panel. lt is
atmospheric pressures at higher altitudes, the vacuum gauge may

indicate as low as 4.0 in. Hg. at 20,000 feet and still be adequate
for normal system operation.
LOW VACUUM ANNUNCIATION
Each engine-driven vacuum pump is plumbed to a common

manifold, located forward of the firewall. From the tee, a single line
runs into the cabin to operate the various vacuum system
instruments. This tee contains check valves to prevent back flow
into a pump if it fails. Transducers are located just upstream of the
tee and measure vacuum output of each pump.
approximately 10 seconds before turning steady on.
7-46 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 7
clocK / o.A.T. |ND|CATOR I

An integrated clock / O.A.T. is installed in the upper left side of
the instrument panel as standard equipment. For a complete
and operating instructions, refer to the Supptements,l
$::i,rjf[:
STALL WARNING SYSTEM
control panel, protects the stall warning system. The vane in the
wing senses the change in airflow over the wing, and operates the
warning horn at airspeeds between 5 and 10 knots above the stall
in allconfigurations.
The airplane has a heated stall warning system, the vane and
sensor unit in the wing leading edge is
element. The heated part of the system
HEAT switch, and is protected by the PITO
. The.stall warning system should be checked during the pre-flight

inspecton by momentarify turning on the mastei switch an
actuating the vane in the wing. The system is operational if the
warning horn sounds as the vane is pushed upward.
Nov 15/00 7-47

SECTION 7 CESSNA
AIRPLANE & SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION MODEL 1825
STANDARD AVIONICS
Standard avionics for the Model 1825 airplanes include the
following equipment:
KX-1554 Nav/Com Radio

KX-155A Nav/Com Radio with Glide Slope
Kl 208 lndicator Head
Kl 209A lndicator Head with GPS lnterface
KT-76C Transponder
KMA-26 Audio Panel
3000-11 Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)
If KLN 898 Global Positioning System (GPS)
KAP 140 Single Axis Autopilot
_ For complete operating instructions on the standard and optional

lavionics systems, refer to the Supplements, Section 9.
7-48 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 7
AVIONICS SUPPORT EQUIPMENT

Avionics operations are supported by the avionics cooling fan,
microphone and headset installations and static discharge wicks-.
AVIONICS COOLING FAN
An avionics cooling fan is installed on the left side of the interior

firewall. The system utilizes a single electric fan and associated
ductwork to force-cool the GPS and Nav/Com radios.
Power to the electric fan is supplied through the AVN FAN circuit
breaker. The _fan operates anytime the master and avionics mastefl
switches are ON.
MICROPHONE AND HEADSET INSTALLATIONS
the airplane includes a hand-held

peaker,
'wheels,two remote-keyed microphone
'booml
and provisins for
nd passenger station. I
The hand-held microphone
switch. This microphone is plug
accessible to both the pilot an
push-to{alk switch allows audio t
The overhead speaker is located in the center overhead console.

Volume and output for this speaker is controlled through the audio
panel.
Each control wheel contains a miniature push-to-talk switch. Thisl

switch allows the pilot or front passenger to transmit on the Com_
radios using remot mics. I
Nov 15/00 7-49

SECTION 7 CESSNA
NOTE
To ensure audibility and clarity when transmitting with the

handheld microphone, always hold it as closely as possible
to the lips, then key the microphone and speak directly into
it. Avoid covering opening on back side of microphone for
optimum noise canceling.
STATIC DISCHARGERS
Static wicks (static dischargers) are installed at various points

throughout the airframe to reduce interference from precipitation
static. Under some severe static conditions, loss of radio signals is
possible even with static dischargers installed. Whenever possible,
avoid known severe precipitation areas to prevent loss of
dependable radio signals. lf avoidance is impractical, minimize
airspeed and anticipate temporary loss of radio signals while in
these areas.
Static dischargers lose their effectiveness with age, and

therefore, should be checked periodically (at least at every annual
inspection) by qualified avionics technicians, etc.
CABIN FEATURES
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT)
A remote switch/annunciator is installed on the top center

location of the copilot's instrument panel for control of the ELT from
the flight crew station. The annunciator, which is in the center of
the rocker switch, illuminates when the ELT transmitter is
transmitting. The ELT emits an omni-directional signal on the
international distress frequencies of 121.5 MHz and 243.0 MHz'
General aviation and commercial aircraft, the FAA and CAP monitor
-121.5 MHz, and 243.O MHz is monitored
by the military. For a basic
loverview o tne glt, refer to the Supplements, Section .
7-50 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 7
CABIN FIRE EXTINGUISHER
A portable Halon 1211 (Bromochlorodifluoromethane) fire

extinguisher is standard for installation on the floorboard near the
pilot's seat where it would be accessible in case of fire. The
extinguisher has an Underwriters Laboratories classification of SB:C.
lf installed, the extinguisher should be checked prior to each flight to
ensure that its bottle pressure, as indicated by the gauge on the
bottle, is within the green arc (approximately 125 psi) and the
operating lever lock pin is securely in place.
To operate the fire efiinguisher:
1. Loosen retaining clamp(s) and remove extinguisher from

bracket.
2. Hold extinguisher upright, pull operating ring pin, and press
lever while directing the discharge at the base of the fire at the
near edge. Progress toward the back of the fire by moving the
nozzle rapidly with a side to side sweeping motion.
[, wnnnrnc
VENTILATE THE CABIN PROMPTLY AFTER
SUCCESSFULLY EXTINGUISHING THE FRE TO
REDUCE THE GASES PRODUCED BY THERMAL
DECOMPOSITION.
3. Anticipate approximately eight seconds of discharge duration.

Fire extinguishers should be recharged by a qualified fire
extinguisher agency after each use. Such agencies are listed under
"Fire Extinguisher" in the telephone directory. After recharging,
secure the extinguisher to its mounting bracket; do not allow it to lie
loose on shelves or seats.
Feb 3/97 7-51/(7-52 blank)

CESSNA sEcTtoN I
MODEL 182S HANDLING, SERVICE & MAINTENANCE
SECTION 8
AIRPLANE HANDLING, SERVICE
& MAINTENANCE
lntroduction
ldentification Plate 8-4
Cessna Owner Advisories 8-4
United States Airplane Owners 8-5
I nternational Airplane Owners 8-5
Publications 8-5
Airplane File 8-6
Airplane lnspection Periods 8-7
FAA Required lnspections 8-7
Gessna I nspection Programs 8-8
Cessna Customer Care Program 8-8
Pilot Conducted Preventive Maintenance 8-9
Alterations Or Repairs 8-9
Ground Handling 8-1 0
Towing 8-10
Parking 8-10
Tie-Down 8-10
Jacking 8-111
Leveling 8-1 1
Flyable Storage 84
Servicing 8-12
oit 8-1 3
Oil Specification 8-1 3
Recommended Viscosity for Temperature Range 8-1 4l
Nov 15/00 8-1

SECTION 8 CESSNA
HANDLING, SERVICE & MAINTENANCE MODEL 182S
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Gontinued)

Page
Capacity of Engine Sump 8-14

Oil and Oil Filter Change 8-14
Fuel 8-15
Approved FuelGrades (and Colors) 8-1 5
FuelCapacity 8-1 6
FuelAdditives 8-16
Fuel Contamination 8-20
Landing Gear 8-21
Cleaning And Care 8-21
Windshield And Windows 8-21
Painted Suaces 8-22
Propeller Care 8-23
Engine Care 8-23
lnterior Care 8-24
8-2 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 8
MODEL 182S HANDLING. SERVICE & MAINTENANCE
INTRODUCTION
This section contains factory recommended procedures for
proper ground handling and routine care and servicing of your
airplane. lt also identifies certain inspection and maintenancel
requirements which must be followed if your airplane is to retain that
new plane performance and dependability. lt is wise to follow a
planned schedule of lubrication and preventive maintenance based
on climatic and flying conditions encountered in your locality.
Keep in touch with your local Cessna Service Station and take
advantage of their knowledge and experience. Your Cessna Service
Station knows your airplane and how to maintain it, and will remind
you when lubrications and oil changes are necessary, as well as
other seasonal and periodic seruices.
The airplane should be regularly inspected and maintained in

accordance with information found in lhe airplane maintenance
manual and in company issued service bulletins and service
newsletters. All service bulletins peaining to the aircraft by serial
number should be accomplished and the airplane should receive
repetitive and required inspections. Cessna does not condone
modifications, whether by Supplemental Type Certificate or
othenivise, unless these certificates are held and/or approved by
Cessna. Other modifications may void warranties on the airplane
since Cessna has no way of knowing the full effect on the overall
airplane. Operation of an airplane that has been modified may be a
risk to the occupants, and operating procedures and pedormance
data set forth in the operating handbook may no longer be
considered accurate for the modified airplane.
Nov 15/00 8-3

SECTION 8 CESSNA
IDENTIFICATION PLATE
All correspondence regarding your airplane should include the
-lserial Number. The Serial Number, Model Number, Production
Certificate Number (PC) and Type Certificate Number (TC) can be
found on the ldentification Plate, located on the afi left tailcone. A
lsecondary ldentification Plate is also installed on the lower part of
the left forward doorpost. Located adjacent to the secondary
lldentification Plate is the Finish and Trim Plate which contains a
code describing the exterior paint combination of the airplane. The
code may be used in conjunction with an applicable lllustrated Parts
Catalog if finish and trim information is needed.
CESSNA OWNER ADVISORIES

Cessna Owner Advisories are sent to Cessna Aircraft FAA
Registered owners of record at no charge to inform them about
mandatory and/or beneficial aircraft service requirements and
product changes. Copies of the actual bulletins are available from
Cessna Service Stations and Cessna Customer Service.
8-4 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 8
UNITED STATES AIRPLANE OWNERS
lf your airplane is registered in the U. S., appropriate Cessna

Owner Advisories will be mailed to you automatically according to
the latest aircraft registration name and address which you have
provided to the FAA. Therefore, it is impodant that you provide
correct and up{o-date mailing information to the FAA.
lf you require a duplicate Owner Advisory to be sent to an

address different from the FAA aircraft registration address, please
complete and return an Owner Advisory Application (otherwise no
action is required on your part).
INTERNATIONAL AIRPLANE OWNERS
To receive Cessna Owner Advisories, please complete and

return an Owner Advisory Application.
Receipt of a valid Owner Advisory Application will establish yourr

Cessna Owner Advisory service for one year, after which you will be I
sent a renewal notice. lt is important that you respond promptly to
update your address for this critical service.
PUBLICATIONS
Various publications and flight operation aids are furnished in the

airplane when delivered from the factory. These items are listed
below.
. Customer Care Program Handbook

. Pilot's Operating Handbook and FAA Approved Airplane
Flight Manual
. Pilot's Checklist
. Passenger Briefing Card
. Cessna Sales and Service Directory
To obtain additional publications or owner advisory information,

you may contact Cessna's Product Support Department at (316)
517-5800. Fax (316) 517-7271 or write to The Cessna Aircraft
Company, P.O. Box 7706, Wichita,KS 67277, Dept 751C.
Nov 15/00 8-5

SECTION 8 CESSNA
-IthatThe following additional publications, plus many other supplies

are applicable to your airplane, are available from your local
Cessna Dealer.
. lnformation Manual (contains Pilot's Operating Handbook
lnformation)
' Maintenance Manual, Wiring Diagram Manual and
lllustrated Parts Catalog
Your local Cessna Service Station has a Customer Care Supplies

and Publications Catalog covering all available items, many of
which the Service Station keeps on hand. The Seruice Station can
place an order for any item which is not in stock.
NOTE
A Pilot's Operating Handbook and FAA Approved Airplane

- Flight Manual which is lost or destroyed may be replaced by
I contacting your local Cessna Service Station. An affidavit
AIRPLANE FILE
There are miscellaneous data, information and licenses that are a
part of the airplane file. The following is a checklist for that file. ln
addition, a periodic check should be made of the latest Federal
Aviation Regulations to ensure that all data requirements are met.
To be displayed in the airplane at alltimes:
1. Aircraft Airworthiness Certificate (FAA Form 8100-2).

-I 2. Aircraft Registration Certificate (FAA Form 8050-3).
g. Aircraft nao Station License, fif applicable).
8-6 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 8
To be carried in the airplane at alltimes:
1. Current Pilot's Operating Handbook and FAA Approvedl

Airplane Flight Manual.
2. Weight and Balance, and associated papers (latest copy of the
Repair and Alteration Form, FAA Form 337, il applicable).
3. Equipment List.
To be made available upon request:
1. Airplane Logbook.
2. Engine Logbook.
Most of the items listed are required by the United States Federal
Aviation Regulations. Since the Regulations of other nations may
require other documents and data, owners of airplanes not
registered in the United States should check with their own aviation
officials to determine their individual requirements.
Cessna recommends that these items, plus the Pilot's Checklists,

Customer Care Program Handbook and Customer Care Card, be
carried in the airplane at alltimes.
AIRPLANE INSPECTION PERIODS

FAA REOUIRED INSPECTIONS
As required by U.S. Federal Aviation Regulations, all civil aircraft

of U.S. registry must undergo a complete inspection (annual) each
twelve calendar months. ln addition to the required annual
inspection, aircraft operated commercially (for hire) must have a
complete inspection every 100 hours of operation.
The FAA may require other inspections by the issuance of

airworthiness directives applicable to the airplane, engine, propeller
and components. lt is the responsibility of the owner/operator to
ensure compliance with all applicable airworthiness directives, and
when the inspections are repetitive, to take appropriate steps to_
prevent inadvrtent noncomplince. I
Nov 15/00 8-7

SECTION 8 CESSNA
CESSNA INSPECTION PROGRAMS

ln lieu of the 100 hour and annual inspection requirements, an
airplane may be inspected in accordance with a Progressive Care
lnspection Program or a PhaseOard lnspection Program. Both
programs offer systems which allow the work load to be divided into
smaller operations that can be accomplished in shofter time
periods.
I fne Cessna Progressive Care lnspection Program allows an

airplane to be inspected and maintained in four operations. The four
operations are recycled each 200 hours and are recorded in a
specially provided Aircraft lnspection Log as each operation is
conducted.
I fne PhaseOard lnspection Program offers a parallel system for

high-utilization flight operations (approximately 600 flight hours per
year). This system utilizes 50 hour intervals (Phase 1 and Phase 2)
to inspect high-usage systems and components. At 12 months or
600 flight hours, whichever occurs first, the airplane undergoes a
complete (Phase 3) inspection.
Regardless of the inspection method selected, the owner should

keep in mind that FAR Part 43 and FAR Part 91 establishes the
requirement that properly certified agencies or personnel
accomplish all required FAA inspections and most of the
manufacturer recommended inspections.
CESSNA CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Specific benefits and provisions of the Cessna Warranty plus
_other important benefits for you are contained in your Customer
lOare erogram Handboot< supftieO with your airplane.-The Customer
lOare Program Handbook should be thoroughly reviewed and kept in
Jthe airplane at alltimes.
I You will also want to return to your Cessna Service Station either
at 50 hours for your first Progressive Care Operation, or at 100
hours for your first 100 hour inspection depending on which
program you choose to establish for your airplane. While these
limportant inspections will be performed for you by any Cessna
lService Station, in most cases you will prefer to have the Cessna
lService Station from whom you purchased the airplane accomplish
Ithis work.
Nov 15/00
CESSNA SECTION 8
PILOT CONDUCTED PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

A certified pilot who owns or operates an airplane not used as an
air carrier is authorized by FAR Part 43 to perform limited
maintenance on his airplane. Refer to FAR Part 43 for a list of the
specific maintenance operations which are allowed.
NOTE
Pilots operating airplanes of other than U.S. registry should

refer to the regulations of the country of certification for
information on preventive maintenance that may be
performed by pilots.
A Maintenance Manual must be obtained prior to performing any

preventive maintenance to ensure that proper procedures are
followed. Your Cessna Seruice Station should be contacted for
further information or for required maintenance which must be
accomplished by appropriately licensed personnel.
ALTERATIONS OR REPAIRS
It is essential that the FAA be contacted prior to any alterations
on the airplane to ensure that airworthiness of the airplane is not
violated. Alterations or repairs to the airplane must be accomplished
by licensed personnel, utilizing only FAA Approved components and
FAA Approved data, such as Cessna Service Bulletins.
Nov 15/00 8-e l

SECTION 8 CESSNA
GROUND HANDLING
TOWING
The airplane is most easily and safely maneuvered by hand with

the tow bar attached to the nose wheel (the tow bar is stowed on
the floor in the baggage area). When towing with a vehicle, do not
exceed the nose gear turning angle of 29' either side of center, or
damage to the nose landing gear will result.
[, cnunoru
REMOVE ANY INSTALLED RUDDER LOCK BEFORE
TOWING.
lf the airplane is towed or pushed over a rough surface during

hangaring, watch that the normal cushioning action of the nose strut
does not cause excessive vertical movement of the tail and the
resulting contact with low hangar doors or structure. A flat nose tire
or deflated strut will also increase tail height.
PARKING
- When parking the airplane, head into the wind and set the
lparking brake. Do not set the parking brake during cold weather
when accumulated moisture may freeze the brakes, or when the
brakes are overheated. lnstall the control wheel lock and chock the
wheels. ln severe weather and high wind conditions, tie the airplane
down as outlined in the following paragraph.
TIE.DOWN
Proper tie-down procedure is the best precaution against damage

to the parked airplane by gusty or strong winds. To tie-down the
airplane securely, proceed as follows:
1. Set the parking brake and install the control wheel lock.
2. lnstall a surface control lock over the fin and rudder.
3. Tie sufficiently strong ropes or chains (700 pounds tensile
strength) to the wing, tail and nose tie-down fittings and
secure each rope or chain to a ramp tie-down.
4. lnstall
a pitot tube cover.
8-1 0 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 8
JACKING
When a requirement exists to jack the entire airplane off the
ground, or when wing jack points are used in the jacking operation,
refer to the Maintenance Manual for specific procedures and
equipment required.
lndividual main gear may be jacked by using the jack pad which
is incorporated in the main landing gear strut step bracket. When
using the individual gear strut jack pad, flexibility of the gear strut
will cause the main wheel to slide inboard as the wheel is raised,
tilting the jack. The jack must then be lowered for a second jacking
operation. Do not jack both main wheels simultaneously using the
individual main gear jack pads.
L cnunon
DO NOT APPLY PRESSURE ON THE ELEVATOR
OR HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SURFACES.
WHEN PUSHING ON THE TAILCONE, ALWAYS
APPLY PRESSURE AT A BULKHEAD TO AVOID
BUCKLING THE SKIN.
aintenance is required, the nose wheel may be

nd by pressing down on a tailcone bulkhead, just
izontal stabilizer, and allowing the tail to rest on
g.
To assist in raising and holding the nose wheel off the grouno,
ground anchors should be utilized at the tail tie down point.
NOTE
Ensure that the nose will be held off the ground under all
conditions by means of suitable stands or suppofts under
weight supporting bulkheads near the nose of the airplane.
LEVELING
Longitudinal leveling of the airplane is accomplished by placing a

level on leveling screws located on the left side of the tailcone.
Deflate the nose tire and/or lower or raise the nose strut to properly
center the bubble in the level. Corresponding points on both upper
door sills may be used to level the airplane laterally.
Nov 15/00 8-111

SECTION 8 CESSNA
FLYABLE STORAGE
Airplanes placed in non operational storage for a maximum of 30

days or those which receive only intermittent operational use for the
first 25 hours are considered in flyable storage status. Every
seventh day during these periods, lhe propeller should be rotated by
hand through five revolutions. This action "limbers" the oil and
helps prevent any accumulation of corrosion on engine cylinder
walls.
[ wnnrrnc
FOR MAXIMUM SAFETY, CHECK THAT THE
IGNITION SWITCH IS OFF, THE THROTTLE IS
CLOSED, THE MXTURE CONTROL IS IN THE
IDLE CUT OFF POSTION, AND THE AIRPLANE
IS SECURED BEFORE ROTATING THE
PROPELLER BY HAND. DO NOT STAND WITHIN
THE ARC OF THE PROPELLER BLADES WHILE
TURNING THE PROPELLER.
After 30 days, the airplane should be flown for 30 minutes or a

ground runup should be made just long enough to produce an oil
temperature within the lower green arc range. Excessive ground
runup should be avoided.
Engine runup also helps to eliminate excessive accumulations of

water in the fuel system and other air spaces in the engine. Keep
fuel tanks full to minimize condensation in the tanks. Keep the
battery fully charged to prevent the electrolyte from freezing in cold
weather. lf the airplane is to be stored temporarily, or indefinitely,
refer to the Maintenance Manual for proper storage procedures.
SERVICING
ln addition to the Preflight lnspection covered in Section 4 of this
handbook, complete servicing, inspection and test requirements for
your airplane are detailed in the Maintenance Manual. The
Maintenance Manual outlines all items which require attention at
specific intervals plus those items which require servicing,
inspection, and/or testing at special intervals.
8-12 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 8
Since Cessna Service Stations conduct all service, inspection,

and test procedures in accordance with applicable Maintenance
Manuals, it is recommended that you contact your Cessna Service
Station concerning these requirements and begin scheduling your
airplane for service at the recommended intervals.
Cessna Progressive Care ensures that these requirements are

accomplished at the required intervals to comply with the 100 hour
or annual inspection as previously covered.
Depending on various flight operations, your local Government

Aviation Agency may require additional seruice, inspections, or
tests. For these regulatory requirements, owners should check with
local aviation officials where the airplane is being operated.
For quick and ready reference, quantities, materials and

specifications for frequently used service items are as follows.
orL
OIL SPECIFICATION
MIL-L-6082 Aviation Grade Straight Mineral Oil: Used when the

airplane was delivered from the factory and should be used to
replenish the supply during the first 25 hours. This oil should be
drained and filter replaced after the first 25 hours of operation. Refill
the engine and continue to use until a total of 50 hours has
accumulated or oil consumption has stabilized.
MIL-L-22851 Aviation Grade Ashless Dispersant Oil: Oil

conforming to Textron Lycoming Seruice lnstruction No. 1014, and
all revisions and supplements thereto, must be used after first 50
hours or when oil consumption has stabilized.
Nov 15/00 8-131

SECTION 8 CESSNA
HANDLING. SERVICE & MAINTENANCE MODEL 182S
RECOMMENDED VISCOSITY FOR TEMPERATURE RANGE

Multiviscosity or straight grade oil may be used throughout the
year for engine lubrication. Refer to the following table for
temperatu re verses viscosity ranges.
Temperature MIL-L-082 MIL-L-22851

SAE Grade Ashless Dispersant
SAE Grade
Above 27"C (80"F) 60 60
Above 16'C (60'F) 50 40 or 50
.1'C (30"F) to 32"C (90"F) 40 40
-18"C (0'F) to 21'C (70'F) 30 30. 40 or 2OW-4O
Below -12'C (10'F) 20 30 or 20W-30
.18'C (0'F) to -32'C (sO"F) 20w-50 20W-50 or 15W-50
All Temoeratures 15W-50 or 20W-50
CAPACITY OF ENGINE SUMP
The engine has a total capacity of 9 quarts, with the oil filter
accounting for approximately one quart of that total. The engine oil
sump has a capacity of 8 quarts. The engine must not be operated
on less than 4 quarts (as measured by the dipstick). For extended
flights, the engine should be filled to capacity.
OIL AND OIL FILTER CHANGE
After the first 25 hours of operation, drain the engine oil sump
and replace the filter. Refill sump with straight mineral oil and use
until a total of 50 hours has accumulated or oil consumption has
stabilized; then change to ashless dispersant oil. Ashless dispersant
oil (and oil filter) should then be changed at time intervals set forth
by the engine manufacturer.
8-14 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 8
NOTE
During the first 25 h , a general

inspection of the ove is required.
Items which are not a preflight
inspection should be oses, metal
lines and fittings should be inspected for signs of oil and
fuel leaks, and checked for abrasions, chafing, security,
proper routing and support, and evidence of deterioration.
lnspect the intake and exhaust systems for cracks, evidence
of leakage, and security of attachment. Engine controls and
linkages should be checked for freedom of movement
through their full range, security of attachment and evidence
of wear. lnspect wiring for securty, chafing, burning,
defective insulation, loose or broken terminals, heat
deterioration, and corroded terminals. Check the alternator
belt in accordance with Maintenance Manual instructions,
and retighten if necessary. A periodic check of these items
during subsequent servicing operations is recommended.
FUEL
APPROVED FUEL GRADES (AND COLORS)
100LL Grade Aviation Fuel(Blue).

NOTE
lsopropyl alcohol or diethylene glycol monomethyl ether

(DEGME) may be added to the fuel supply in quantities not
to exceed 1% (alcohol) or 0.15% (D|EGME) of total volume.
Refer to Fuel Additives in later paragraphs for additional
information.
Nov 15/00 8-15

sEcTtoN I CESSNA
FUEL CAPACITY
I sz.o u.S. Gallons Total: 46.0 U.S. Gallons per tank.
NOTE
To ensure maximum fuel capacity when refueling and

minimize cross feeding, the fuel selector
placed in either the LEFT or RIGHT
airplane parked in a wings level, norma
Refer to Figure 1-1 for a definition of norma
Service the fuel system after each flight, and keep fuel tanks
fullto minimize condensation in the tanks.
FUEL ADDITIVES
Strict adherence to recommended preflight draining instructions

as called for in Section 4 will eliminate any free water
accumulations from the tank sumps. While small amounts of water
may still remain in solution in the gasoline, it will normally be
consumed and go unnoticed in the operation of the engine.
and freeze in sufficient quantities to induce partial icing of the

engine fuel system.
While these conditions are quite rare and will not normally pose a
problem to owners and operators, they do exist in cedain areas of
the world and consequently must be dealt with, when encountered.
Therefore, to help alleviate the possibility of fuel icing occurring

under these unusual conditions, it is permissible to add isopropyl
alcohol or diethylene glycol monomethyl ether (D|EGME) compound
to the fuel supply.
8-1 6 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 8
The introduction of alcohol or DiEGME compound into the fuel

provides two distinct effects: (1) it absorbs the dissolved water from
the gasoline and (2) alcohol has a freezing temperature depressant
effect.
NOTE
When using fuel additives, it must be remembered that the

final goal is to obtain a correct fuello-additive ratio in the
tank, and not just with fuel coming out of the refueling
nozzle. For example, adding 15 gallons of correctly
proportioned fuel to a tank which contains 20 gallons of
untreated fuel will result in a lower-than-acceptable
concentration level to the 35 gallons of fuel which now
reside in the tank.
Alcohol, if used, is to be blended with the fuel in a concentration

of 1o/" by volume. Concentrations greater than 1o/o are not
recommended since they can be detrimentalto fueltank materials.
The manner in which the alcohol is added to the fuel is

it is completely
significant because alcohol is most effective when
dissolved in the fuel. To ensure proper mixing, the following is
recommended:
1. For best results, the alcohol should be added during the

fueling operation by pouring the alcohol directly on the
fuel stream issuing from the fueling nozzle.
2. An alternate method that may be used is to premix the

complete alcohol dosage with some fuel in a separate
clean container (approximately 2-3 gallon capacity) and
then transferring this mixture to the tank prior to the fuel
operation.
Nov 15/00 8-17

SECTION 8 CESSNA
50
ul
t-
o
?o
lL
o
ct)
tIl
9go
f
o
o
5
d20
10 20 30 40
GALLONS OF GASOLINE
Figure 8-1. Fuel Mixing Ratio
l.- ,, Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 8
Diethylene glycol monomethyl ether (D|EGME) compound must

be carefully mixed with the fuel in concentrations between O.1O%
(minimum) and 0.15% (maximum) of total fuel volume. Refer to
Figure 8-1 for a D|EGME-to-fuel mixing chart.
[,wnnnrnc
ANTI.ICING ADDITIVE IS
DANGEROUS TO
HEALTH WHEN BREATHED AND/OR ABSORBED
INTO THE SKIN.
[ cnunon
MIXING OF DEGME WITH FUEL IS EXTREMELY I
MPORTANT. A CONCENTRATION IN EXCESS OF
THAT RECOMMENDED (0.15% BY VOLUME
MAXTMUM) MAy RESULT rN DETRTMENTAL
EFFECTS TO THE FUEL TANK AND SEALANT,
AND DAMAGE TO O.RINGS AND SEALS USED
IN THE FUEL SYSTEM AND ENGINE
COMPONENTS. A CONCENTRATION OF LESS
THAN THAT RECOMMENDED (0.10% By TOTAL
voLUME M|N|MUM) W|LL RESULT tN
INEFFECTIVE TREATMENT. USE ONLY
BLENDING EOUIPMENT THAT IS
RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER TO
OBTAIN PROPER PROPORTIONING.
Prolonged storage of the airplane will result in a water buildup in

the fuel which "leeches out" the additive. An indication of this is
when an excessive amount of water accumulates in the fuel tank
sumps. The concentration can be checked using a differential
refractometer. lt is imperative that the technical manual for the
differential refractometer be followed explicitly when checking the
additive concentration.
Nov 15/00 8-19

SECTION 8 CESSNA
FUEL CONTAMINATION
Fuel contamination is usually the result of foreign material

present in the fuel system, and may consist of water, rust, sand, dirt,
microbes or bacterial growth. ln addition, additives that are not
compatible with fuel or fuel system components can cause the fuel
to become contaminated.
Before each flight and after each refueling, use a clear sampler
-cup and drain at least a cupful ofquick
fuel from each fuel tank drain
drain valve to determine if
Itoiation and from the fuel stiainer
lcontaminants are present, and to ensure the airplane has been
fueled with the proper grade of fuel.
I el drain points again,

I then gentlY rock the
move any additional
epeated samples from
all fuel drain points until all contamination has been removed. lf,
after repeated sampling, evidence of contamination still exists, the
airplane should not be flown. Tanks should be drained and system
purged by qualified maintenance personnel. All evidence of
contamination must be removed before further flight. lf the airplane
has been seruiced with the improper fuel grade, defuel completely
and refuel with the correct grade. Do not fly the airplane with
contaminated or unapproved fuel.
ln addition, Owners/Operators who are not acquainted with a

particular fixed base operator should be assured that the fuel supply
has been checked for contamination and is properly filtered before
allowing the airplane to be serviced. Fuel tanks should be kept full
between flights, provided weight and balance considerations will
permit, to reduce the possibility of water condensing on the walls of
partially f illed tanks.
To further reduce the possibility of contaminated fuel, routine

maintenance of the fuel system should be performed in accordance
with the airplane Maintenance Manual. Only the proper fuel, as
recommended in this handbook, should be used, and fuel additives
should not be used unless approved by Cessna and the Federal
Aviation Administration.
8-20 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 8
LANDING GEAR
Consult the following table for servicing information on the
landing gear.
COMPONENT SERVICING CRITERIA

Nose Wheel (5.00-5, 6-Ply Rated Tire) 49.0 PSI
Main Wheel (6.00-6, 6-Ply Raled Tire) 42.0 PSI
Brakes MIL-H-5606
Nose Gear Shock Strut MIL-H-5606;55.0-60.0 PSI .
* Keep strut filled with MIL-H-5606 hydraulic fluid per
filling instructions placard, and with no load on the
strut, inflate with air to 55.0-60.0 PSl. Do not over
inflate.
CLEANING AND CARE

WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS
The plastic windshield and windows should be cleaned with an

aircraft windshield cleaner. Apply the cleaner sparingly with soft
cloths, and rub with moderate pressure until all dirt, oil scum and
bug stains are removed. Allow the cleaner to dry, then wipe it off
with soft flannel cloths.
[, cnunon
NEVER USE GASOLINE, BENZENE, ALCOHOL,
ACETONE, FIRE EXTINGUISHER, ANTI.ICE FLUID,
LACOUER THINNER OR GLASS CLEANER TO CLEAN
THE PLASTIC. THESE MATERIALS WILL ATTACK THE
PLASTIC AND MAY CAUSE IT TO CRAZE.
lf a windshield cleaner is not available, the plastic can be

cleaned with sott cloths moistened with Stoddard solvent to remove
oiland grease.
Nov 15/00 8-21 I

SECTION 8 CESSNA
wax, polshed out by hand with clean soft flannel cloths, will fill in
minor scratches and help prevent further scratching.
Do not use a canvas cover on the windshield unless freezing rain

or sleet is anticipated since the cover may scratch the plastic
sudace.
PAINTED SURFACES
The painted exterior surfaces of your new Cessna have a

durable, long lasting finish.
Generally, the painted surfaces can be kept bright by washing

with water and mild soap, followed by a rinse with water and drying
with cloths or a chamois. Harsh or abrasive soaps or detergents
which cause corrosion or scratches should never be used. Remove
assure adequate protection. Special care should be taken to seal

around rivet heads and skin laps, which are the areas most
n the leading
and propeller
these areas.
cleaning with
soap solution or after chemical deicing operations.
8-22 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 8
When the airplane is parked outside in cold climates and it is

necessary to remove ice before flight, care should be taken to
protect the painted surfaces during ice removal with chemical
liquids. lsopropyl alcohol will satisfactorily remove ice accumulations
without damaging the paint. However, keep the isopropyl alcohol
away from the windshield and cabin windows since it will attack the
plastic and may cause it to craze.
PROPELLER CARE
Preflight inspection of propeller blades for nicks, and wiping them

occasionally with an oily cloth to clean off grass and bug stains will
assure long blade life. Small nicks on the propeller, particularly near
the tips and on the leading edges, should be dressed out as soon
as possible since these nicks produce stress concentrations, and if
ignored, may result in cracks or failure of the propeller blade. Never
use an alkaline cleaner on the blades; remove grease and dirt with
Stoddard solvent.
ENGINE CARE
The engine may be cleaned, using a suitable solvent, in

accordance with instructions in the airplane Maintenance Manual.
Most efficient cleaning is done using a spray type cleaner. Before
spray cleaning, ensure that protection is afforded for components
which might
Model 1825,
lubrication of
induction air fi
Nov 15/00 8-23

SECTION 8 CESSNA
INTERIOR CARE
To remove dust and loose dift from the upholstery and carpet,
clean the interior regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
Blot up any spilled liquid promptly with cleansing tissue or rags.

Don't pat the spot; press the blotting material firmly and hold it for
several seconds. Continue blotting until no more liquid is taken up.
Scrape off sticky materials with a dull knife, then spot clean the
area.
Oily spots may be cleaned with household spot removers, Lsed

sparingly. Before using any solvent, read the instructions on the
container and test it on an obscure place on the fabric to be
cleaned. Never saturate the fabric with a volatile solvent; it may
damage the padding and backing materials.
Soiled upholstery and carpet may be cleaned with foam type

detergent, used according to the manufacturer's instructions. To
minimize wetting the fabric, keep the foam as dry as possible and
remove it with a vacuum cleaner.
For complete information related to interior cleaning, refer to

lChapter 12'of the Model 182S, Series 1996 and On, Maintenance
rManual.
8-24 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 9
MODEL 182S SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENTS
INTRODUCTION
The supplements in this section contain expanded operational
procedures for both standard and optional equipment installed in the
airplane. Operators should refer to each supplement to ensure that
all limitations and procedures appropriate for their airplane are
observed.
A Log Of Approved Supplements is provided beginning on page

Log 1 and lists all supplements applicable to this airplane by name,
number and revision level. This log should be used as a checklist to
ensure all applicable supplements have been placed in the Pilot's
Operating Handbook (POH). Supplements may be removed from the
POH provided the equipment is not installed on the airplane. lf
equipment is installed on the airplane, however, the supplement(s)
must be retained and updated as revisions to each supplement is
issued.
Each individual supplement contains its own Log of Effective

Pages. This log lists the page number and effective date of every
page in the supplement. The log also lists the dates on which
revisions to the supplement occurred. Additionally, the part number
of the supplement provides information on the revision level. Refer
to the following example:
l82SPHUS-S1.04
Nov 15/00 9-1/(9-2 blank)

CESSNA SECTION 9
MODEL 182S SUPPLEMENTS
LOG OF APPROVED SUPPLEMENTS

NOTE
IT IS THE AIRPLANE OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO ASSURE THAT HE
OR SHE HAS THE LATEST REVISION TO EACH SUPPLEMENT OF A
PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK AND THE LATEST ISSUED 'LOG OF
APPROVED SUPPLEMENTS." THIS 'LOG OF APPROVED
SUPPLEMENTS" WAS THE LATEST REVISION AS OF THE DATE IT WAS
SHIPPED BY CESSNA; HOWEVER, SOME CHANGES MAY HAVE
OCCURRED AND THE OWNER SHOULD VERIFY THIS IS THE LATEST,
MOST UP-TO.DATE VERSION BY CONTACTING CESSNA CUSTOMER
suPPoRT AT (316) 517-5800.
SUPP. SUPPLEMENT NAME REV EOUIPMENT

# LEVEL INSTALLED
1 Bendix/King KX 1554 VHF 2
NAV/COMM with Kl 208 or Kl209A
lndicator Head
2 Bendix/King KT 76C Transponder
with Blind Encoder
3 Bendix/King KMA 26 Audio Selector
Panel
Pointer Model 3000-11 Emergency
Locator Transmitter (ELT)
Bendix/King KLN 898 Global
Positioning System (GPS)
6 Bendix/King KR 87 Automatic
Direction Finder (ADF)
7 Bendix/King KAP 140 Autopilot 2
I Winterization Kit 1
I Davtron Model 803 Clocl</OAT 1
10 Bendix/King KLN89 Global 1
Positioning System (GPS)
P/N - 182SUSLOG03
Jan 15/01 LOG 1

SECTION 9 CESSNA
SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 182S
LOG OF APPROVED SUPPLEMENTS
SUPP. SUPPLEMENTNAME REV

LEVEL
EOUIPMENT
INSTALLED
#
11 Bendix/King KAP 140 2-Axis 3
Autopilot (Aircraft Serial No.
18280001 thru 18280164)
12 Canadian Supplement 0
13 Bendix/King KCS-554 Slaved 1
Compass System with Kl-5254

Horizontal Situation lndicator
(HSl)
14 ArgentineSupplement 0
15 Bendix/King KAP 140 AutoPilot 1
(Serial No. 18280165 and on or

aircraft modified by MK182-22-01)
with altitude preselect
16 Reserued 0
17 Reserued 0
18 Reserued 0
II 19 KLN 94 GlobalPositioning system 2
LOG 2 Jan 15/01

ATdtrcn Company
Pilot's Operating Handbook and

FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual
CESSNA MODEL 182S

AIRPLANES 18280001 AND ON
SUPPLEMENT 1
BENDIX/KING KX 1554
VHF NAV/COMM
with K|208 or Kl209A INDICATOR HEAD
1) vi" a.rof GAMA

coPYB|GHT @ 1997 3 February 1997
WCHITA, KANSAS. USA Revision 2 - 15 November 2000
'182SPHUS-Sr-02
s1-1
SECTION 9 - SUPPLEMENTS CESSNA
SUPPLEMENT 1 - FAA APPROVED MODEL 182S
SUPPLEMENT 1
BENDDUKING KX 1554 VHF NAV/COMM Wth

Kl 208 or Kl 2094 INDICATOR HEAD
The following Log of Effective Pages provides the date of issue
for original and revised pages, as well as a listing of all pages in
the Supplement. Pages which are affected by the current
revsion will carry the date of that revision
Revision Level Date of lssue
0 (Original) Feb. 3, 1997

1 Dec.1,1997
2 Nov.15,2000
LOG OF EFFECTIVITY PAGES
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
Title (S1-1) Nov 15/00 S1-9 Feb 3/97

s1-2 Nov 15/00 51-10 Feb 3/97
s1-3 Nov 15/00 51-11 Dec 1197
s1-4 Feb 3197 51-12 Feb 3/97
s1-5 Feb 3197 51-13 Nov 15/00
s1-6 Feb 3/97 51-14 Feb 3/97
s1-7 Feb 3197 51-15 Feb3/97
s1-8 Nov 15/00 51-16 blank Feb 3197
SERVICE BULLETIN CONFIGURATION LIST

The following is a list of Service Bulletins that are applicable to
the operation of the airplane, and have been incorporated into
this supplement. This list contains only those Seruice Bulletins
that are currently active.
Airplane
Unit Revision lncorporated
Number Title Effectivitv lncorporation ln Airplane
s1-2 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION 9 - SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 182S SUPPLEMENT 1 - FAA APPROVED
SUPPLEMENT
BENDDUKING KX 1554 VHF NAV/COMM with I
KI 208 or KI 2O9A INDICATOR HEAD
SECTION 1
GENERAL
The Bendix/King KX 1554 VHF Nav/Comm, shown in Figure 1,1
consists of a panel-mounted receiver-transmitter and a Kl 208 or Kl
2094lndicator.
The set includes a 760-channel VHF communications receiver-

transmitter and a 20O-channel VHF navigation receiver. A 40-
channel glideslope receiver is also included if the Kl 209A
indicator is used. The communications receiver-transmitter receives
and transmits signals between 118.00 and 136.975 MHz with 25-
kHz spacing. Optional 8.33 kHz (2280 channel) Comm is available.
The navigation receiver receives VOR and localizer signals between
108.00 and 117.95 MHz in 50-kHz steps. The glide slope receiver
is automatically tuned when a localizer frequency is selected. The
circuits required to interpret the VOR and localizer signals are also
an integral part of the Nav receiver.
Large seldimming gas discharge readouts display both the

communications and navigation operating frequencies. The KX-
1554's "flip-flop" preselect feature enables you to store one
frequency in the standby display while operating on another and
then interchange them instantly with the touch of a button. Both the
active (COMM) and the standby (STBY) frequencies may be
displayed at all times and are stored in nonvolatile memory without
drain on the aircraft battery. KX 1554 has 32 programmable comm
channels, a stuck microphone aleft and transmitter shutdown,
Bearing To/From radial mode, course deviation indicator mode and
an elapsed timer mode.
Nov 15/00 s1-3

The Comm portion squelch' To

automatic
override the control knob is
pulled out. Push the the automatic
squelch. A "T" will b and "R" during
valid signal reception.
The Nav portion uses the pull out feature of the Nav volume
control to receive the Nav signal ldent. Pull the volume control
knob out to hear the ldent signal plus voice. Push the knob in to
attenuate the ldent signal and still hear Nav voice.
All controls for the Nav/Comm, except those for navigation

course selection, are mounted on the front panel of the receiver-
transmitter. Control lighting is provided by NAV/COMM interior
lighting and the instrument panel flood lighting system. Operation
ad dscription of the audio selector panel used in conjunction with
this radio is shown and described in Supplement 3 in this section.
NOTE
The unit has a stuck microphone aled feature. lf the

microphone is keyed continuously for greater than
33 seconds, the transmitter stops transmitting and
the active Comm frequency flashes to alert the pilot
of the stuck mic condition.
s1-4 Feb 3197

2s
l.1t,^ lf.00 I t1.bD f9:5h
13 't2 rT 10 9
KX 155A VHF NAV/COMM
C ro tNDrcArtoN
Q rnou rNDrcATtoN
@r-lie tNDtcAnoN
ro\
1
!'.?
KI2O9A INDICATOR
0585C1 045
18 KI 2OS INDICATOR HEAD 0585C1046
0585C1047
Figure 1. Bendix/King KX 1554 VHF NAV/COMM with Kt 208 or
Kl 2094 lndicator Head (Sheet 1 of 7)
Feb 3/97 s1-5

SECTIONg-SUPPLEMENTS CESSNA
SUPPLEMENT 1 - FAAAPPROVED MODEL 1825
NAV FUNCTION DISPLAYS
ID9.ED Df
--t- -- -- --
VOR MODE: ACTIVVBEARING, CDI FORMAT
tug ED E nl]
FLHE
VOR MODE: ACTIVE/BEARING, FI-AG DISPLAY
tng.Eu DlD'o
VOR MODE: ACTIVE "BEARING TO" FUNCTION DISPLAY
TO
ID9.ED
VOR MODE: ACTIVE/BEARING. FLAG DISPLAY
I lD.9t
- -t- --
LDr
LOCALIZER MODE: FREQUENCY/CDI FORMAT
Figure 1. Bendix/King KX 1554 VHF NAV/COMM with Kl 208 or

Kl209A lndicator Head (Sheel2olT\
s1-6 Feb 3/97

1. OPERATING COMM FREQUENCY DISPLAY Displays

COMM ACTIVE and COMM STANDBY frequencies with a "T"
between them to indicate TRANSMIT and an "R" to indicate
RECEIVE modes of operation.
2. OPERATING NAV FREQUENCY DISPLAY -- The right

poftion of the display is allocated to NAV receiver ACTIVE and
STANDBY information. The frequency channeling is similar to
the COMM when operating in the frequency mode. The NAV
ACTIVE and STANDBY frequencies are stored in the memory
on power down and return on power up.
3. NAV STANDBY/OBS/Bearing/Radialimer Display -- The right

side of the NAV display is controlled by the MODE
SELECTOR BUTTON (see #7 below). With an active VOR
frequency, this portion of the display shows the SANDBY
frequency, OBS setting for the internal CDl, the bearing to the
VOR station, radial from the VOR station, or a count-up/count-
down timer. With an active localizer frequency, this portion of
the display shows the standby frequency, the letters "LOC", or
count-up/count-down timer.
4. NAV FREQUENCY SELECTOR KNOB (SMALL) -- Operates

in 50 kHz steps. The NAV receiver's lower and upper
frequency limits are 108.00 MHz and 117.95 MHz. Exceeding
the upper limit of frequency band will automatically return to
the lower limit and vice versa. A clockwise rotation will
increase (inc) the previous frequency while a counterclockwise
rotation will decrease (dec) the previous frequency.
5. NAV FREQUENCY SELECTOR KNOB (LARGE) -- Operates

in 1 MHz steps. The frequency inc/dec operates the
STANDBY frequency display. A clockwise rotation will
increase the previous frequency while a counterclockwise
rotation will decrease the previous frequency. Exceeding the
upper limit of the frequency band will automatically return to
the lower limit and vice versa.
Figure 1. BendilKing KX 155A VHF NAV/COMM with Kl 208 or Kl

2094 lndicator Head (Sheet 3 of 7)
Feb 3197 s1-7

6. NAV/FREQUENCY TRANSFER BUTTON (e ) --
NAV frequency transfer button is pushed.
7. MODE SELECTOR BUTTON -- Depressing the mode button

will cause the NAV display to go from the ACTIVE/STANDBY
format to the ACTIVE/CDI (Course Deviation lndicator) format.
ln the CDI mode, the frequency inc/dec knob (pushed in)
display is independent of any OBS course selected on an

external CDl. An "OBS" in the middle of the NAV display will
flash while the inner NAV frequency knob is pulled out. The
CDI is displayed on the line below the frequency/OBS. When
the ACTIVE window is tuned to a localizer frequency, the
standby frequency area is replaced by "LOC". When the
received signal is too weak to ensure accuracy the display will
"FLAG",
Depressing the mode button again will cause the NAV display
to go from the ACTIVE/CDI format to the ACTIVE/BEARING
format. ln the BEARING mode, the frequency inc/dec knob
channels the ACTIVE frequency window. Depressing the
VOR signal is received the display flags (dashes).
Figure 1. Bendix/King KX 1554 VHF NAV/COMM with Kl 208 or Kl

2094 lndicator Head (Sheet 4 o17)
s1-8 Nov 15/00

Another push of the mode buon will cause the NAV display
to go from the ACTIVE/BEARING format to the
ACTIVE/RADIAL format. ln the RADIAL mode, the frequency
inc/dec knobs channel the ACTIVE frequency window and
depressing the frequency transfer button will cause the
ACTIVE frequency to be placed in blind storage and the
STANDBY frequency (in blind storage) to be displayed in the
ACTIVE window display. ln radial mode of operation, the right
hand window of NAV display shows the radial FROM the
station. When a too weak or invalid VOR signal is received
the display flags (dashes).
Another push of the mode button will cause the unit to go into
the TIMER mode. When the unit is turned on, the elapsed
timer (ET) begins counting upwards from zero. The timer can
be stopped and reset lo zero by pushing the NAV frequency
lransfer button for 2 seconds or more causing the ET on the
display to flash. ln this state, the timer can be set as a
countdown timer or the elapsed timer can be restarted. The
countdown timer is set by using the NAV frequency inc/dec
knobs to set the desired time and then pushing the NAV
frequency transfer button to start the timer. The large knob
selects minutes, the small knob in the "in" position selects 10
second intervals, and the small knob in the "oLrt" position
selects individual seconds. After the countdown timer reaches
zero, the counter will begin to count upwards indefinitely while
flashing for the first 15 seconds. When the elapsed timer is
reset to zero it may be restarted again by momentarily
pushing the NAV frequency transfer button.
8. NAV /OLUME CONTROL (PULL IDENT) -- Adjusts volume of

navigation receiver audio. When the knob is pulled out, the
ldent signal plus voice may be heard. The volume of
voice/ident can be adjusted by turning this knob.
Figure 1. Bendix/King KX 1554 VHF NAV/COMM with K|208 or Kl

209A lndicator Head (Sheet 5 of 7)
Feb 3/97 s1-9

SUPPLEMENT 1 - FAAAPPROVED MODEL 182S
9. COMM FREQUENCY SELECTOR KNOB (INNER) -- This

smaller knob is designed to change the indicated frequency in
steps of 50-kHz when it is pushed in, and in 25-kHz steps
when it is pulled out. For 8.33 kHz versions, channels are
incremented in 25 kHz steps with the knob pushed in and
8.33 kHz with the knob pulled out.
10. COMM FREQUENCY SELECTOR KNOB (OUTER) -- The

outer, larger selector knob is used to change the MHz portion
of the frequency display. At either band-edge of the 118-136
MHz frequency spectrum, an offscale rotation will wrap the
display around to the other frequency band-edge (i.e., 136
MHz advances to 118 MHz).
11. CHANNEL BUTTON -- Pressing the CHAN button lor 2 or

more seconds will cause the unit to enter the channel program
(PG) mode. Upon entering the channel program mode, the
channel number will flash indicating that it can be
programmed. The desired channel can be selected by turning
the comm kHz knob. The channel frequency can be entered
by pushing the comm transfer button which will cause the
standby frequency to flash. The comm frequency knobs are
then used to enter the desired frequency. lf dashes (located
between 136 MHz and 118 MHz) are entered instead of a
frequency, the corresponding channel is skipped in channel
selection mode. Additional channels may be programmed by
pressing the COMM transfer button and using the same
procedure. The channel information is saved by pushing the
CHAN button which will also cause the unit to return to the
previous frequency entry mode.
The channel selection mode (CH) can then be entered by

momentarily pushing the CHAN button. The comm frequency
knobs can be used to select the desired channel. The unit will
automatically default to the previous mode if no channel is
selected within 2 seconds after entering the channel selection
mode. The unit is placed in the transmit mode by depressing
a mic button.
Figure 1. Bendix/King KX 155A VHF NAV/COMM with Kl 208 or Kl

209A lndicator Head (Sheet 6 of 7)
s1-10 Feb 3197

12. COMM FREQUENCY TRANSFER BUTTON (<+ ) -l

lnterchanges the frequencies in the USE and STANDBY'
displays. To tune the radio to the desired operating frequency,
the desired frequency must be entered into the standby
display and then the transfer button must be pushed. This will
trade the contents of the active and standby displays. The
operating frequency can also be entered by accessing the
ACTIVE ENTRY (direct tune) mode which is done by pushing
the COMM TRANSFER button for 2 or more seconds. ln the
direct tune mode, only the active part of the display is visible.
The desired frequency can be directly entered into the display.
Push the COMM TRANSFER button again to return to the
active/standby display.
The transceiver is always tuned to the frequency appearing in
the ACTIVE display. lt
is, therefore, possible to have two
different frequencies stored in the ACTIVE and STANDBY
displays and to change back and forth between them at the
simple push of the transfer button.
13. COMM VOLUME CONTROL (OFF/PULUTEST) -- Rotate the

VOL knob clockwise from the OFF position. Pull the VOL knob
out and adjust for desired listening level. Push the VOL knob
back in to actuate the automatic squelch. The VOL knob may
also be pulled out to hear particularly weak signals.
14. VOF/Localizer Needle or CDI needle.
15. Glideslope Flag
16. TO-FROM-NAV FLAG
17. Azimuth Card
18. OBS Knob
19. Glideslope Needle
Figure 1. Bendix/King KX 1554 VHF NAV/COMM with Kl 208 or Kl

2094 lndicator Head (Sheet 7 of 7)
Dec 1197 s1-11

sEcTloN 2
LIMITATIONS
There is no change to the airplane limitations when this avionic
equipment is installed.
sEcfloN 3
There is no change to the airplane emergency procedures when
this avionic equipment is installed. However, if the frequency
readouts fail, the radio will remain operational on the last frequency
selected. lf either frequency transfer button is pressed and held
while power is applied to the unit, the unit wakes up with 120.00
MHz in the COMM use frequency and 110.00 MHz in the NAV
active frequency, with both COMM and NAV in the active entry
mode. This will aid the pilot in blind tuning the radio.
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
COMMUN ICATION RECEIVER-TRANSM ITTER O PERATION :
1. OFF/PULIJTEST Volume Control -- Turn clockwise; pull out

and adjust to desired audio level; push control back in to
activate the automatic squelch.
2. MIC Selector Switch (on audio control panel) -- SET to COMM
1.
3. SPEAKER Selector (on audio control panel) -- SET to desired
mode.
4. COMM Frequency Selector Knobs -- Select desired operating
frequency.
5. COMM Transfer Button PRESS to transfer desired
frequency from the STBY display into the COMM display.
s1-12 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 9 - SUPPLEMENTS,
6. Mic Button:
a. To transmit -- Press button and speak in microphone.
NOTE
During COMM transmission, a lighted uTu will appear

between the "COMM" and "STBY" displays to indicate that
the transceiver is operating in the transmit mode. I
b. To Receive - RELEASE mike button.
NAVIGATION RECEIVER OPERATION:
1. NAV Frequency Selector Knobs -- SELECT desired operating

frequency in "STBY" display.
2. NAV TRANSFER BUTTON -- PRESS to transfer desired
frequency from the "STBY" display into the "NAV" display.
3. Speaker Selector (on audio control panel) -- SET to desired
mode..
4. NAV Volume Control --
a. ADJUST to desired audio level.
b. PULL out to identify station.
VOR OPERATION:
Channel the NAV Receiver to the desred VOR and monitor the
audio to positively identify the station. To select an OBS course,
turn the OBS knob to set the desired course under the lubber line,
When a signal is received, the NAV flag will pull out of view and
show a "TO" or "FROM" flag as appropriate for the selected
course.
LOC OPERATION
Localizer circuitry is energized when the NAV Receiver is

channeled to an ILS frequency. Monitor the LOC audio and
positively identify the station. The NAV flag will be out of view when
the signal is of sufficient strength to be usable.
Nov 15/00 s1-13

GLIDESLOPE OPERATION
The glideslope receiver is automatically channeled when a

localizer frequency is selected. A separate warning flag is provided
to indicate usable signal conditions.
PILOT CONFIGURATION
This mode can be accessed by pressing and holding the NAV

Mode Button for more than 2 seconds and then pressing the Nav
Frequency Transfer Button for an additional 2 seconds, while
continuing to hold the NAV Mode Button. When the Pilot Config
Mode s entered the unit will show the "SWRV" mnemonic which is
the unit software revision level. Adjustment pages can be accessed
by MODE button presses.
The pilot may adjust two parameters in the pilot configuration, the
display minimum brightness and sidetone volume level. Minimum
Brightness (BRIM) will have a range of 0-255. The dimmest is 0
and the brightest is 255. Sidetone volume level is adjusted when
SIDE is displayed. Values from 0-255 may be selected with 0 being
least volume, 255 being the greatest.
Adjustment Mnemonic Min Level Max Level
Software Revision Number SWRV
Minimum Display Brightness BRIM 0 255
Sidetone Level SIDE 0 255
s1-14 Feb 3/97

CESSNA SECTION 9. SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 182S SUPPLEMENT 1 - FAAAPPROVED
Subsequent presses of the MODE button sequences through

SWRV, BRIM, SIDE, and then back to SWRV.
Pressing the NAV Transfer Button momentarily exits Pilot

configuration mode. The NAV returns to its pre-Pilot Gonfig state
with the new brightness and sidetone levels stored in nonvolatile
memory.
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
There is no change to the airplane performance when this
avionic equipment is installed. However, the installation of an
externally mounted antenna, or several related antennas, will result
in a minor reduction in cruise oerformance.
Feb 3/97 51-1si(S1-16 Blank)

ATodron Compryr

CESSNA MODEL 1825

SUPPLEMENT 2
BENDIVKING KT 76C
TRANSPONDER WITH BLIND ENCODER
1 Ja"-a.rof GAMA
copy.rcHr @ 1ee7 3 Fgbru ary 1997

wrcHrrA,KANsAs,usA Revision 1 - 15 November 2000
s2-1
SUPPLEMENT 2
BENDIVKING KT 76C TRANSPONDER with BLIND
ENCODER
revision will carry the date of that revision
0(Original) Feb.3, 1997

1 Nov. 15,2000
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
Title (S2-1) Nov 15/00 s2-6 Nov 15/00

s2-2 Nov 15/00 s2-7 Nov 15/00
s2-3 Nov 15/00 s2-8 Feb 3/97
s2-4 Feb 3/97 s2-9 Feb 3/97
s2-5 Feb 3/97 52-10 blank Feb 3197

this supplement. This list contains only those Service Bulletins
Airplane
Number Title Effectivitv lncorporation In Airplane
s2-2 Nov 15/00

SUPPLEMENT
BENDIVKING KT 76C TRANPONDER
With BLIND ENCODER
sEcfloN 1
GENERAL
The Bendix/King Transponder (Type KT 76C), shown in Figurel
1, is the airborne component of an Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon
System (ATCRBS). The transponder enables the ATC ground
controller to "see" and identify more readily the aircraft on the
radarscope. The blind encoder (SSD120-20) enables the
transponder to automatically report aircraft altitude to ATC.
The Bendix/King Transponder system consists of a panel-

mounted unit and an externally-mounted antenna. The transponder
receives interrogating pulse signals on 1030 MHz and transmits
coded pulse-train reply signals on 1090 MHz. lt is capable of
replying to Mode A (aircraft identification) and also to Mode C
(altitude reporting) interrogations on a selective reply basis on any
of 4096 information code selections. A sidewall-mounted SSD120-
20 Blind Encoder is included in the avionic configuration, the
transponder can provide altitude reporting in 1OO-foot increments
between -1000 and +20,000 feet.
The KT 76C features microprocessor and LSI (Large Scale

control. Mode and code selection are pedormed using
lntegrated)
the rotary knob and numeric buttons and all functions including the
flight level altitude are presented on a gas discharge display. All
display segments are automatically dimmed by a photocell type
sensor.
Nov 15/00 s2-3

A VFR programming sequence, described in Section 4, allows

the pilot to preprogram any single code such as "1200" into the KT
76C. Pressing the VFR button instantly returns the KT 76C to the
preprogrammed code without having to manually enter "1200".
All Bendix/King Transponder operating controls are located on

the front panel of the unit. Functions of the operating controls are
described in Figure 1.
s2-4 Feb 3/97

1. IDENT BUTTON (lDT) - When depressed, selects special

identifier pulse to be transmitted with transponder reply to
effect immediate identification of the airplane on the ground
controller's display. ('R" will illuminate steadily for
approximately 18 seconds. Button illumination is controlled by
the avionic light dimming rheostat.
2. ALTITUDE DISPLAY - Displays the pressure altitude on the

left side of the display. The display is in hundreds of feet.
"FL" is annunciated to indicate Flight Level altitude. Flight
Level is a term to indicate that the altitude is not true altitude,
but barometric altitude which is not corrected for local
pressure. For Example, "FL-040" corresponds to an altitude
of 4000 feet, meaning sea level pressure of 29.92 inches of
mercury.
The Flight Level altitude is only displayed when the altitude

repofting is enabled, i.e. in Altitude mode. lf an invalid code
from the altimeter is detected dashes will appear in the
altitude window. Altitude reporting is disabled if the altitude
window is blank or has dashes.
Figure 1. Bendix/King KT 76C Transponder with Blind Encoder

(Sheet 1 ol 2)
Feb 3197 s2-5

SECTION 9. SUPPLEMENTS CESSNA
3. MODE ANNUNCIATORS - Displays the operating mode of the

transponder.
4. REPLY INDICATOR (R) - 'R' is illuminated momentarily when

the transponder is replying to a valid interrogation and during
the 18 +2 seconds following the initiation of an ldent.
5. MODE SELECTOR KNOB - Controls application of power and

selects transponder operatng mode as follows:
OFF - Turns set off.
SBY - Turns set on for standby power and code selection.

"SBY" is annunciated.
TST - Self-test function. The transmitter is disabled. All

display segments will illuminate.
ON - Turns set on and enables transponder to transmit

Mode A (aircraft identification) reply pulses. ON is
annunciated.
ALT - Turns set on and enables transponder to transmit

either Mode A (aircraft identification) reply pulses and
Mode C (altitude reporting) pulses selected
automatically by the interrogating signal. ALT is
annunciated.
6. VFR CODE BUTTON (VFR) - Pressing the VFR Button will

cause a pre-programmed Mode A reply code to supersede
whatever Mode A reply code was previously in use. Button
illumination is controlled by the RADIO LT dimming rheostat
7. CLEAR BUTTON (CLR) -- Pressing the CLR button will delete

the last Mode A code digit entered.
8. NUMERIC KEYS 0-7 - Selects assigned Mode A reply code.

The new code will be transmitted after a S-second delay.
Figure 1. Bendix/King KT 76C Transponder with Blind Encoder

(Sheet 2 ol2)
s2-6 Nov 15/00

SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
SECTION 3
TO TRANSMIT AN EMERGENCY SIGNAL:
1. Mode Selector Knob -- ALT.

2. Numeric Keys 0-7 -- SELECT 7700 operating code.
TO TRANSMIT A SIGNAL REPRESENTING LOSS OF ALL
CoMMUNTCAT|ONS (WHEN tN A CONTROLLED
ENVTRONMENT):

2. Numeric Keys 0-7 -- SELECT 7600 operating code.
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
BEFORE TAKEOFF:
1. Mode Selector Knob -- SBY.
TO TRANSMTT MODE A (ATRCRAFT tDENT|FICATION) CODES tN

FLIGHT:
1. Numeric Keys 0-7 -- SELECT assigned code..
Nov 15/00 s2-7

2. Mode Selector Knob -- ON.

NOTES
. During normal operation with Mode Selector Knob

in ON position, reply indicator flashes, indicating
transponder replies to interrogations.
. Mode A reply codes are transmitted in ALT also;
however, Mode C codes are suppressed when the
Mode Selector Knob is positioned to ON.
3. IDT Button -- DEPRESS momentarily when instructed by

ground controller to "squawk IDENT" ("R" will illuminate
steadily indicating IDENT operation).
TO TRANSMTT MODE C (ALTTTUDE REPORTTNG) CODES lN

FLIGHT:
1. Transponder Code Selector Knob -- SELECT assigned code.

NOTES
When directed by ground controller to "stop

altitude squawk", turn Mode Selector Knob to ON
for Mode A operation only.
Altitude transmitted by the transponder for altitude

squawk and displayed on the KT 76C panel is
pressure altitude (referenced to 29.92') and
conversion to indicated altitude is done in the
ATC computers.
TO SELF-TEST TRANSPONDER OPERATION :
1. Mode Selector Knob -- TST Check all displays.

2. Mode Selector Knob -- SELECT desired function.
s2-8 Feb 3/97

TO PROGRAM VFR CODE:
1. Mode Selector Knob -- SBY.

2. Numeric Keys 0-7 -- SELECT desired VFR code.
3. IDT Button -- PRESS AND HOLD.
a. VFR Code Button -- PRESS (while still holding IDT button)
to place new VFR code in nonvolatile memory for
subsequent call up.
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
externally-mounted antenna, or related external antennas, will result
in a minor reduction in cruise performance.
Feb 3/97 S2-9(S2-10 Blank)

AT6)dron Compary

CESSNA MODEL 182S

SUPPLEMENT 3
BENDIX/KING KMA 26
AUDIO SELECTOR PANEL
1 u" ",ofGAMA
copy.,cHr@jee7 3 February 1997

wrcurn,xr.ss,usn
Revision 1 - 15 November 2000
182sPHUs-s3-01 S3-1
SUPPLEMENT 3
BENDI)UKING KMA 26 AUDIO SELECTOR PANEL
0(Original) Feb 3, 1997

1 Nov.15,2000
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
Title (S3-1) Nov 15/00 S3-s Feb 3197

S3-2 Nov 15/00 53-6 Feb 3197
S3-3 Feb 3/97 S3-7 Nov 15/00
S3-4 Feb 3/97 S3-8 Feb 3/97

Airplane
s3-2 Nov 15/00

MODEL 182S SUPPLEMENT 3. FAA APPBOVED
SUPPLEMENT
BENDIVKING KMA 26 AUDIO SELECTOR PANEL
SECTION 1
GENERAL
The Bendix/King KMA 26 Audio Selector Panel is a combination
audio amplifier, an audio distribution panel intercom, and a marker
beacon receiver. The audio amplifier is for amplification of the
audio signals for the speaker system. All receiver audio distrbution
functions are controlled by two rows of pushbuttons. A rotary
selector swilch on the right side of the console connects the
microphone to either EMG, Com 1, Com 2, Com 3 or PA (Unused
position). All operating controls are shown and described in Figure
1.
A crystal-controlled superheterodyne marker beacon receiver

with 3-light presentation is incorporated within the unit. Dimming
circuitry for the marker lamps automatically adjusts brightness
appropriate to the cockpit ambient light level. Hi and Lo sensitivity
and lamp test functions are also provided.
Light dimming for the audo control panel is manually controlled

by the RADIO light rheostat knob,
MARKER FACILITIES
MARKER IDENTIFYING TONE LIGHT*
lnner, Continuous 6 dots/sec (3000 Hz) White
Airway &
Fan
Middle Alternate dots and dashes (1300 Hz) Amber
Outer 2 dashes/sec (4OO Hz) Blue
*When the identifying tone is keyed,
the
respective indicating light will blink
accordingly.
Feb 3/97 s3-3

1. MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATOR LIGHTS -- The three-light marker

beacon receiver built into the KMA 26 gives a visual and aural signal
when the ship's antenna passes over 75 MHz beacon. The bue,
amber, and white lights on the faceplate, as well as the audio tones,
identify the beacon gpe.
INNER, AIRWAY and FAN -- Light illuminates white to indicate passage

of ILS inner, airway or fan marker beacons.
OUTER -- Light illuminates blue to indicate passage of outer marker

oeacon.
MIDDLE -- Light illuminates amber to indicate passage of middle

marker beacon.
2. PHOTOCELL FOR AUTOMATIC DIMMING OF MARKER BEACON

LIGHTS AND SELECT BUTTON -- The photocell in the faceplate
automaticallv dims the marker liohts as well as the oreen annunciators
in the Speatier Audio Select Butto"ns for night operationi
3. MARKER BEACON SENSITIVITY LAMP AND TEST SWITCH --The

Select button must that the green
lluminated for the ma eceive to provide
at beacon passage. is on "Hl SENS"
, the highsensitvity h permits you to
marker tone about a is point you may
select the the "LO SENS' (middle) position to temporarily silence the
tone. lt will start to sound again when you are closer to the marker,
giving you a more precise indication of its location.
Figure 1. Bendix/King KMA 26 Audio Selector Panel (Sheet 1 of 3)
s3-4 Feb 3197

4. AUDIO SELECT BUTTONS -- Push button audio selection is available
6. (PUSH SPKR) SWITCH -- With the Speaker Setecr

both headphone and cabin speaker audio will be
audio is active full-time. Headphone audio cannol
Feb 3/97 s3-5

s. PASSENGER INTERCOM VOLUME (VOL PASS) KNOB -- Adjusts

passenger intercom volume.
10. INTERCOM MODE SELECT SWITCH -- Has three modes "ALL",

"CREW", AND "PILOT" which are selected with the toggle switch on
the lower left side on the faceplate. ln the "ALL" position the pilot,
intercom loop and do not hear the radios.
When either the "ALL" or "CREW" intercom modes are selected, the
control intercom volume only, not the receiver's volume.

'l 1. MARKEB MUTE BUTTON -- Mutes culrentlv active marker beacon
audio.
s3-6 Feb 3/97

sEcTroN 2
LIMITATIONS
SECTION 3
ln the event of a failure of the audio amplifier in the KMA 26, asl
evidenced by the inability to transmit in COM 1,2 or 3.
1. MIC Selector Switch -- EMG.
NOTE
This action bypasses the KMA 26 audio amplifier and

connects the pilot's mic/head set directly to COM 1.
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
AUDIO CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION:
1. MIC Selector Switch -- Turn to desired transmitter.
2. SPEAKER and Audio Select Button(s) -- SELECT desired

receiver(s).
NOTES
Rotation of the MIC selector switch selects the Com audio

automatically.
Nov 15/00 s3-7

MARKER BEACON RECEIVER OPERATION:
1. TEST Position -- HOLD toggle down momentarily to verify all

lights are operational.
2. SENS Selections -- Select Hl sensitivity for airuay flying or LO

for ILS/LOC approaches.
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
externally mounted antenna or related external antennas, will result
s3-8 Feb 3/97

ATIM Company

CESSNA MODEL 182S

SUPPLEMENT 4
POINTER MODEL 3OOG11 OR MODEL 4OOO-11
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
J) Membe.l- of GAMA
coPYRtGHT @ 1997
3 Febru ary 1997
WICHITA, KANSAS. USA Revision 1 - 15 November 2000
182SPHUS-54-01
s4-1
SUPPLEMENT 4
POINTER MODEL 3OOO.11 OR MODEL 4OOO.11
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMIfiER (ELT)

0 (Original) Feb 3, 1997
1 Nov. 15,2000
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
(S4-1)
Title Nov 15/00 s4-6 Nov 15/00
S4-2 Nov 15/00 s4-7 Nov 15/00
S4-3 Nov 15/00 s4-8 Nov 15/00
S4-4 Nov 15/00 s4-9 Nov 15/00
S4-5 Nov 15/00 s4-10 Nov 15/00

Airplane
s4-2 Nov 15/00

SUPPLEMENT
POINTER MODEL 3000-1 1 OR 4000-1 1l
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMTTTER (ELT)
sEcTtoN 1
GENERAL
This supplement provides information which must be obserued
when operating the Pointer Model 3000-11 or 4000-11 Emergency
Locator Transmitter.
activate when the unit senses longitudinal inertia forces as required

in TSO-C914. Also, a remote switch/annunciator is installed on the
top right hand side of the copilot's instrument panel for control of
the ht cre
the er swi I
is t ELT
inte frequ
General aviation and commercial aircraft, the FAA and CAP monitor
121.5 MHz, and 243.0 MHz is monitored by the military.
The ELT is contained in a high impact, fire retardant, glass filled

Lexon case with carrying handle and is mounted behind the aft
cabin partition wall on the right side of the tailcone. To gain access
to t cabin partition.
The rd facing end of
the on the top right
han ure 1).
Power for the transmitter is provided by an alkaline battery pack

inside the transmitter case.
Nov 15/00 s4-3

ln accordance with FAA regulations, the ELT's battery pack must

be replaced after 2 years shelf or seruice life or for any of the
following reasons:
a. After the transmitter has been used in an emergency situation

(including any inadvertent activation of unknown duration).
b. After the transmitter has been operated for more than one
cumulative hour (e.9. time accumulated in several tests and
inadveftent activation of known duration).
c. On or before battery replacement date. Battery replacement
date is marked on the battery pack and the label on the
transmitter.
Irc EMPE.
Figure 1. Pointer Model 3000-11 Emergency Locator Transmitter .

1. REMOTE CABLE JACK Connects to ELT remote
switch/annunciator located on the copilot's instrument panel.
2. ANTENNA RECEPTACLE -- Connects to antenna mounted on
top of tailcone.
3. TRANSMITTER ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT -- llluminates red to
indicate the transmitter is transmitting a distress signal.
4. MASTER FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCH (3-position toggle
switch):
AUTO -- Arms transmitter for automatic activation if "G"
switch senses a oredetermined deceleration level.
ON -- Activates transmitter instantly. Used for test
purposes and if "G" switch is inoperative. The ON
position bypasses the automatic activation switch.
(The red annunciator in the center of the remote
switch/annunciator should illuminate).
s4-4 Nov 15i00

OFF/RESET -- Deactivates transmitter during handling,

following rescue and to reset the automatic
activation function. (The red annunciator in
the center of the remote switch/annunciator
should extinguish).
5. REMOTE SWITCH/ANNUNCIATOR (3-position rocker switch):
oN -- Remotely activates the transmitter for test or
emergency situations. Red annunciator in
center of rocker switch illuminates to indicate
that the transmitter is transmitting a distress
signal.
switch senses a predetermined deceleration
level.
RESET -- Deactivates and rearms transmitter after
automatic activation by the "G" switch. Red
annunciator in center of rocker switch should
extinguish.
'3
Figure 2. Pointer Model 4000-11 Emergency Locator Transmitter
(ELr).
1. REMOTE CABLE JACK Connects to ELT remote

switch/annunciator located on the copilot's instrument panel.
2. ANTENNA RECEPTACLE -- Connects to antenna mounted on
top of tailcone.
3. TRANSMITTER ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT -- llluminates red to
indicate the transmitter is transmitting a distress signal.
Nov 15/00 s4-5

4. MASTER FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCH (3-position toggle

switch):
oN -- Activates transmitter instantly. Used for test
purposes and if "G" switch is inoperative. The
ON position bypasses the automatic activation
switch. (The red annunciator in the center of
the remote switch/annunciator should
illuminate).
level.
OFF/RESET - Deactivates transmitter during handling,
following rescue and to reset the automatic
activation function. (The red annunciator in the
center of the remote switch/annunciator should
extinguish).
5. REMOTE SWITCH/ANNUNCIATOR (3-position rocker switch):

oN -- Remotely activates the transmitter for test or
emergency situations. Red annunciator in
center of rocker switch illuminates to indicate
that the transmitter is transmitting a distress
signal.
level.
RESET -- Deactivates and rearms transmitter after
automatic activation by the "G" switch. Red
annunciator in center of rocker switch should
extinguish.
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
Refer to Section 2 of the Pilot's Operating Handbook (POH).
s4-6 Nov 15/00

SECTION 3
Before performing a forced landing, especially in remote and
mountainous areas, activate the ELT transmitter by positioning the
remote switch/annunciator to the ON position. The annunciator in
center of the rocker switch should be illuminated.
lmmediately after a forced landing where emergency assistance
is required, the ELT should be utilized as follows:
NOTE
The ELT remote switch/annunciator system could be
inoperative if damaged during a forced landing. lf
inoperative, the inertia trGrr switch will activate
automatically. However, to turn the ELT OFF and
ON again requires manual switching of the master
function selector switch which is located on the ELT
unit.
1. ENSURE ELT ACT VATION:

a. Position remote switch/annunciator to the ON position even
if annunciator light is already on.
b. lf airplane radio is operable and can be safely used (no
threat of fire or explosion), turn ON and select 121.5 MHz.
lf the ELT can be heard transmitting, it is working properly.
c. Ensure that antenna is clear of obstructions.
NOTE
When the ELT is activated, a decreasing tone will

be heard before the typicalwarbling tone begins.
2. PRIOR TO SIGHTING RESCUE AIRCRAFT -- Conserve

airplane baery. Do not activate radio transceiver.
3. AFTER SIGHTING RESCUE AIRCRAFT -- Position remote
switch/annunciator to the RESET position and release to the
AUTO position to prevent radio interference. Attempt contact
with rescue aircraft with the rado transceiver set to a
frequency ol 121.5 MHz. lf no contact is established, return
the remote switch/annunciator to the ON position immediately.
Nov 15/00 s4-71

4. FOLLOWING RESCUE -- Position remote switch/annunciator

to the AUTO position, terminating emergency transmissions.
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
As long as the remote switch/annunciator is in the AUTO position

and the ELT master function selector switch remains in the AUTO
position, the ELT automatically activates when the unit senses
longitudinal inedia forces as required in TSO-C914.
Following a lightning strike, or an exceptionally hard landing, the

ELT may activate although no emergency exists. lf the remote
switch/annunciator illuminates, the ELT has inadvertently activated
itself. Another way to check is to select 121.5 MHz on the radio
transceiver and listen for an emergency lone transmission. lf the
remote switch/annunciator is illuminated or an emergency tone is
heard, position the remote switch/annunciator in the RESET position
and release to the AUTO postion.
The ELT must be seruiced in accordance with FAR Parl91.2O7.
INSPECTION/TEST
1. The emergency locator transmitter should be tested every 100

hours.
NOTE
Test should only be conducted within the first 5

minutes of each hour.
2. Disconnect antenna cable from ELT.

3. Turn airplane battery switch and avionics power switches ON.
4. Turn airplane transcever ON and set frequency to 121.5 MHz.
5. Place remote switch/annunciator in the ON position. The
annunciator should illuminate. Permit onlv three emergency
tone transmissions, then immediately reposition the remote
switch/annunciator to the RESET position and release to the
AUTO position.
l.o-, Nov 15/00

6. Place the ELT master function selector switch in the ON

position. Verify that the transmitter annunciator light on the
ELT and the remote switch/annunciator on the instrument
panelare illuminated.
7. Place the ELT master function selector switch in the
OFF/RESET position.
8. Reposition ELT master function selector switch to AUTO.
9. Reconnect antenna cable to ELT.
[, wennrnc
A TEST WITH THE ANTENNA CONNECTED
SHOULD BE APPROVED AND CONFTRMED BY
THE NEAREST CONTROL TOWER.
NOTE
Without its antenna connected, the ELT will produce

sufficient signal to reach the airplane transceiver,
yet it will not disturb other communications or
damage output circuitry.
After accumulated test or operation time equals t hour,

battery pack replacement is required.
IN.FLIGHT MONITORING AND REPORTING
Pilot's are encouraged to monitor 121.5 MHz and/or 243.0 MHz

while in flight to assist in identifying possible emergency ELT
transmissions. On receiving a signal, report the following
information to the nearest air traffic control facility:
1. Your position at the time the signal was first heard.

2. Your position at the time the signal was last heard.
3. Your position at maximum signal strength.
4. Your flight altitude and frequency on which the emergency
signal was heard -- 121.5 MHz or 243.0 MHz. lf possible,
positions should be given relative to a navigation aid. lf the
aircraft has homing equipment, provide the bearing to the
emergency signalwith each reported position.
Nov 15/00 s4-el

SECTON 9 - SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT 4 - FAA APPROVED
sEcfloN 5
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in airplane performance when the ELT is

installed.
ATiltlon Compry

CESSNA MODEL 1825

AIRPLANES 182S8OOO1 AND ON
Q u" a.rofGAMA
copy.,GHr@1se7 3 Fgbruary 1997

wrcHrrA, KANsAs, usA Revision 3 - 20 May 1999
lg2sPHus-ss-o3 SS-1
SUPPLEMENT 5
BENDI)UKING KLN 898 GLOBAL POSITIONING
SYSTEM (rFR)
0 (Original) Feb.3, 1997

1 Dec.1,1997
2 July 15, 1998
3 May 20, 1999
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
Title (S5-1) May 20199 s5-11 May 20/99

ss-2 May 20199 s5-12 May 20/99
s5-3 July 15/98 s5-13 May 20199
s5-4 July 15/98 s5-14 May 20199
s5-5 July 15/98 s5-15 May 20199
s5-6 May 20199 s5-16 May 20199
ss-7 July 15/98 s5-17 May 20199
s5-8 July 15/98 s5-18 May 20199
s5-9 July 15/98 s5-19 May 20199
s5-10 July 15/98 55-20 blank May 20/99
s5-2 May 20199

SUPPLEMENT 5
BENDIVKING KLN 898 GLOBAL POSITIONING
SYSTEM (rFR)

Airolane Unit Revision lncorporated
Number Title Effivifv iilrporation fnffilane
sB98-34- KLN 898 182580001 7/15198
01 NAVIGATION THRU
SYSTEM IFR 182580257
NON-
PRECISION
APPROACH
LIMITATION
July 15/98 s5-3

SUPPLEMENT
BENDI)(/KING KLN 898

GPS NAVTGATTON SYSTEM (tFR)
SECTION 1
GENERAL
[, wnnnrruc
THE KLN 898 IS NOT AUTHORIZED FOR
INSTRUMENT APPROACHES UNLESS THE
OPERATIONAL REVISION STATUS IS
UPGRADED TO ''ORS 02" OR LATER, AS READ
ON THE POWER.ON PAGE, AND THE HOST
SOFTWARE IS UPGRADED TO "HOST OO88O.
OOO4'' OR LATER, AS READ ON THE KLN 898
OTH 6 PAGE.
The KLN 898 GPS (Global Positioning System) is a three-

dimensional precision navigation system based on 24 earth orbiting
satellites. Receiver Autonomous lntegrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a
function that every IFR-ceftified GPS receiver must continuously
peorm to assure position accuracy. RAIM is available when 5 or
more of these satellites are in view, or 4 satellites are in view and a
barometrically corrected altitude input from the airplane's altimeter
is made. Annunciation is provided if there are not enough satellites
in view to assure position integrity.
Operational guidance for the KLN 898 GPS Navigation System is

provided with the BendilKing KLN 898 Pilot's Guide (supplied with
the airplane). This Pilot's Guide should be thoroughly studied and
VFR operations conducted so that you are totally familiar with the
GPS system of navigation before actually using this equipment in
IFR conditions.
s5-4 July 15/98

MODEL 182S SUPPLEMENT 5 . FAA APPROVED
The database card is an electronic memory containing

information on airpofts, navaids, intersections, SID's, STAR's,
instrument approaches, special use airspace, and other items of
interest to the pilot.
Every 28 days, Bendix/King receives new database information

from Jeppesen Sanderson for the North American database region.
This information is processed and downloaded onto the database
cards. Bendix/King makes these database card updates available
to KLN 898 GPS users.
cnunoru
[,
THE DATABASE MUST BE UPDATED ONLY
\,'HILE THE AIRCRAFT IS ON THE GROUND.
THE KLN 898 DOES NOT PERFORM ANY
NAVIGATION FUNCTION WHILE THE DATABASE
IS BEING UPDATED.
NOTE
A current database is required by regulation in order to

use the KLN 898 GPS system for nonprecision
approaches.
Provided the KLN 898 navigation system is receiving adequate

usable signals, it has been demonstrated capable of and has been
shown to meet the accuracy specifications of: VFF/IFR en route
oceanic and remote, en route domestic, terminal, and instrument
approach (GPS, Loran-C, VOR, VOR-DME, TACAN, NDB, NDB-
DME, RNAV) operation within the U.S. National Airspace System,
North Atlantic Minimum Navigation Pedormance Specifications
(MNPS) Airspace and latitudes bounded by 74' Nofth and 60"
South using the WGS-84 (or NAD 83) coordinate reference datum in
accordance with the criteria of AC 20-138, AC 91-49, and AC 120-
33. Navigation data is based upon use of only the global
positioning system (GPS) operated by the United States.
July 15/98 s5-5

NOTE
Aircraft using GPS for oceanic IFR operations may use the
KLN 898 to replace one of the other approved means of
long range navigation. A single KLN 898 GPS installation
may also be used on short oceanic routes which require
only one means of long-range navigation.
NOTE
FAA approval of the KLN 898 does not necessarily

constitute approvalfor use in foreign airspace.
NOTE
When the KLN 898 contains receiver software RCVR

01621-0001 (or higher dash number), as verified on the
OTH 6 page, the unit is qualified for BRNAV (Basic Area
Navigation) operation in the European region in accordance
with the criteria of AC 90-96. (Reference ICAO Doc 7030
Regional Supplementary Procedures, JAA Technical
Guidance Leaflet AMJ20X2 and Eurocontrol RNAV
Standard Doc 003-93 Area Navigation Equipment
Operational Requirements and Functional Requirements
(RNAV).)
s5-6 May 20/99

0s85C1042
1. GPS MESSAGE (MSG) ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT - MSG will

begin flashing whenever the message prompt (a large "M" or
the left side of the screen) on the KLN 898 GPS unit begins
flashing to alert the pilot that a message is waiting. Press the
Message (MSG) key on the GPS to display the message. lf a
message condition exists which requires a specific action by
the pilot, the message annunciator will remain on but will not
flash.
2. GPS WAYPOTNT (WPT) ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT -- GPS

WAYPOINT annunciator will begin to flash approximately 36
seconds prior to reaching a Direct-To waypoint. Also, when
turn anticipation is enabled in the KLN 898 GPS unit, the
annunciator will begin to flash 20 seconds prior to the
beginning of turn anticipation, then illuminate steady at the
very beginning of turn anticipation.
Figure 1. GPS Annunciator/Switch (Sheet 1 of 3)
July 15/98 s5-7 I

[, wanurruc
TURN ANTICIPATION IS AUTOMATICALLY
DISABLED FOR FAF WAYPOINTS AND THOSE
USED EXCLUSIVELY IN SID/STARS WHERE
OVERFLIGHT IS REQUIRED. FOR WAYPOINTS
SHARED BET\''EEN SID/STARS AND
PUBLTSHED EN ROUTE SEGMENTS (REOUR|NG
ovERFLtGHT tN THE S|D/STARS), pROpER
SELECTION ON THE PRESENTED WAYPOINT
PAGE IS NECESSARY TO PROVIDE ADEQUATE
ROUTE PROTECTION ON THE SID/STARS.
3. GPS APPROACH (GPS, APR) SWITCH - Pressing the GPS

APPROACH switch manually selects or disarms the approach
ARM mode and also cancels the approach ACTV mode after
being automatically engaged by the KLN 898 GPS system.
The white background color of the GPS APPROACH
annunciator makes it visibte in daylight.
4. ARM ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT ARM annunciator will

illuminate when the KLN 898 GPS system automatically
selects the approach ARM mode or when the approach ARM
mode is manually selected. The approach ARM mode will be
automatically selected when the airplane is within 30 NM of an
airpofi, and an approach is loaded in the flight plan for that
airport. The approach ARM mode can manuafly be selected
at a greater distance than 30 NM from the airport by pressing
the GPS APPROACH switch; however, this will not change the
CDI scale until the airplane reaches the 30 NM point. The
approach ARM mode can also be disarmed by pressing the
GPS APPROACH switch.
5. ACTIVE (ACTV) ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT -- ACTV annunciator

will illuminate when the KLN 898 GPS system automatically
engages the approach ACTV mode (the ACTV mode can only
be engaged by the KLN 898 GPS system which is automatic.)
To cancel the approach ACTV mode, press the GPS
APPROACH switch; this will change the mode to the approach
ARM mode and ilfuminate the ARM annunciator.
I.u-, July 15/98

6. NAV/GPS SWITCH -- Toggles from Nav 1 to GPS and vice

versa to control the type of navigation data lo be displayed on
the CDI (Course Deviation lndicator). The No. 1 CDI Omni
Bearing Selector (OBS) provides analog course input to the
KLN 898 in OBS mode when the NAV/GPS
switch/annunciator is in GPS. When the NAV/GPS switch
annunciation is in NAV, GPS course selection in OBS mode is
digital through the use of the controls and display at the KLN
898.
NOTE
Manual CDI course centering in OBS mode using the

control knob can be difficult, especially at long
distances. Centering the Course Deviation lndicator
(CDl) needle can best be accomplished by pressing the
Direct-To button and then manually setting the No. 1
CDI course to the course value prescribed in the KLN
89B displayed message.
NOTE
The Directional Gyro heading (HDG) bug must also be

set to provide proper course dalum to the autopilot if
coupled to the KLN 898 in LEG or OBS. (When the
optional HSI is installed, the HSI course pointer provides
course datum to the autopilot.)
7. NAVIGATION SOURCE (NAV) ANNUNCIATOR -- The NAV

annunciator will illuminate steady to inform the pilot that NAV
1 information is being displayed on the NAV 1 CDl.
L NAVIGATION SOURCE (GPS) ANNUNCIATOR -- The GPS

annunciator will illuminate steady to inform the pilot that GPS
information is being displayed on the NAV 1 CDl.
July 15/98 ss-e I

SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
1. The KLN 898 GPS Pilot's Guide, P/N 006-08786-0000, dated
May, 1995 (or later applicable revision) must be available to the
flight crew whenever IFR GPS navigation is used. The
Operational Revision Status (ORS) of the Pilot's Guide must
match the ORS level annunciated on the Self Test page.
2. IFR Navigation is restricted as follows:

a. The system must utilize ORS level 01 or later FAA approved
revision.
b. The data on the self test page must be verified prior to use.
c. IFR en route and terminal navigation is prohibited unless the

pilot verifies the currency of the database or verifies each
selected waypoint for accuracy by reference to current
approved data.
d. The system must utilize ORS Level 02 or later FAA approved

revision to conduct nonprecision instrument approaches. ln
addition, the software level status found on page OTH 6 must
be "HOST 00880-0004" or later. lnstrument approaches must
be accomplished in accordance with approved instrument
approach procedures that are retrieved from the KLN B9B
database. The KLN 898 database must incoroorate the
current update cycle.
1) The KLN 898 Quick Reference, P/N 00-08787-0000,

dated 5/95 (or later applicable to revision) must be
available to the flight crew during instrument approach
operations.
2) lnstrument approaches must be conducted in the approach

mode and RAIM must be available at the Final Approach
Fix.
s5-10 July 15/98

3) APR ACTV mode must be annunciated at the Final Ap-

proach Fix.
4) Accomplishment of lLS, LOC, LOC-BC, LDA, SDF, and

MLS approaches are not authorized.
5) When an alternate airport is required by the applicabfe

operating rules, it musl be served by an approach based
on other than GPS or Loran-C navigation.
6) The KLN 898 can only be used for approach guidance if

the reference coordinate datum system for the instrument
approach is WGS-84 or NAD-83. (All approaches in the
KLN 898 database use the WGS-84 or the NAD-83
geodetic datum).
e. For BRNAV operations in the European region:

1) With 23 (24 if the altitude input to the KLN 898 is not
available) or more satellites projected to be operational for
the flight, the aircraft can depart without fudher action.

available) or fewer satellites projected to be operational for
the flight, the availability of the GPS integrity (RAIM) should
be confirmed for the intended flight (route and time). This
should be obtained from a prediction program run outside
of the aircraft. The prediction program must comply with
the criteria of Appendix 1 of AC90-96. ln the event of a
predicted continuous loss of RAIM of more than 5 minutes
for any part of the intended flight, the flight should be
delayed, cancelled, or rerouted on a track where RAIM
requirements can be met.
NOTE
AlliedSignal's Preflight, Version 2.O or later computer based

prediction program may be used for the RAIM prediction.
Alternate methods should be submitted for approval in
accordance with Advisory Circular AC90-96.
May 20199 s5-11

I' f. The aircraft must have other approved navigation equipment

appropriate to the route of flight installed and operational.
PLACARDS
Use of the KLN 898 without the Operational Revision Status
upgrade to "ORS 02" or later is limited to VFR and IFR enroute
only. The following information must be presented in the form of
placards when the airplane is equipped with a KLN 898 unit that
has not been upgraded.
1. On the instrument panel near the KLN 898 unit:
GPS NOT APPROVED

FOR IFR APPROACH
This placard is not required with an Operational Revision Status

upgrade to "ORS 02" or later as read on the Power-On page and
host software upgrade to "HOST 00880-0004" or later as read on
the OTH 6 page.
SECTION 3
There are no changes to the basic airplane emergency
procedures when the KLN 898 GPS is installed.
1. lf the KLN 898 GPS information is not available or invalid, utilize

remaining operational navigation equipment as required.
2. lt a "RAIM NOT AVAILABLE" message is displayed while

conducting an instrument approach, terminate the approach.
Execute a missed approach if required.
s5-12 May 20199

lf a "RAIM NOT AVAILABLE" message is displayed in the en

route or terminal phase of flight, continue to navigate using the
KLN 898 or reveft to an alternate means of navigation
appropriate to the route and phase of flight. When continuing to
use the KLN 898 for navigation, position must be verified every
15 minutes using another IFR approved navigation system.
4. Referto the KLN 898 Pilot's Guide, Appendices B and C, for

appropriate pilot actions to be accomplished in response to
annunciated messages.
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
OPERATION
Normal operating procedures are outlined in the KLN 898 GPS

Pilot's Guide, P/N 006-08786-0000, dated May, 1995, (or later
applicable revision). A KLN 898 Quick Reference, P/N 006-08787-
0000, dated May, 1995 (or later applicable revision) containing an
approach sequence, operating tips and approach related messages
is intended as well for cockpit use by the pilot familiar with KLN 898
operations when conducting instrument approaches.
[, wlnxrnc
TO PREVENT THE POSSIBILITY OF TURN
ANTICIPATION CAUSING POTENTIALLY
MISLEADING NAVIGATION WHEN THE
AIRCRAFT IS NOT ON COURSE, VERIFY THE CDI
COURSE AND CDI NEEDLE PRESENTATION IS
PROPER PRIOR TO TAKEOFF AND DO NOT
SWITCH FROM OBS TO LEG WITH GREATER
THAN 1 NM CROSS TRACK ERROR (XTK).
IF MISLEADING DATA S SUSPECTED, A

DIRECT.TO OPERATION TO YOUR DESIRED
WAYPOINT WILL CLEAR ANY PREVIOUS OBS
COURSE. AND CANCEL TURN ANTICIPATION.
May 20/99 s5-131

NOTE
After the above Direct-To operation, fufiher reorientation to

the nearest leg of the active flight plan may be
accomplished by pressing the DirecTo button followed by
pressing the Clear button and finally the Enter Button.
Refer to the Pilot's Guide section 4.2.2 for an explanation of

turn anticipation, and Appendix A - Navigation Terms for the
definition of cross track error (XTK).
AUTOPI LOT COUPLED OPERATION
The KLN 898 may be coupled to the KAP 140 autopilot by first
selecting GPS on the NAV/GPS switch. Manual selection of the
desired track on the pilot's DG heading bug is required to provide
course datum to the KAP 140 autopilot. (Frequent course datum
changes may be necessary, such as in the case of flying a DME
arc.) The autopilot approach mode (APR) should be used when
conducting a coupled GPS approach.
NOTE
Select HDG mode for DME arc intercepts. NAV or APR

coupled DME arc intercepts can result in excessive
overshoots (aggravated by high ground speeds and/or
ntercepts from insde the arc).
APPROACH MODE SEQUENCING AND RAIM PREDICTION
[ wnnnnc
FAMILIARIW WITH THE EN ROUTE OPERATION
OF THE KLN 898 DOES NOT CONSTITUTE
PROFICIENCY IN APPROACH OPERATIONS. DO
NOT ATTEMPT APPROACH OPERATIONS IN
lMc (|NSTRUMENT METEOROLOGTCAL
coNDrTloNS) PRIOR TO ATTA|NTNG
PROFICIENCY IN THE USE OF THE KLN 898.
lru-ro May 20199

NOTE
The special use airspace aleft will automatically be

disabled prior to flying an instrument approach to
reduce the potentialfor message congestion.
1. Prior to arrival, select a STAR if appropriate from the APT 7

page. Select an approach and an initial approach fix (lAF)
from the APT I page.
NOTE
Using the outer knob, select the ACT (Active Flight Plan
Waypoints) pages. Pull the inner knob out and scroll to
the destination airport, then push the inner knob in and
select the ACT 7 or ACT I page.
To delete or replace a SlD, STAR or approach, select

FPL 0 page. Place the cursor over the name of the
procedure, press ENT to change it, or CLR then ENT to
delete it.
2. En route, check for RAIM availability at the destination airport

ETA on the OTH 3 page.
NOTE
RAIM must be available at the FAF in order to fly an

instrument approach. Be prepared to terminate the
approach upon loss of RAIM.
3. At or within 30 nm from the airpo:

a. Verify automatic annunciation of APRARM.
b. Note automatic CDI needle scaling change from =5.0 nm
+1.0
to nm over the next 30 seconds.
c. Update the KLN 898 altimeter baro setting as required.
d. lnternally the KLN 898 will transition from en route to
terminal integrity monitoring.
May 20199 s5-151
--l
4. Select NAV 4 page to fly the approach procedure.

a. lf receiving radar vectors, or need to fly a procedure turn or
holding pattern, fly in OBS until inbound to the FAF.
NOTE
OBS navigation is TO-FROM (like a VOR) without

waypoint sequencing.
1, wnnnrrc
TO PREVENT THE POSSIBILITY OF TURN
ANTICIPATION CAUSING POTENTIALLY
MISLEADING NAVIGATION WHEN THE
AIRCRAFT IS NOT ON COURSE, DO NOT
SWITCH FROM OBS TO LEG WITH GREATER
THAN 1 NM CROSS TRACK ERROR (XTK).
b. NoPT routes including DME arc's are flown in LEG. LEG

is mandatorv from the FAF to the MAP.
NOTE
Select HDG mode for DME arc intercepts. NAV or APR
coupled DME arc intercepts can result in excessive
overshoots (aggravated by high grounc speeds and/or
intercepts from inside the arc).
[, wnnnrnc
FLYING FINAL OUTBOUND FROM AN OFF.
AIRPORT VORTAC ON AN OVERLAY
APPROACH; BEWARE OF THE DME DISTANCE
INCREASING ON FNAL APPROACH, AND THE
GPS DISTANCE-TO-WAYPOINT DECREASING,
AND NOT MATCHING THE NUMBERS ON THE
APPROACH PLATE.
l.u-, u May 20199

5. At or before 2 nm from the FAF inbound:

a. Select the FAF as the active wavpoint, if not accomplished
ffiad-r
b. Select LEG operation.
-
6. Approaching the FAF inbound (within 2 nm):
a. Verify APR ACTV.
b. Note automatic CDI needle scaling change from -1.0 nm
to +0.3 nm over the 2 nm inbound to the FAF.
c. lnternally the KLN 898 will transition from terminal to
approach integrity monitoring.
7. Crossing the FAF and APR ACTV is ry!annunciated:

a. Do not descend.
b. Execute the missed approach.
8. Missed Approach:
a. Climb.
b. Navigate to the MAP (in APRARM if APR ACTV is not
available).
NOTE
There is no automatic LEG sequencing at the MAP.
c. After climbing in accordance with the published missed

approach procedure, press the Direct To button, verify or
change the desired holding fix and press ENT.
May 20/99 s5-171

GENERAL NOTES
. The database must be up to date for instrument approach
operation.
. Onfy approach can be in the flight plan at a time.
. Checking RAIM prediction for your approach while en route using
the OTH 3 page is recommended. A self check occurs
automatically within 2 nm of the FAF. APR ACTV is inhibited
without RAIM.
. Data cannot be altered, added to or deleted from the approach
procedures contained in the database. (DME arc intercepts may
be relocated along the arc through the NAV 4 or the FPL 0
pages).
. Waypoint suffixes in the flight plan:

i-- tAF
f -- FAF
m -- MAP
h -- missed approach holding fix.
.The DME arc IAF (arc intercept waypoint) will be on your present
position radial off the arc VOR when you load the IAF into the flight
plan, or the beginning of the arc if currently on a radial beyond the
arc limit. To adjust the arc intercept to be compatible with a
current radar vector, bring up the arc IAF waypoint in the NAV 4
page scanning field or under the cursor on the FPL 0 page, press
CLR, then ENT. Fly the arc in LEG. Adjust the heading bug (if
autopilot coupled) and CDI course with reference to the desired
track value on the NAV 4 page (it will flash to remind you).
LefVright CDI needle information is relative to the arc. Displayed
distance is not along the arc but direct to the active waypoint. (The
DME arc radial is also displayed in the lower right corner of the
NAV 4 page.)
l.u-,, May 20/99

The DME arc IAF identifier may be unfamiliar. Example: D098G

where 098 stands for the 098' radial off the referenced VOR,
and G is the seventh letter in the alphabet indicating a 7 DME
arc.
. APRARM to APR ACTV is automatic provided that:
a. You are in APRARM (normally automatic).

b. in LEG mode.
c. active
d. Within 2 nm
e. Outside of the FAF.
f. lnbound to the FAF.
g. RAIM is available.
Direct-To operation between the FAF and MAP cancels APR

ACTV. Fly the missed approach in APRARM.
Flagged navigation inside the FAF may usually be restored (not
guaranteed) by pressing the GPS APR button changing from
ACTV to ARM. Fly the missed approach.
The instrument approach using the KLN 898 may be essentially

automatically started 30 nm out (with a manual baro setting
update) or it may require judicious selection of the OBS and LEG
modes.
APRARM may be canceled at any time by pressing the GPS APR

button. (A subsequent press will reselect it.)
sEcTroN 5
PERFORMANCE
There is no change to the airplane performance when this avionics
equipment is installed. However, installation of an externally-
mounted antenna or related external antennas, will result in a minor
reduction in cruise pedormance.
May 2Ol99 55-19(5-20 blank)

ATs)dron Compy

CESSNA MODEL 182S

SUPPLEMENT 6
BENDIVKNG KR87
AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER
(l Memer of GAMA
copy.,GHr @ 1ee7 3 Fgbru ary 1997

CESSNA AIBCHAFT COMPANY
wcHrrA, KANsAs,usA Revision 2 - 15 November 2000
ls2sPHus-s6-02 S6-1
SUPPLEMENT 6
BENDI)KING KR 87 AUTOMATIC DIRECTION
FTNDER (ADF)

1 Dec. 1 ,1997
2 Nov. 15.2000
LOG OF EFFECTIVITY PAGE
PAGE PAGE DATE
(56-1)
Title Nov 15/00 56-7 Feb 3/97
56-2 Nov 15/00 56-8 Feb 3/97
56-3 Nov 15/00 56-9 Feb 3197
56-4 Feb 3/97 56-10 Feb 3197
56-5 Feb 3197 56-11 Dec 1/97
56-6 Feb 3197 56-12 Feb 3/97

Airplane Unit Revision lncoroorated

Number Ttle Effe-vlf iForporaton ln A-rplan-e
s6-2 Nov 15/00

SUPPLEMENT
BENDT)UKTNG KR 87 AUTOMATTC DTRECTTON
FTNDER (ADF) I
SECTION 1
GENERAL
The Bendix/King Digital ADF is a panel-mounted, digitally tuned
automatic direction finder. lt is designed to provide continuous 1-
kHz digital tuning in the frequency range ot 2OO-kHz to 1799-kHz
and eliminates the need for mechanical band switching. The
system is comprised of a receiver, a built-in electronics timer, a
bearing indicator, and a KA-448 combined loop and sense antenna.
Operating controls and displays for the Bendix/King Digital ADF are
shown and described in Figure 1. The audio system used in
conjunction with this radio for speaker-phone selection is shown and
described in Supplement 3 of this handbook.
The Bendix/King Digital ADF can be used for position plotting

and homing procedures, and for aural reception of amplitude-
modulated (AM) signals.
The "flip-flop" frequency display allows switching between pre-

selected 'STANDBY" and "ACTIVE" frequencies by pressing the
frequency transfer button. Both pre-selected frequencies are stored
in a non-volatile memory circuit (no battery power required) and
displayed in large, easy-to-read, self-dimming gas discharge
numerics. The active frequency is continuously displayed in the left
window, while the right window will display either the standby
frequency or the selected readout from the built-in electronic timer.
The built-in electronic timer has two separate and independent

timing functions. An automatic flight timer that starts whenever the
unit is turned on. This timer functions up to 59 hours and 59
minutes. An elapsed timer which will count up or down for up to 59
minutes and 59 seconds. When a preset time interual has been
programmed and the countdown reaches :00, the display will flash
for 15 seconds. Since both the flight timer and elapsed timer
operate independently, it is possible to monitor either one without
disrupting the other. The pushbutton controls and the bearing
indicators are internally lighted. lntensity is controlled by the RADIO
light dimrning rheostat.
Nov 15/00
SUPPLEMENT 6 - FAA APPROVED MODEL 1825
$ rEE ::: LiPr FL
rlt
Ill
0585C 043
1
058sc1 044
Figure 1. KR 87 Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) (Sheet 1 of 4)
s6-4 Feb 3/97

1. ANT/ADF MODE ANNUNCIATOR Antenna (ANT) is

selected by the "out" position of the ADF button. This mode
improves the audio reception and is usually used for station
identification. The bearing pointer is deactivated and will park
in the 90" relative position. Automatic Direction Finder (ADF)
mode is selected by the depressed position of the ADF button.
This mode activates the bearing pointer. The bearing pointer
will point in the direction of the station relative to the aircraft
heading.
2. IN-USE FREQUENCY DISPLAY - The frequency to which the

ADF is tuned is displayed here. The active ADF frequency can
be changed directly when either of the timer functions is
selected.
3. BFO (Beat Frequency Oscillator) ANNUNCIATOR - The BFO

mode, activated and annunciated when the "BFO" button is
depressed, permits the carrier wave and associated morse
code identifier broadcast on the carrier wave to be heard.
NOTE
CW signals (Morse Code) are unmodulated and no audio

will be heard without use of BFO. This type of sgnal is not
used in the United States air navigation. lt is used in some
foreign countries and marine beacons.
4. STANDBY FREQUENCY/FLIGHT TIME OR ELAPSED TIME

ANNUNCIATION -- When FRQ is displayed the STANDBY
frequency is displayed in the right hand display. The
STANDBY frequency is selected using the frequency select
knobs. The selected STANDBY frequency is put into the
ACTIVE frequency windows by pressing the frequency transfer
button. Either the standby frequency, the flight timer, or the
elapsed time is displayed in this position. The flight timer and
elapsed timer are displayed replacing the standby frequency
which goes into "blind" memory to be called back at any time
by depressing the FRQ button. Flight time or elapsed time are
displayed and annunciated alternatively by depressing the
FLT/ET button.
Figure 1 . KR 87 Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) (Shee.2 ot 4)
Feb 3197 s6-5

SECION 9 - SUPPLEMENTS CESSNA
5. FLIGHT TIMER AND ELAPSED TIMER MODE ANNUNCIATION -- Either

the elapsed time (ET) or flight time (FLT) mode is annunciated here.
6. FREQUENCY SELECT KNOBS - Selects the standby frequency when

FRQ is displayed and directly selects the active frequency whenever
either of the time functions is selected. The frequency selector knobs
may be rotated either clockwise or counterclockwise. The small knob is
pulled out to tune the 1's. The small knob is pushed in to tune the 10's.
The outer knob tunes the 100's with rollover into the 1000's up to 1799.
These knobs are also used to set the desired time when tlre elaosed
timer is used in the countdown mode.
7. ON/OFF /OLUME CONTROL SWITCH (ON/OFF^/OL) -- Controls

primary power and audio output level. Clockwise rotation from OFF
postion applies primary power to the receiver; further clockwise
rotation increases audio level. Audio muting causes the audio output to
be muted unless the receiver is locked on a valid station.
8. SET/BESE ELAPSED TIMER BUTTON (SET/RST) -- The seVreset

button when pressed resets the elapsed limer whether it is being
displayed or not.
9. FLIGHT TIMEF/ELAPSED TIMEB MODE SELECTOR BUTTON

(FLT/ET) - The Flight Timer/Elapsed Time mode selector button when
pressed alternatively selects either Flight Timer mode or Elapsed Timer
mooe.
10. FREQUENCY TRANSFER BUTTON (FRO) - The FRQ transfer button

when pressed exchanges the active and standby frequencies. The new
frequency becomes active and the former active frequency goes into
standby.
11. BFO (Beat Frequency Oscillator) BUTTON -- The BFO button selects
the BFO mode when in the depressed position. (See note under item
3).
12. ADF BUTTON - The ADF button selects either the ANT mode or the
ADF mode. The ANT mode is selected with the ADF button in the out
position. The ADF mode is selected with the ADF button in the
depressed position.
Figure 1, KR 87 Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) (Sheet 3 of 4
o-o Feb 3/97

13.LUBBER LINE -- lndicates relative or magnetic heading of the

aircraft. The heading must be manually input by the pilot with
the heading (HDG) knob.
14. COMPASS CARD -- Manually rotatable card that ndicates

relative or magnetic heading of aircraft, as selected by HDG
knob.
15. BEARING POINTER -- lndicates relative or magnetic bearing

to station as selected by HDG knob. lf the relative heading of
North (N) is manually selected under the lubber line by the
pilot, then the bearing pointer indicates the relative bearing to
the station. lf the aircraft's magnetic heading is selected
under the lubber line by the pilot, then the bearing pointer
indicates the magnetic bearing to the station.
16. HEADING KNOB (HDG) -Rotates card to set in relative or

magnetic heading of aircraft.
Figure 1. KR 87 Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) (Sheet 4 of 4)
Feb 3/97 s6-7

SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
There is no change to airplane limitations when the KR 87 ADF
is installed.
sEcTroN 3

procedures when the KR 87 ADF is installed.
sEcoN
4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
TO OPERATE AS AN AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER:
1. OFF /OL Control -- ON.

2. Frequency Selector Knobs -- SELECT desired frequency in
the standby frequency display.
3. FRQ Button -- PRESS to move the desired frequency from the
standby to the active position.
4. ADF Selector Switch (on audio control panel) - SELECT as
desired.
5. OFF /OL Control -- SET to desired volume levef and identify
that desired station is being received.
6. ADF Button -- SELECT ADF mode and note relative bearing
on indicator.
ADF TEST (PRE-FLIGHT or IN-FLIGHT):
1. ADF Button -- SELECT ANT mode and note pointer moves to

90'position.
2. ADF Button -- SELECT ADF mode and note the pointer moves
without hesitation to the station bearing. Excessive pointer
sluggishness, wavering or reversals indicate a signal that is
too weak or a system malfunction.
s6-8 Feb 3/97

TO OPERATE BFO:
1. OFF /OL Control -- ON.

2. BFO Button -- PRESS on.
3. ADF Selector Buttons (on audio control panel) -- SET to
desired mode.
4. VOL Control -- ADJUST to desired listening level.
NOTE
A 1000-Hz tone and Morse Code identifier is heard in

the audio output when a CW signal is received.
TO OPERATE FLIGHT TIMER:
1. OFFA/OL Control -- ON.

2. FLTIET Mode Button -- PRESS (once or twice) until FLT is
annunciated. Timer will already be counting since it is
activated by turning the unit on.
3. OFFA/OL Control -- OFF and then ON if it is desired to reset
the flight timer.
TO OPERATE AS A COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVER ONLY:
1. OFF /OL Control-- ON.

2. ADF Button -- SELECT ANT mode.
3. Frequency Selector Knobs -- SELECT desired frequency in
the standby frequency display.
4. FRQ Button -- PRESS to move the desired frequency from the
standby to the active position.
5. ADF Selector Buttons (on audio control panel) -- SET to
desired mode.
6. VOL Control -- ADJUST to desired listening level.
Feb 3/97 s6-9

TO OPERATE ELAPSED TIME TIMER-COUNT UP MODE:
1. OFF^/OL Control -- ON.

2. FLTIT Mode Butlon -- PRESS (once or twice) until ET is
annunciated.
3. SET/RST Button -- PRESS momentarily to reset elapsed timer
to zero.
NOTE
The Standby Frequency which is in memory while Flight

Time or Elapsed Time modes are being displayed may
be called back by pressing the FRQ button, then
transferred to active use by pressing the FRQ button
again.
TO OPERATE ELAPSED TIME TIMER.COUNT DOWN MODE:
1. OFF /OL Control-- ON.

2. FLT/ET Mode Button -- PRESS (once or twice) until ET is
annunciated.
3. SET/RST Button -- PRESS until the ET annunciation begins to
flash.
4. FREQUENCY SELECTOR KNOBS -- SET desired time in the
elapsed time display. The small knob is pulled out to tune the
1's. The small knob is pushed in to tune the 10's. The outer
knob tunes minutes up to 59 minutes.
NOTE
Selector knobs remain in the time set mode for 15

seconds after the last entry or until the SET/RST,
FLT/ET or FRQ button is oressed.
5. SET/RST Button -- PRESS to start countdown. When the

timer reaches 0, it will staft to count up as display flashes for
15 seconds.
NOTE
While FLT or ET are displayed, the active frequency on

the left side of the window may be changed, by using
the frequency selector knobs, without any effect on the
stored standby frequency or the other modes.
s6-10 Feb 3197

ADF OPERATION NOTES:
ERRONEOUS ADF BEARING DUE TO RADIO FREOUENCY

PHENOMENA:
ln the U.S., the FCC, which assigns AM radio frequencies,

occasionally will assign the same frequency to more than one
station in an area. Certain conditions, such as Night Effect, may
cause signals from such stations to overlap. This should be taken
into consideration when using AM broadcast station for navigation.
Sunspots and atmospheric phenomena may occasionally distort

reception so that signals from two stations on the same frequency
will overlap. For this reason, it is always wise to make positive
identification of the station being tuned, by switching the function
selector to ANT and listening for station call letters.
ELECTRICAL STORMS:
ln the vicinity of electrical storms, an ADF indicator pointer tends

to swing from the station tuned toward the center of the storm.
NIGHT EFFECT:
This is a disturbance particularly strong just after sunset and just

after dawn. An ADF indicator pointer may swing erratically at these
times. lf possible, tune to the most poweul station at the lowest
frequency. lf this is not possible, take the average of pointer
oscillations to determine relatve station bearing.
MOUNTAIN EFFECT:
Radio waves reflecting from the surface of mountains may cause

the pointer to fluctuate or show an erroneous bearing. This should
into account when taking bearings over mountainoust
,b"e,,rjfl1""
COASTAL REFRACTION:
Radio waves may be refracted when passing from land to sea or

when moving parallel to the coastline. This also should be taken
into account.
Dec 1/97 s6-11

SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

externally mounted antenna or related external antennas, will result
s6-12 Feb 3/97

ATsxlron Comparry

CESSNA MODEL 1825

SUPPLEMENT 8
WINTERIZATION KIT
uember of GAMA
Q
copyR,cHr @ 1ee7
3 Fgbru ary 1997
wcHrrA,KANsAs,usA Revision 1 - 15 November 2000
182sPHUs-sB-01 Sg_1
SUPPLEMENT 8
WINTERIZATION KIT

1 Nov.15,2000
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
Title (S8-1) Nov 15/00

S8-2 Nov 15/00
S8-3 Feb 3/97
S8-4 Feb 3197

Airplane
s8-2 Nov 15/00

MODEL 182S SUPPLEMENT 8. FAA APPROVED
SUPPLEMENT
WINTERIZATION KIT
SECTION 1
GENERAL
The winterization kit consists of two cover plates (with placards)
which attach to the air intakes in the cowling nose cap, a placard
silk screened on the instrument panel, and insulation for the
crankcase breather line. This equipment should be installed for
operations in tempertues consistently below zO"F (-7"C). Once
installed, the crankcase breather insulation is approved for
permanent use in both hot and cold weather.
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
The following information must be presented in the form of
placards when the airplane is equipped with a winterization kit.
1. On each nose cap cover plate:
THIS PLATE NOT TO BE USED WHEN TEMPERATURE

EXCEEDS +20"F.
2. On the instrument panel near the EGT gauge:
WINTERIZATION KIT MUST BE REMOVED WHEN OUTSIDE

AIR TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 20"F.
Feb 3/97 s8-3

SECTION9-SUPPLEMENTS CESSNA
SECTION 3
the winterization kit is installed.
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
There is no change to the airplane normal procedures when the
winterization kit is installed.
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
There is no change to the airplane performance when the
winterization kit is installed.
s8-4 Feb 3/97

ATillEn Compny

CESSNA MODEL 182S

SUPPLEMENT 9
DAVTRON MODEL 803
cLocK/ o.A.T.
Jl Member of GAMA
copy.,cHr@1ee7 3 February 1997

'-!vcH,-K/fis'AI
Revision 1 - 15 November 2000
SUPPLEMENT 9
DAWRON MODEL 803 CLOCIO.A.T.
the Supplement. Pages which are atfected by the current

1 Nov. 15,2000
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
Title (S9-1) Nov 15/00 S9-4 Feb 3197

S9-2 Nov 15/00 S9-5 Nov 15/00
S9-3 Feb 3197 59-6 Feb 3i97

Airplane
s9-2 Nov 15/00

SUPPLEMENT
DIGITAL CLOCIIO.A.T.
SECTION 1
GENERAL
The Davtron Model 803 digital clock combines the features of a
clock, outside air temperature gauge (O.A.T.) and voltmeter in a
single unit. The unit is desgned for ease of operation wth a three
button control system. The upper button is used to control
sequencing between temperature and voltage. The lower two
buttons control reading and timing functions related to the digital
clock. Temperature and voltage functions are displayed in the upper
portion of the unit's LCD window, and clocl</timing functions are
displayed in the lower portion of the unit's LCD window.
The digital display features an internal light (back light) to

ensure good visibility under low cabin lighting conditions and at
night. The intensity of the back light is controlled by the PANEL LT
rheostat. ln addition, the display incorporates a test function which
allows checking that all elements of the display are operating.
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
There is no change to the airplane limitations when the digital
clocl</O.A.T. is installed.
SECTION 3
the digital clocl</O.A.T. is installed.
Feb3197 s9-3
UPPER
BUTTON
i\ o UPPER LCD
WINDOW
LOWER
5q:5q
SELECT CON
CONTROL
BUTTON BUTTON
Figure 1. Davtron Model 803 Digital Clock
sEcTloN 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
TEST MODE
The unit may be tested by holding the SELECT button down for
three seconds. Proper operation is indicated by the display 88:88
and activation of all four annunciators.
O.A.T. / VOLTMETER OPERATION
The upper portion of the LCD window is dedicated to O.A.T. and

voltmeter operations. The voltmeter reading is preselected upon
startup and is indicated by an "E" following the display reading.
Pushing the upper button will sequence the window from voltage to
fahrenheit ("F") to centigrade ("C"), and back again to voltage.
s9-4 Feb 3/97

CLOCK OPERATONS
The lower portion of the LCD window is dedicated to clock and
timing operations. Pushing the SELECT button will sequence the
window from universal time (UT) to local time (LT) to flight time (FT)
to elapsed time (ET), and back again to universal time. Pushing the
CONTROL button allows for timing functions within the four
SELECT menus. Setting procedures are as follows:
SETTING UNIVERSAL TIME
Use the SELECT button to select universal time (UT).
Simultaneously press both the SELECT and the CONTROL buttons
to enter the set mode. The tens of hours digit will start flashing. The
CONTROL button has full control of the flashing digit, and each
button push increments the digit. Once the tens of hours is sel the
SELECT button selects the next digit to be set. After the last digit
has been selected and set with the CONTROL button, a final push_
of the SELECT button exits the set mode. The lighted annuniiatorl
will resume its normal flashing, indicating the clock is running in
universaltime mode.
SETTING LOCAL TIME
Use the SELECT button to select localtime (LT). Simultaneously
press both the SELECT and lhe CONTROL buttons to enter the set
mode. The tens of hours digit will start flashing. The set operation is
lhe same as for UT, except that minutes are already synchronized
with the UT clock and cannot be set in local time.
FLIGHT TIME RESET
Use the SELECT button to select flight time (FT). Hold the
CONTROL button down for 3 seconds, or until 99:59 appears on
the display. Flight time will be zeroed upon release of the
CONTROL button.
SETTING FLIGHTTIME FLASHING ALARM
Use the SELECT button to select flight time (FI).
to enter the set mode. The tens of hours digit will staft flashing. The
set operation is the same as for UT. When actual flight time equals
the alarm time, the display will flash. Pressing either the SELECT or
CONTROL button will turn the flashing off and zero the alarm time.
Flight time is unchanged and continues counting.
Nov 15/00 s9-5

SETTING ELAPSED TIME COUNT UP
Use the SELECT button to select elapsed time (ET). Press the
CONTROL button and elapsed time will start counting. Elapsed time
counts up to 59 minutes, 59 seconds, and then switches to hours
and minutes. lt continues counting up to 99 hours and 59 minutes.
Pressng the CONTROL button again resets elapsed time to zero.
SETTING ELAPSED TIME COUNT DOWN
Use the SELECT button to select Elapsed Time (ET).

to enter the set mode. The tens of hours digit wll start flashing. The
set operation is the same as for UT, and a count down time can be
set from a maximum of 59 minutes and 59 seconds. Once the last
digit is set, pressing the SELECT button exits the set mode and the
clock is ready to stad the countdown. Pressing the CONTROL
button now will start the countdown. When countdown reaches zero,
the display will flash. Pressing either the SELECT or CONTROL
button will reset the alarm. After reaching zero, the elapsed time
counter will count up.
BUTTON SELECT DISABLE
When there is no airplane power applied to the unit, the

CONTROL and SELECT buttons are disabled.
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
equipment is installed. However, installation of this OAT probe will
result in a minor reduction in cruise performance.
s9-6 Feb 3/97

ATodon Company

CESSNA MODEL 1825

SUPPLEMENT 1O
BENDTX/K|NG KLN 8e (VFR) GLOBAL

POSITIONING SYSTEM
Member ofGAMA
Q
copy',GHr@.se7 3 February 1997
CESSNA AIBCRAFT COMPANY
wrcHrrA,KANsAS,usA Revision 1 - 15 November 2000
182sPHus-slo-oi 510_1
SUPPLEMENT 1O - FAA APPROVED MODEL 182S
SUPPLEMENT 1O
BENDT)(/KTNG KLN 89 (VFR)

GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM

1 Nov. 15,2000
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
Title (S10-1) Nov 15/00

S10-2 Nov 15/00
510-3 Nov 15/00
S10-4 Feb 3/97

Airplane
Unit Revision Incorporated
s10-2 Nov 15/00

MODEL 182S SUPPLEMENT 1O - FAA APPROVED
SUPPLEMENT
BENDT)UKTNG KLN 8e (VFR) |
GLOBAL POSTTTONTNG SYSTEM I
SECTION 1
GENERAL
The Bendix/King KLN 89 is a navigation system based on the
Global Positioning Satellite network. lt contains a database cartridge
which may be updated by subscrption. Complete descriptive
material on the KLN 89 may be found in the Bendix/King KLN 89
Pilot's Gude supplied with the unit. This pilot guide must be
available during operation of the KLN 89 unit.
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
Use of the KLN 89 is limited to VFR operations only. The
following information must be presented in the form of placards
when the airplane is equipped with a KLN 89 unit:
1. On the instrument panel near the KLN 89 unit:
GPS NOT APPROVED

FOR IFR NAVIGATION
SECTION 3
the KLN 89 GPS is installed.
Nov 15/00 s10-3

SECTIONg-SUPPLEMENTS CESSNA
SUPPLEMENT 1O - FAA APPROVED MODEL 1825
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
There is no change to basic airplane normal operating

procedures with the KLN 89 GPS installed.
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
There is no change to the airplane peormance when the KLN

89 GPS is installed. However, installation of an externally-mounted
antenna or related external antennas will result in a minor reduction
in cruise performance.
s10-4 Feb 3/97

ATstron Compny

CESSNA MODEL 182S

AIRPLANE SERIALS
18280001 THRU 18280164
SUPPLEMENT 11
BENDI)(/KING KAP 140

2 AXIS AUTOPILOT
J) MemberofGAMA
copy.,cHr@'ee7 3 February 1997

wrcHrrA,KANsAs,usA Revision 3 - 15 November 2000
ls2sPHugsir-os 51 1_l
SUPPLEMENT 11 . FAAAPPROVED MODEL 182S
SUPPLEMENT 11
BENDIVKING KAP 140 2 AXIS AUTOPILOT

1 July 18, 1997
2 Dec.1.1997
3 Nov. 15,2000
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
Title (S11-1) Nov 15/00 s11-15 July 18197

s11-2 Nov 15/00 s11-16 July'18/97
s11-3 Feb 3/97 s11-17 July 18/97
511-4 (blank) Feb 3/97 s1 1-18 July 18/97
s11-5 Dec 1197 s11-19 Feb 3/97
s11-6 Dec 1197 sl1-20 Nov 15/00
s11-7 Dec 1197 s11-21 Nov 15/00
s11-8 Dec 1/97 s11-22 Feb 3197
s11-9 Feb 3/97 s11-23 Feb 3/97
s11-10 Feb 3197 s11-24 Feb 3197
s11-11 Feb 3/97 s11-25 Feb 3/97
s11-12 Feb 3/97 s11-26 Feb 3197
s11-13 Dec 1197 sl1-27 Feb 3/97
sl1-14 July 18/97 s11-28 Feb 3/97
s11-2 Nov 15/00

SUPPLEMENT 11
BENDIVKING KAP14O 2- AXIS AUTOPILOT

SERVICE BULLETIN CONFIGURATON LIST
The following is a list of Seruice Bulletins that are applicable to
Number rire *=T5#* #oo,"ron ffi
Feb 3/97 51 1-3l(S1 1-4 Blank)

SUPPLEMENT
BENDDUKING KAP 140
2 AXIS AUTOPILOT
SECTION 1
GENERAL
The KAP 140 2 Axis Autopilot provides the pilot with the following
features: Vertical Speed mode (VS); Altitude hold (ALT);Wing Level
(ROL); Heading select (HDG); Approach (APR); ILS coupling to
Localizer (LOC) and Glideslope (GS); and backcourse (REV) modes
of operation.
The KAP 140 2 Axis Autopilot has an electric trim system which
provides autotrim during autopilot operation and manual electric trim
(MET) for the pilot when the autopilot is not engaged. The electric
trim system is designed to fail safe for any single inflight trim
malfunction. Trim faults are visually and aurally annunciated.
A lockout device prevents autopilot or MET engagement until the

system has successfully passed preflight self test. Automatic
preflight self-test begins with initial power application to the
autopilot.
The following conditions will cause the Autopilot to automaticattyl

disengage:
A. Power failure.
B. lnternal Flight Control System failure.
ec 1197 s11-5
C. Pitch accelerations in excess of +1.49 or less than 0.69 will

cause the autopilot to disengage.
D. Flagged turn and bank gyro.
E. Computer autopilot monitor that detects either the R (ROLL)

or P (PITCH) axis annunciator.
Activation of AP DISC/TRIM INT control wheel switch will also

disconnect the autopilot.
The AVIONICS MASTER switch supplies power to the avionics

bus bar of the radio circuit breakers and the autopilot circuit
breaker. The AVIONICS MASTER switch also serves as an
emergency AP/MET shutoff .
The airplane MASTER switch function is unchanged and can be

used in an emergency to shut off electrical power to all flight control
systems while the problem is isolated.
The following circuit breakers are used to protect the KAP 140
2-Axis Autopilot:
LABEL FUNCTIONS
I AUTO Supplies power to the KC 140 Computer and

I PILOT the autopilot pitch, roll and pitch trim seruos.
WARN Supplies separate power for autopilot alefting on

the ship's annunciator Panel'
s1 1-6 Dec 1197

MODEL 182S SUPPLEMENT 1 1 - FAA APPROVED
NAV/COMM 1
r-----J
ELEVATOR AND
ELEVATOR TRIM
fi|$flerwnron
ANNUNCIATOR
PANEL
DIRECTIONAL AUTOPILOT
GYRO
HE nLT 'ef "zm c/B
Y1 2-3'4 v i' b
tv b - ..jQj|@
*oto*/ - 11-y-13-
oB,|.o,,
Figure 1. Bendir/King 2-Axis KAP 140 Autopilot Schematic
(Sheet 1 of 5)
Dec 1197 s11-7

SUPPLEMENT 1 1 - FAA APPROVED MODEL 182S
HE ELT i \N
@WEE@E
1. PITCH AXIS (P) ANNUNCIATOR When illuminated,

indicates failure of pitch axis and will either disengage the
autopilot or not allow engagement of the pitch axis.
2. AUTOPILOT ENGAGE/DISENGAGE (AP) BUTTON - When
of AP button press. The button may be used to disengage the

autopilot.
3. ROLL AXIS (R) ANNUNCIATOR -- When illuminated, indicates

failure of the roll axis and disengage the autopilot.
4. HEADING (HDG) MODE SELECTOR BUTTON When

pushed, will select the Heading mode, which commands the
airplane to turn to and maintain the heading selected by the
heading be
selected to
the new en
HDG an ge
the autopilot
Figure 1. Bendix/King 2-Axis KAP 140 Autopilot, Operating

Controls and lndicators (Sheet 2 of 5)
s11-8 Dec 1197

5. NAVIGATION (NAV) MODE SELECTOR BUTTON -- When

pushed, The mode provides
automat VOR, LOC, or GPS
signals the #1 CDl. NAV
mode is ion tracking.
6. APPROACH (APR) MODE SELECTOR BUTTON -- When
7. BAOK COURSE APPROACH (REV) MODE BUTTON -- This

button is active only when the couled navigation receiver s
tuned to a LOC/ILS frequency. When pushed will select the
Back Course approach mode. This mode functions identically
to the approach mode except that the autopilot response to
LOC signals is reversed. Glideslope is locked out with REV
mode.
8. ALTITUDE HOLD (ALT) MODE SELECT BUTTON -- When

pushed, will select the altitude hold mode. This mode
provides capture and tracking of the selected altitude. The
selected altitude is the airplane altitude at the moment the ALT
button is pressed. lf the ALT button is pressed with an
established VS rate present, there will
be approximately a
10% (of VS rate) overshoot, with the airplane returned
positively to the selected altitude. This button may be used to
engage the autopilot.
9. VERTICAL SPEED (UP/DN) MODE BUTTONS -- The action of

these buttons are dependent upon the veftical mode present
when pressed. lf VS mode is active (AP plus any lateral
mode) and the UP button is pressed, the autopilot will modify
the displayed VS command (FPM) in the up direction. Single
momentary cycles on either the UP or DN button will
increment the VS command by 100 FPM per cycle. When
either button is continuously held in, it will modify the vertical
speed command by 300 fpm per second.

Feb 3/97 s11-9

lf ALT mode s active, pressing the UP/DN buttons will modify

the captured altitude by 20 feet per cycle, or if held
continuously will command the airplane up or down at the rate
of 500 FPM, synchronizing the ALT reference to the actual
airplane altitude upon button release.
10. AUTOPILOT CIRCUIT BREAKER -- A S-amp circuit breaker

supplying 28 VDC to the KAP 140 system.
11. WARN CIB -- Power to the autopilot disconnect horn and the
annunciator panel.
12. AUTOPTLOT DTSCONNECT (A/P DISC TRIM INT) SWITCH --

When depressed will disengage the autopilot and interrupt
electric trim power. An autopilot disconnect will be
annunciated by a continuous 2 second tone accompanied by a
flashing "AP" displayed on the autopilot computer.
13. MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM SWITCHES (MET) - When both

switches are pressed in the same direction, will activate pitch
trim in the selected direction. lf only one switch is moved, the
trim system will not operate. lf only the right half of the MET
switch assembly is held for 3 seconds, the trim monitoring
system will detect a switch failure resulting in a !
annunciation on the autopilot display and the disabling of the
electric trim system. Autopilot power will have to be cycled to
clear the fault. Use of manual electric trim during autopilot
operation will disengage the autopilot.
14. OMNI BEARING SELECT KNOB (OBS) -- Selects the desired

course to be tracked by the autopilot. (Note: The HDG bug
must also be positioned to the proper course to capture and
track the selected radial or desired track).

s1 1-10 Feb 3/97

15. HEADING SELECT KNOB (HDG) -- Positions the heading bug

on the compass card. Note that the position of the heading
bug also provides course datum to the autopilot when tracking
in NAV, APR, or REV (BC) modes. This is in addition to its
more intuitive use in the HDG mode.
16. PITCH TRIM (PT) Annunciator -- lndicates the direction of

required pitch trim. Wth electric trim installed, the
annunciation simply provides status as to the autopilot's
request for autotrim. A solid indication represents the lowest
demand level for trim; whereas a flashing annunciator implies
a greater demand. A solid without an arrowhead is an
indication of a pitch trim fault. Refer to the EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES for proper response to a pitch trim fault.
17. PITCH TRIM Annuncation -- llluminates whenever the

automated preflight self test detects a pitch trim fault or a
continuous monitoring system detects a pitch trim fault in
flight. Refer to the EMERGENCY PROCEDURES for proper
response to a pitch trim fault.

Feb 3/97 s11-11

sEcoN 2
LIMITATIONS
The following autopilot limitations must be adhered to:
1. The entire preflight test procedure outlined under Section 4,

paragraph A of this supplement, including steps 1 through 7,
must be successfully completed prior to each flight. Use of
the autopilot or manual electric trim system is prohibited prior
to completion of these tests.
2. During autopilot operation, a pilot with seat belt fastened must

be seated at the left pilot position.
3. The autopilot must be OFF during takeoff and landing.
4. The system is approved for Category I operation only

(Approach mode selected).
5. Autopilot maximum airspeed limitation -- 160 KIAS.

Autopilot minimum airspeed limitation -- 80 KIAS,
6. Flaps must be up with the autopilot engaged.

7. The autopilot must be disengaged below 200 feet AGL during
approach operations and below 800 feet AGL for all other
phases of flight.
8. Overriding the autopilot to change pitch or roll attitude is

prohibited. (Disengage with AP/DISCRIM INT or AP select
button.)
9. The AUTOPILOT circuit breaker must be pulled following any

inflight illumination of the red "PITCH TRIM" warning light, but
only after first completing the Emergency Procedures (Section
3, paragraph 1.). The manual electric trim and autopilot
autotrim systems will be disabled with the AP/TRIM circuit
breaker pulled.
s1 1-12 Feb 3197

PLACARDS
The following information must be displayed in the form
composite or individual placards.
1. Near the throttle:
CAUTION:
POWER CHANGES IN EXCESS

OF 3 ln HG MAN PRESS/SEC
IN TURBULENCE WITH
AUTOPILOT ENGAGED CAN
CAUSE AUTOPILOT UPSET.
NOTE
Autopilot upset can result in a rapid pitch up or pitch down

of the airplane. lf this condition occurs while making power
change in turbulence, firmly grasp the control wheel and
maintain airplane control. Press and hold A/P DISC switch
throughout recovery. Once the airplane is stabilized, the
autopilot may be re-engaged as described in Section 4,
Normal Procedures.
2. Above the flap control handle/indicator:
FLAPS MUST BE UP WITH THE AUTOPILOT ENGAGED
SECTION 3
The four step procedure listed under paragraph A should be
among the basic airplane emergency procedures that are committed
to memory. lt is important that the pilot be proficient in
accomplishing allfour steps without reference to this manual.
Dec 1197 s11-13

I l. ln case of Autopilot, Autopilot Trim, or Manual Electric Trim

I malfunction (accomplish ltems A and B simultaneously):
A. Airplane Control Wheel -- GRASP FIRMLY and regain
aircraft control.
B. A/P DISC/TRIM INT Switch PRESS and HOLD
throughout recovery.
C. AIRCRAFT -- RETRIM Manually as Needed.
D. AUTOPILOT Circuit Breaker -- PULL.
NOTE
The Avionics Master Switch may be used as an alternate
means of removing all power from the autopilot and electric
trim systems. lf necessary perform seps 1A through 1C
above, then turn the Avionics Master Switch OFF before
locating and pulling the Autopilot Circuit Breaker. Turn the
Avionics Master Switch on as soon as possible to restore
power to all other avionics equipment. Primary attitude,
airspeed, direclional compass, and altitude instruments will
remain operational at alltimes.
[, mnrurruc
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO RE.ENGAGE THE
AUTOPILOT FOLLOWING AN AUTOPILOT,
AUTOTRIM, OR MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM
MALFUNCTION UNTIL THE CAUSE FOR THE
MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN CORRECTED.
Maximum Altitude losses due to autopilot malfunction:
CONFIGURATION ALT. LOSS
Cruise, Climb, Descent 250 ft.

Maneuvering 100 ft.
APPR 50ft.

are presented to supply additional
inf of providing the pilot with a more
co e recommended course of action for
an emergency situation.
s1 1-14 July 18/97

1. An autopilot or autotrim malfunction occurs when there is an

uncommanded deviation in the airplane flight path or when
there is abnormal control wheel or trim wheel motion. ln some
cases, and especially for autopilot trim, there may be little to
no airplane motion, yet the red PITCH TRIM annunciator may
illuminate and an alert tone may sound.
The primary concern in reacting to an autopilot or autopilot
trim malfunction, or to an automatic disconnect of the
autopilot, is in maintaining control of the airplane. lmmediately
grasp the control wheel and press and hold down the A/P
DISCR|M INT switch throughout the recovery. Manipulate
the controls as required to safely maintain operation of the
airplane within all of its operating limitations. Elevator trim
should be used manually as needed to relieve control forces.
Locate and pullthe AUTOPILOT circuit breaker on the right
hand circuit breaker panel to completely disable the autopilot
system.
2. A manual electric trim malfunction may be recognized by the
illumination of a red PITCH TRIM annunciator accompanied
by an alert tone, or by unusual trim wheel motions with the
autopilot mode OFF without pilot actuation of the manual
electric trim switches. As with an autopilot malfunction, the
first concern following a manual electric trim malfunction is
regaining control of the airplane. Grasp the control wheel
firmly and press and hold down the A/P DISC/TRIM INT
switch. Locate and pull the AUTOPILOT circuit breaker on the
right hand breaker panel.
3. Note that the emergency procedure for any malfunction is
essentially the same: immediately grasp the control wheel
and regain airplane control while pressing and holding the A/P
DISCR|M INT switch down, and retrim the airplane as
needed. After these steps have been accomplished secure
the autopilot electric trim system by pulling the autopilot circuit
breaker. As with any other airplane emergency procedure, it
is important that the 4 steps of the Autopilot/Electric Trim
Emergency Procedures located on Page 13 of this supplement
are committed to memory.
July 18/97 s11-15 I

4. The AVIONICS MASTER switch may be used as required to

remove all power from the Autopilot and Electric Trim systems
while the circuit breaker is located and pulled. Return the
AVIONICS MASTER switch to the ON position as soon as
possible. With the AVIONICS MASTER switch off, all flight
instruments will remain operational; however, communications,
navigation, and identification equipment will be inoperable,
5. lt is important that all portions of the autopilot and electrc trim
system are preflight tested prior to each flight in accordance
with the procedures published herein in order to assure their
integrity and continued safe operation during flight.
L wannrno
DO NOT RESET AUTOPILOT CIRCUIT BREAKER
FOLLOWING AN AUTOPILOT/AUTOTRIM OR
MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM MALFUNCTION UNTIL
THE CAUSE FOR THE MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN
CORRECTED.
P
A flashing i annunciator with an up or down arrow head on the
face of the autopilot computer.
P
A flashing i auto trim annunciation on the face of the autopilot
indicates a fafure of the auto trim function to relieve pitch servo
loading in a timely manner. This condition should be temporary.
P
1. FLASHING i ANNUNCIATION -- OBSERVE aircraft pitch
behavior. lf pitch behavior is satisfactory, wait 5-10 seconds
for the annunciation to stop.
2. lf annunciation continues, Airplane Control Wheel -- GRASP
FIRMLY, disengage the autopilot and check for an out of pitch
trim condition manually retrim as required.
3. AUTOPILOT OPERATION -- CONTINUE if satisfied that the
out of trim indication was temporary. DISCONTINUE if
evidence indicates a failure of the auto trim function.
A red P or R on the face of the autopilot computer.
1. A red P is an indication that the pitch axis of the autopilot has

been disabled and cannot be engaged. DO NOT ENGAGE
NTO A ROLL AXIS ONLY SYSTEM.
I .,,-ru July 18/97

NOTE
lf the red P lamp was the result of some abnormal
accelerations on the airplane, the annunciation should be
extinguished within approximately one minute and normal
use of the autopilot will be reestablished.
2. A red R is an indication that the roll axis of the autopilot has
been disabled and cannot be engaged. The autopilot cannot
be reengaged.
Flashing mode annunciation in the display of the autopilot computer.
1. Flashing HDG -- lndicates a failed heading. PRESS HDG
button to terminate flashing. ROL will be displayed.
2. Flashing NAV, APR or REV -- Usually an indication of a
flagged navigation source. PRESS the NAV, APR or REV
button to terminate flashing. ROL will be displayed. (Select a
valid navigation source.)
NOTE
A flashing NAV, APR or REV annunciation can also be
caused by a failed heading valid input.
3. Flashing GS -- lndication of a flagged glideslope. (GS will
rearm automatically if a valid GS signal is received.)
NOTE
To continue tracking the localizer, observe the appropriate
minimums for a nonprecision approach. (Press ALT twice in
rapid succession to terminate the flashing. Control the pitch
axis in the default VS mode.)
NOTE
At the onset of mode annunciator flashing, the autopilot has
already reverled to a default mode of operation, i.e., ROL
and or VS mode. An immediate attempt to reengage to lost
mode may be made if the offending navigation, glideslope
or compass flag has cleared.
EXCEPTION
The HDG annunciation will flash for 5 seconds upon

selection of NAV, APR, or REV modes to remind the pilot to
set the HDG bug for use as course datum.
July 18/97 s11-17 |

SUPPLEMENT 1 1 - FAA APPROVED MODEL 182S
Effects of instrument losses upon autopilot operation:
1. Loss of the artificial horizon -- no effect on the autopilot.
2. Loss of the turn coordinator -- autopilot inoperative.

3. Loss of the DG (Directional Gyro)-- The directional gyro does
not provide any system valid flag. lf the DG fails to function
properly the autopilot heading and navigation mode will not
function correctly. Under these conditions, the only useable
lateralmode is ROL.
sEcTroN 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A. PREFLTGHT (PERFORM pRtOR TO EACH FLTGHT):
1. AVIONICS MASTER -- ON.
2. POWER APPLICATION AND SELF TEST -- A self test is

performed upon power application to the computer. This test
is a sequence of internal checks that validate proper system
operation prior to allowing normal system operation. The
sequence is indicated by "p1" with an increasing number for
the sequence steps. Successful completion of seff test is
identified by all display segments being illuminated (Display
Test), external "Pitch Trim" (4,/C System Annunciator Panel)
being illuminated, and the disconnect tone sounding.
NOTE
Upon applying power to the autopilot, the red P warning on

the face of the autopilot may lluminate indicatng that the
pitch axis cannot be engaged. This condition should be
temporary, lasting approximately 30 seconds. The P will
extinguish and normal operation will be available.
s11-18 Feb 3/97

[,wnnrrruc
IF PITCH TRIM LIGHT STAYS ON, THEN THE
AUTOTRIM DID NOT PASS PREFLIGHT TEST.
THE AUTOPILOT CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST BE
PULLED. MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM AND AUTO.
PILOT ARE INOPERATIVE,
3. MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM -- TEST as follows: Press both

halves of the split Manual Electric Trim (MET) switches to the
nose down position, verify that the trim wheel and the trim tab
position indicator are moving in the down direction. Repeat
test for the nose up direction.
Press MET for nose up lrim, press and hold the AP

DISC/TRIM INT switch, verify that both the trim wheel and
indicator are not moving, release the AP DISC / TRIM INT
switch while still holding MET trim up, the trim wheel and
indicator should continue to move in the nose up direction.
4. AUTOPILOT -- ENGAGE by pressing AP button.

5. FLIGHT CONTROLS -- MOVE fore, aft, left and right to verify
the autopilot can be overpowered.
6. A/P DISC/TRIM INT Switch PRESS. Verify that the

autopilot disconnects.
7, TRIM -- SET to take off position manually
Feb 3/97 s1 1-19

L wanrurno
THE PILOT IN COMMAND MUST CONTINUOUSLY
MONITOR THE AUTOPLOT WHEN IT IS
ENGAGED, AND BE PREPARED TO
DISCONNECT THE AUTOPILOT AND TAKE
IMMEDIATE CORRECTIVE ACTION - INCLUDING
MANUAL CONTROL OF THE AIRPLANE AND/OR
PERFORMANCE OF EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
IF AUTOPILOT OPERATION IS NOT AS
EXPECTED OR IF AIRPLANE CONTROL IS NOT
MAINTAINED.
[, wnnnnc
DURING ALL AUTOPILOT COUPLED OPER.
ATIONS, THE PILOT IN COMMAND MUST USE
PROPER AUTOPILOT COMMANDS AND USE THE
PROPER ENGINE POWER TO ENSURE THAT
THE AIRPLANE IS MAINTAINED BETWEEN 80
AND 160 KIAS, AND DOES NOT EXCEED OTHER
BASIC AIRPLANE OPERATING LIMITATIONS.
NOTE
Autopilot tracking performance will be degraded in turbu-

lence.
NOTE
Avoid abrupt power changes at low indicated airspeeds with

the autopilot engaged.
1. BEFORETAKEOFF:
a. A/P DISC/TRM INT Switch -- PRESS.
s11-20 Nov 15/00

2. AFTERTAKEOFF:
a. Elevator Trim -- VERIFY or SET to place the airplane in

trimmed condition prior to Autopilot engagement.
NOTE
Engaging the autopilot into a mistrim condition may cause

unwanted attitude changes and a "TRIM FAIL"
annunciation.
b. AP Button -- PRESS. Note ROL and VS annunciator on.

no other modes are selected the autopilot will operate
the ROL and vertical speed modes.
1, wnnrurruc
WHEN OPERATING AT OR NEAR THE BEST
RATE OF CLIMB AIRSPEED, AT CLIMB POWER
SETTINGS, AND USING VERTICAL SPEED
MODE, IT IS EASY TO DECELERATE TO AN
AIRSPEED WHERE CONTINUED DECREASES IN
AIRSPEED WILL RESULT IN A REDUCED RATE
OF CLIMB. CONTINUED OPERATION IN
VERTCAL SPEED MODE COULD RESULT IN A
STALL.
WHEN OPERATING AT OR NEAR THE MAXIMUM

AUTOPILOT SPEED, IT WILL BE NECESSARY TO
REDUCE POWER IN ORDER TO MANTAN THE
DESIRED RATE OF DESCENT AND NOT EXCEED
THE MAXIMUM AUTOPILOT SPEED.
Nov 15/00 s11-21

[, wnnrtne
DO NOT HELP THE AUTOPILOT OR HAND.FLY
THE AIRPLANE WITH THE AUTOPILOT
ENGAGED AS THE AUTOPILOT WILL RUN THE
PITCH TRIM TO OPPOSE CONTROL WHEEL
MOVEMENT. A MISTRIM OF THE AIRPLANE,
WITH ACCOMPANYING LARGE ELEVATOR
CONTROL FORCES, MAY RESULT IF THE PILOT
MANIPULATES THE CONTROL WHEEL
MANUALLY WHILE THE AUTOPILOT IS
ENGAGED.
3. CLIMB OR DESCENT:
a. Using VerticalTrim:
1) VERTICAL SPEED Control -- PRESS either the UP or DN
button to select aircraft vertical speed within the limits of
+2000 ft./min.
2) VERTICAL SPEED Control -- RELEASE when desired
vertical speed is displayed. The autopilot will maintain the
displayed vertical speed.
4. ALTTTUDE (ALT) HOLD:

a. ALT Hold Selector Button -- PRESS. Note ALT hold
annunciator ON. Autopilot will maintain the selected
altitude.
NOTE
It isrecommended by the FAA (4C00-248) lo use basic

"PITCH ATTITUDE HOLD" mode during operation in severe
turbulence. However, since this autopilot does not use the
attitude gyro as a pitch reference, it is recommended that
the autopilot be disconnected and that the airplane be flown
by hand in severe turbulence.
s11-22 Feb 3197

b. Change altitudes:
1) Using Vertical Speed (Recommended for altitude
changes less than 100 ft.)
a) VERTICAL SPEED Control -- PRESS and HOLD

either the UP or DN button. Vertical Speed will seek
a rate of change of about 500 fpm.
b) VERTICAL SPEED Control RELEASE when

desired altitude is reached. The autopilot will
maintain the desired altitude.
NOTE
As an alternative, press either the UP or DN button with a

succession of quick momentary presses programming either
an increase or decrease in the altitude preference at the
rate of 20 feet each time the button is depressed.
5. HEADING HOLD:
a. Heading Selector Knob -- SET BUG to desired heading.
b. HDG Mode Selector Button -- PRESS. Note HDG mode
annunciator ON. Autoplot will automatically turn the
aircraft to the selected heading.
NOTE
Aircraft heading may change in ROL mode due to

turbulence.
c. Heading Selector Knob -- MOVE BUG to the desired

heading. Autopilot will automatically turn the aircraft to the
new selected heading.
Feb 3/97 sl1-23

6. NAV COUPLING:
a. OBS Knob -- SELECT desired course.
b. NAV Mode Selector Button -- PRESS. Note NAVnnu
annunciated.
c. Heading Selector Knob -- ROTATE BUG to agree with OBS

course.
NOTE
When NAV is selected, the autopilot will flash HDG for 5

seconds to remind the pilot to reset the HDG bug to the
OBS course. lF HDG mode was in use at the time of NAV
button selection, a 45" intercept angle will then be
automatically established based on the position of the bug.
NOTE
All angle intercepts compatible with radar vectors may be

accomplished by selecting ROL mode PRIOR to pressing
the NAV button. The HDG bug must still be positioned to
agree with the OBS course to provide course datum to the
autopilot when using a DG (Directional Gyro).
1) lf the D-Bar is greater than 2 to 3 dots: the autopilot

will annunciate NAVlRul; when the computed capture
point is reached the ARM annunciator will go out and
the selected course will be automatically captured
and tracked.
2) lf the D-Bar is less mode

will disengage upo NAV
annunciator will i /track
sequence will automatically begin.
s11-24 Feb 3197

7. APPROACH (APR) COUPLING: (To enable glideslope

coupling on an ILS and more precise tracking on instrument
approaches).
a. OBS Knob -- SELECT desired approach course. (For a

localizer, set it to serue as a memory aid.)
b. APR Mode Selector Button -- PRESS. Note APR ARM

annunciated.
c. Heading Selector Knob - ROTATE BUG to agree with

desired approach.
NOTE
When APR is selected, the autopilot will flash HDG for 5

approach course. lf HDG mode was in use at the time of
APR button selection, a 45" intercept angle will then be
NOTE

the APR button. The HDG bug must still be positioned to
agree with the desired approach course to provide course
datum to the autopilot when using a DG.
1) lf the D-Bar is greaterthan 2 to 3 dots: the autopilot will

annr'unciate APRARM; when the computed capture point
is reached the ARM annunciator will go out and the
selected course will be automatically captured and
tracked.
2) lf the D-Bar is less than 2 to 3 dots: the HDG mode will

disengage upon selecting APR mode; the APR
annunciator will illuminate and the capture/track
Feb 3197 s11-25

8. BACK COURSE (REV) APPROACH COUPLING (i.e., reverse

localizer):
a. OBS Knob -- SELECT the localizer course to the front

course inbound (as a memory aid).
b. REV Mode Selector Button -- PRESS.

c. Heading Selector Knob -- ROTATE BUG to the heading
corresponding to the localizer front course inbound.
NOTE
When REV is selected, the autopilot will flash HDG for 5
seconds to remind the to reset the HDG bug to the
localizer ,IBOUND heading. lf heading
of REV button selection, a 45"
intercept angle will then be automatically established based
on the position of the bug.
NOTE

the REV button. The HDG bug must still be positioned to
the localizer heading to
provide course um to a DG.
1) lf the D-Bar is greater than 2 to 3 dots: the autopilot will

annunciate REVnnu; when the computed capture point
is reached the ARM annunciator will go out and the
selected back course will be automatically captured and
tracked.
2) lf the D-Bar is less than 2 to 3 dots: the HDG mode will

disengage upon selecting REV mode; the REV
s11-26 Feb 3/97

9. GLIDESLOPE COUPLING
a. APR Mode - ENGAGED. Note GS ARM annunciated.
NOTE
Glideslope coupling is inhibited when operating in NAV or

REV modes. With NAV 1 selected to a valid lLS, glideslope
ARM and coupling occurs automatically in the APR mode
when tracking a localizer.
b. At Glideslope centering -- note ARM annunciator goes out.
NOTE
Autopilot can capture glideslope from above or below the

beam.
10. MISSED APPROACH

a. NP DISC/TRIM INTER Switch - PRESS to disengage AP.
b. MISSED APPROACH. EXECUTE.
c. AP Button -- Atter aircraft is in trim, PRESS for autopilot
operation if desired.
NOTE
lf tracking the ILS course outbound as paft of the missed

approach procedure is desired, use the NAV mode to
prevent inadvertent GS coupling.
Feb 3/97 s11-27

SUPPLEMENT 11 - FAAAPPROVED MODEL 1825
11. BEFORE LANDING
a. NP DISC/TRIM INT Switch -- PRESS to disengage AP.
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
There is no change to the airplane pedormance when the
- KAP140 2-Axis Autopilot is installed.
s11-28 Feb 3197

ATodron Company

CESSNA MODEL 1825

SUPPLEMENT 12
CANADIAN
SUPPLEMENT
1) u.-"rofGAMA
copy',GHr @1se7 1 1 July 1997

CESSNA AIRCHAFT COMPANY
wrcurrn, xr,rss, Revision 1 - 15 November 2000
la2sPHus.st2-oj 512_1
APPROVED
SUPPLEMENT 12 - FAA MODEL 1825
SUPPLEMENT 12
CANADIAN SUPPLEMENT
0(Original) July 1 1, 1997

1 Nov. 15,2000
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
Title (512-1) Nov 15/00 S12-3 Nov 15/00

512-2 Nov 15/00 512-4 July 11/97

Airplane
s12-2 Nov 15/00

CESSNA SECTION9-SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT I
CANADIAN SUPPLEMENT
SECTION 1
GENERAL
This supplement is required for Canadian operation of Cessna
Model 182S.
sEciloN 2
LIMITATIONS
The following placard must be installed.
=UEL
lOOLIJ MIN. GRADE AVIATION GASOLINE
1OO
cAP.44.0 U.S. GAL. (166 LITRES) USABLE
cAP 32.5 U.S. GAL. (123 LITRES) USABLE
TO BOTTOM OF FILLER INDICATOR TAB
Nov 15/00 s12-3

SECTION 9-SUPPLEMENTS CESSNA
SECTION 3
used for Canadian operation.
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
There is no change to basic airplane normal operating

procedures when used for Canadian operation.
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
There is no change to the airplane performance when used for

Canadian operation.
s12-4 Jul11/97
ATdtEn Compny

CESSNA MODEL 182S

SUPPLEMENT 13
BENDIVKING KCS-ssA SLAVED COMPASS SYSTEM
wtTH Kt-5254
HORTZONTAL STTUATTON |ND|CATOR (HSt)
Memer ofGAMA
Q
coPYRtGHT @ 1999 15 January 1999
WCHITA, KANSAS, USA Revision 1 - 15 November 2000
E2SPHUS-S13-01
1
s13-1
SUPPLEMENT 13
BENDDUKING KCS.ssA SLAVED COMPASS
SYSTEM WITH KI.525A HORIZONTAL SITUATION
TNDToATOR (HSr)
0 (Original) Jan. 15, 1999

1 Nov. 15,2000
LOG OF EFFECTIVITY PAGE
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
Title (513-1) Nov 15/00 513-5 Jan. 15/99

513-2 Nov 15/00 513-6 Jan. 15/99
513-3 Nov 15/00 513-7 Jan. 15/99
Sl3-4 Jan.15/99 S13-8 Jan.15/99

Airplane
Unit Revision Incorporated
Number Title Effectivitv lncorporatlon ln Airplane
s13-2 Nov 15/00

SUPPLEMENT 1 3
BENDI)(/KING KCS-554 SLAVED COMPASS
SYSTEM WITH KI.525A HORIZONTAL SITUATION
TNDTCATOR (HSl)
SECTION 1
GENERAL
The Bendix/King KCS-554 Slaved Compass System with Kl-
525A HSI lndicator is an additional navigation indicator option. The
KCS-554 compass system includes a slaving control and
compensator unit, magnetic slaving transmitter and a remote
directional gyro. The information obtained from the KCS-554
compass system is displayed on the Kl-5254 lndicator.
The panel-mounted Kl-5254 indicator combines the display

functions of both the standard Directional Gyro (Heading lndicator)
and the Course Deviation lndicator's VOF/LOC/Glideslope
information to provide the pilot with a single visual presentation of
the complete horizontal navigation situation.
This system also incorporates a slaving accessory and

compensator unit. This unit indicates any difference between the-
dispayed heading and the magnetic teading. Up deflectionl
indicates a clockwise error of the compass card. Down deflectionl
indicates a counterclockwise error of the compass card. Whenever
the aircraft is in a turn and the compass card rotates, it is normal
for this meter to show a full deflection to one side or the other.
Nov 15/00 s13-3

15 13 10
Figure 1. Horizontal Situation lndicator System (Sheet 1 ol2)

1. HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSl) -- Provides a
pictorial presentation of aircraft deviation relative to VOF/GPS
radials and localizer beams. lt also displays glide slope
deviations and gives heading reference with respect to
magnetic north. The gyro is remote-mounted and electric-
driven
2. NAV FLAG -- Flag is in view when the NAV receiver signal is

inadequate.
3. HEADING REFERENCE (LUBBER LINE) -- Magnetic heading

appears under this line when the compass card is slaved or
slewed to the aircraft's magnetic heading.
4. HEADING WARNING FLAG (HDG) -- When flag is in view, the

heading display is invalid.
5. COURSE SELECT POINTER -- lndicates VOFi/Localizer or

GPS course on the compass card. The selected VOR radial
or localizer heading remains set on the compass card when
the compass card rotates.
s13-4 Jan 15/99

6. TO/FROM INDICATOR -- lndicates direction of VOR station

relative to the selected course. Displays TO when a LOC
frequency is selected.
7. DUAL GLIDE SLOPE POINTERS -- Displays deviation of
airplane from an ILS glideslope. Full scale deflection of the
glideslope pointers represents *0.7 degrees. Pointers will be
out of view if an invalid glideslope signal is received.
8. GLIDE SLOPE SCALES -- lndicates displacement from glide
slope beam center. A glide slope deviation bar displacement
of 2 dots represents full-scale (0.7') deviation above or below
glide slope beam centerline.
9. HEADING SELECTOR KNOB (9 )-- Positions the heading
bug on compass card by rotating the heading selector knob.
The bug rotates with the compass card.
10. COMPASS CARD -- Rotates to display heading of airplane
with reference to lubber line on HSl.
1 1. COURSE SELECTOR KNOB tt - Positions the course
bearing pointer on the compass card by rotating the course
selector knob.
12. COURSE DEVIATION BAR (D-BAR) - The center poftion of
the omni bearing pointer moves laterally to pictorially indicate
the relationship of airplane to the selected course. lt indicates
degrees of angular displacement from VOR radials and
localizer beams, or displacement in nautical miles from GPS
desired course.
13. COURSE DEVIATION SCALE -- A course deviation bar
displacement of 5 dots represents full scale (VOR - 10o,
LOC = 2-1/2o, GPS = Snm enroute, GPS APB = .3nm)
deviation from beam centerline.
14. HEADING BUG -- Moved V (F ) knob to select desired
heading.
15. SYMBOLIC AIRCRAFT -- Provides pictorial presentation of the
airplane position and intercept angle relatve to selected VOR
Radial or localizer course.
Figure 1. Horizontal Situation lndicator System (Sheet 2 ol2)
Jan 15/99 s13-5

Figure 2. KA-s18 Slaving Accessory and Compensator Unit
1. KA-51B SLAVING ACCESSORY AND COMPENSATOR UNIT

-- Controls the KCS-554 Compass System.
2. MANUAUAUTOMATTC (FREE/SLAVE) COMPASS SLAVE

SWITCH -- Selects either the manual or automatic slaving
mode for the Compass System.
3. CW/CCW COMPASS MANUAL SLAVE SWITCH -- With the

manual/automatic compass slave switch in the FREE position,
allows manual compass card slaving in either the clockwise or
counterclockwise direction. The switch is spring loaded to the
center position.
4. SLAVING METER -- lndicates the difference between the

displayed heading and the magnetic heading. Up deflection
indicates a clockwise error of the compass card. Down
deflection indicates a counterclockwise error of the compass
card.
s13-6 Jan 15/99

SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
There is no change to the airplane limitations when this
instrument is installed.
SECTION 3
this instrument is installed.
sEciloN
4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
[, clunon
ELECTRICAL POWER MUST BE SUPPLIED TO
THIS INSTRUMENT FOR PROPER FUNCTIONING.
ABSENCE OF WHICH WILL RESULT IN
UNRELIABLE HEADING INFORMATION.
Normal procedures for operation of this system differ little from

those required for the more conventional Course Deviation
lndicators. However, several small differences are worth noting.
The rectilinear movement of the course deviation bar in

combination with the rotation of the compass card in response to
heading changes, provdes an intuitive picture of the navigaton
situation at a glance when tuned to an omni station. When tuned to
a localizer frequency, the course select pointer must be set to the
inbound front course for both front and back-course approaches to
retain th is pictorial present'-n.
Jan 15/99 s13-7

For normal procedures with autopilots, refer to the Autopilot

Supplements in the Supplement section of this handbook. A
description of course datum and autopilot procedures for course
datum are incorporated in the appropriate autopilot supplements.
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

instrument is installed.
s13-8 Jan 15/99

ATodren Compy

CESSNA MODEL 1825

AIRPLANES 8OOO1 AND ON
SUPPLEMENT 14
ARGENTINE SUPPLEMENT
J) Member of GAMA
coPYRrcHT @ r999
9 March 1999
WICHITA. KANSAS. USA s14-1
182SPHUS-S1l-00
SUPPLEMENT 14
the Supplement. Pages which arc affected by the current
0 (Original) March 9, 1999

LOG OF EFFECTIVITY
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
(514-1)
Title March g/99 514-7 March 9/99
514-2 March g/99 514-8 March 9/99
S14-3 March 9/99 514-9 March 9/99
514-4 March g/99 514-10 March 9/99
514-5 March 9/99 514-11 March 9/99
514-6 March g/99 514-12 blank March 9/99
SERVCE BULLETIN CONFGURATION LIST

this supplement. This list contains onfy those Service Bulletins
Airplane
Original lssue - 9 Mar 1999

ARGEMN AAPWE FUGHT MANUAL / 9 WCH 1S9
s14-2 Mar 9/99

SECTION 9 - SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 1825 SUPPLEMENT 14 - FAAAPPROVED
Pilot's Operating Handbook

and
Argentine Airplane Flight Manual
The Cessna Aircraft

Company
Model 182S
COPYBIGHTO 1999
The Cessna Aircraft Company
Wichita. Kansas USA
Q u" o.rofGAMA Original lssue - 9 March 1999

ARGEMINE AIRPNE FLIGfr MNUAL / 9 MARCH 1S9
Mar 9/99 s14-3

THIS MANUAL WAS PROVIDED FOR THE

AIRPLANE IDENTIFIED ON THE TITLE
PAGE ON
SUBSEQUENT REVISIONS SUPPLIED BY
THE CESSNA AIRCRAFT COMPANY
MUST BE PROPERLY INSERTED.
The Gessna Aircraft Company, Aircraft Division

ARGEMINE AIBPNE FUGH MNUAL / 9 MffiCH 1S9
s14-4 Mar 9/99

LOG OF REVISIONS
Revision
F
Number and Revised
Date Description of Revision
Revision 1 Allpages in Revision 1 were
(6t13te7) incorporated and thsi Argentine
Airplane Flight Manual was
provided in a current status at the
time of issuance, Subsequent
revisions and their affected pages
will be recorded at the time of
publication.

GEMINE AUNE FUGHT MUI / 9 MBCH 19
Mar 9/99 s14-5

SUPPLEMENT
sEciloN 1
GENERAL
This supplement is required for Argentine operation of Cessna
Model 182S.

ffiGENNNE ARPME ruGHT WUAL / 9 MARCH 19S
S14-6 Mar 9/99

SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
The following information must be displayed in the form of
composite or individual placards.
1. ln full view of the pilot: (The 'DAY-NIGHT-VFR-IFR" entry,

shown on the example below, will vary as the airplane is
equipped).
The markings and placards installed in this airplane contain

operating limitations which must be complied with when operating
this airplane in the Normal Category. Other operating limitations
which must be complied with when operating this airplane in this
category are contained in the Pilot's Operating Handbook and FAA
Approved Airplane Flight Manual.
No acrobatic maneuvers, including spins, approved.
Flight into known icing conditions prohibited.
This airplane is certified for the following flight operations as of

date of original airworthiness ceilificate:
DAY-NIGH-VFR-IFR
2. On control lock:
CAUTION
CONTROL LOCK
REMOVE BEFORE STARTING ENGINE

MCEMNE ARPWE FLIGHT WAL / 9 MRCH 1999
Mar 9/99 s14-7

3. On the fuel selector valve:

BOTH
88.0 GAL.
TAKEOFF LANDING
ALL FLIGHT ATTITUDES
FUEL
PUSH DOWN
ROTATE
LEFT RIGHT
44.0 GAL. 44.0 GAL
LEVEL FLIGH ONLY LEVEL FLIGHT ONL
OFF
COMBUSTIBLE
lOOLUIOO GRADO MINIMO COMBUSTIBLE DE AVIACION
CAPACIDAD 166 LTS. USABLE
CAPACIDAD 123 LTS. USABLE
HASTA LA PARTE INFERIOR DEL INDICADOR
DE TAPON DE LLENADO
5. On flap control indicator:
0'to 10' 140 KIAS (Partial flap range with dark blue color
code; also, mechanical detent at 10".)
10o to 20" 120 KIAS (Light blue color code; also

mechanical detent at 20')
20'to FULL 100 KIAS (White color code)

ARGEMINE AIRPUNE FLIGffi ffiNUAL / 9 MCH 1999
s14-8 Mar 9/99

CESSNA SECTIONg-SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 1825 SUPPLEMENT 14 - FAAAPPROVED
6. On baggage door:
54 KG MAXIMO.
EQUIPAJE DELANTE DE LA
PUERTA DE EQUIPAJE.
36 KG MAXIMO.
EQUIPAJE POSTERIOR A TRABA DE LA
PUERTA DE EQUIPAJE.
MAXIMO: 90 KG. COMBINADOS.

PARA INSRUCCIONES DE CARGA
ADICIONALES, VER DATOS DE PESO Y BALANCEO.
7. A calibration card must be provided to indicate the accuracy

of the magnetic compass in 30" increments.
L On the oil filler cap:
otL
9 QTS
9. Near airspeed indicator:

VITESSE INDIQUEE DE
MANOEUVRE - 110 KIAS
10. On the upper right instrument panel:
SMOKING PROHIBITED

MGEMNE AFPWE RIGtr MANUAL / 9 MHCH 1S9
Mar 9/99 s14-9

11. On auxiliary power plug door and second placard on battery

box:
PRECAUCION 24 VOLTIOS D.C.
ESTA AERONAVE ESTA EQUIPADA CON
ALTERNADOR Y SISTEMA A TIERRA NEGATIVO.
OBSERVAR POLARIDAD CORRECTA
POLARIDAD OPUESTA CAUS DAO
AL LOS COMPONENTES ELCTRICOS
CAUTION 24 VOLTS D.C.

THIS AIRCRAFT IS EQUIPPED WITH ALTERNATOR
AND A NEGATIVE GROUND SYSTEM.
OBSERVE PROPER POLARITY
REVEBSE POLARITY WILL DAMAGE ELECTRCAL
COMPONENTS.
12. On Upper Right Side of the Aft Cabin Partition:
TRANSMISOR LOCALIZADOR DE
EMERGENCIA INSTALADO
DETRS ESTA DIVISIN
DEBE CUMPLIR CON EL
DNAR PARTE 91.2O7
13. Near the fuel flow gauge:
MAXIMUM POWER FUEL FLOW
ALTTUDE FUEL FLOW

S.L. 20.5 GPH
2000' 19.0 GPH
4000' 17.5 GPH
6000' 16.5 GPH
8000' 15.5 GPH
10000' 14.5 GPH
1 2000' 13.5 GPH
original lssue - 9 t
""t 1:"n aRuNE F'cn MNUAL / e MF.H reee
""".
s14-10 Mar 9/99

SECTION 3
used for Argentine operation.
sEcTroN 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
There is no change to the airplane normal operating procedures
when used for Argentine operation.
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
There is no change to the airplane pedormance when used for
Argentine operation.

GEffiINE AIRPSE FUqT MANUAL / 9 CH 19S
Mar 9/99 514-11(S14-12 blank)

ATa)dron Company

CESSNA MODEL 182S

AIRPLANES 18280165 AND ON OR
AS MODIFIED BY MK182-22.01
SUPPLEMENT 15
BENDIX/KING KAP 140
2 AXS AUTOPILOT
J uemerofGAMA
copy*cHr @,ee7 1 Decgmbgr 1997

wrorrrn,xrusns,
Revision 1 - 31 December 1999
IB2sPHUS-slsoi S1S_l
SUPPLEMENT 15
BENDI)UKING KAP 140 2 AXIS AUTOPILOT
The following Log of Etfective Pages provides the date of issue
0 (Original) Dec. 1 ,1997

1 Dec. 31,1999
LOG OF EFFECTIVIW PAGES
PAGE DATE PAGE ATE
Title (S15-1) Dec 31/99 s15-17 Dec 31/99

s15-2 Dec 31/99 s15-18 Dec 31/99
s15-3 Dec 1/97 s15-19 Dec 31/99
S15-4 (blank) Dec 1/97 s15-20 Dec 31/99
s15-5 Dec 31/99 s15-21 Dec 31/99
s15-6 Dec 31/99 s15-22 Dec 31/99
s15-7 Dec 1197 s15-23 Dec 31/99
s15-8 Dec 1/97 s15-24 Dec 31/99
s15-9 Dec 1197 s15-25 Dec 31/99
s15-10 Dec'1197 s15-26 Dec 31/99
s15-11 Dec 1197 s15-27 Dec 31/99
s15-12 Dec 31/99 s15-28 Dec 31/99
s15-13 Dec 31/99 s1s-29 Dec 31/99
s15-14 Dec 31/99 s15-30 Dec 31/99
s15-15 Dec 31/99 s15-31 Dec 31/99
s15-16 Dec 31/99 s15-32 Dec 31/99
s15-2 Dec 31/99

SUPPLEMENT 15
BENDDUKING KAP 140 2 AXIS AUTOPILOT
EXCLUDING FLAP LIMITATIONS
Number rire ffi Ho*o,",,on ffi
Dec 1/97 S15-3/(S15-4 Blank)

SUPPLEMENT
BENDI)UKING KAP 14O2 AXIS AUTOPILOT
SECTION 1
GENERAL
The KAP 140, 2 Axis Autopilot provides the pilot with the
following features: Vertical Speed mode (VS); Altitude hold (ALT);
Wing Level (ROL); Heading select (HDG); Approach (APR); ILS
and Glideslope (GS); and backcourse
The optional <Rp l'0, 2 Axis Autopilotl
talled) adds Altitude Alerter and Altitudel
The KAP 14O, 2 Axis Aulopilot has an electric trim system which
provides autotrim during autopilot operation and manual electric trim
(MET) for the pilot when the autopilot is not engaged. The electric
trim system is designed to be fail safe for any single inflight trim
malfunction. Trim faults are visually and aurally annunciated.
A lockout device prevents autopilot or MET engagement until the

system has successfully passed preflight self test. Automatic
preflight self-test begins with initial power application to the
autopilot.
The following conditions willcause the Autopilot to disengage:
A. Electric Power failure.
B. lnternal Autopilot System failure.
Dec 31/99 s15-5

C. Pitch accelerations in excess of +1.49 or less than +0.69

I only when produced by a failure causing servo runaway. The
I pilot cannot maneuver the aircraft and trip the monitor.
D. Turn coordinator failure (flagged gyro).
E. Computer autopilot monitor that detects either the R (ROLL)

or P (PITCH) axis annunciator.
Activation of A/P DISC/TRIM INT control wheel switch will also

disconnect the autopilot.
The AVIONICS MASTER switch supplies power to the avionics

bus bar of the radio circuit breakers and the autopilot circuit
breaker. The AVIONICS MASTER switch also serves as an
emergency AP/MET shutoff .
The following circuit breakers are used to protect the KAP 140
2-Axis Autopilot:
LABEL FUNCTIONS
AUTO Pull-off circuit breaker supplies power to the KG

PILOT 140 Computer and the autopilot pitch, roll and
pitch trim servos.
WARN Supplies separate power for autopilot alerting

(PITCH TRIM) on the ship's annunciator panel.
s15-6 Dec 31/99

NAV/COMM 1
ELEVATOR
NAVIGATION
SoURcE 12
SELECTOR
SWITCH
ELEVATOR AND
ELEVATOR TRIM
EbiY,l$BLEVAToR
rNDtc119 1O''
ANNUNCIATOR
PANEL
DIRECTIONAL
GYRO
HE frLr f in?
45678fi+\*[
C I B o7as1o26
Figure 1. Bendix/King 2-Axis KAP 140 Autopilot Schematic

(Sheet 1 of 5)
Dec 1/97 s15-7

H E frLT P
T
]5n
FPM
1. PITCH AXIS (P) ANNUNCIATOR When illuminated,

indicates failure of pitch axis and will either disengage the
autopilot or not allow engagement of the pitch axis. ln
turbulent air, will illuminate during abnormal
ve rtical/acce e rations.
I
2. AUTOPILOT ENGAGE/DISENGAGE (AP) BUTTON -- When

pushed, engages autopilot if all preflight self-test conditions
are met. The autopilot will engage in the basic roll (ROL)
mode which functions as a wing leveler and the pitch axis
vertical speed (VS) mode. The commanded vertical speed will
be displayed in the upper right corner of autopilot display
area. The captured VS will be the vertical speed present at
the moment the AP button is pressed. The button may also
be used to disengage the autopilot.
3. ROLL AXIS (R) ANNUNCIATOR -- When illuminated, indicates
failure of the roll axis and disengages the autopilot.

s15-8 Dec 1/97

4. HEADING (HDG) MODE SELECTOR BUTTON When

pushed, will select the Heading mode, which commands the
airplane to turn to and maintain the heading selected by the
heading bug o e
selected at an o
the new head e
between HDG d
to engage the autopilot in HDG mode.
5. NAVIGATION (NAV) MODE SELECTOR BUTTON -- When

pushed, will select the Navigation mode. This mode provides
automatic beam capture and tracking of VOR, LOC, or GPS
signals as selected for presentation on the #1 CDl. NAV
mode is recommended for enroute navigation tracking.
6. APPROACH (APR) MODE SELECTOR BUTTON -- When

pushed, will select the Approach mode. This mode provides
automatic beam capture and tracking of VOR, GPS, LOC and
Glideslope (GS) on an lLS, as selected for presentation on #1
CDl. APR mode tracking sensitivity is recommended for
instrument approaches.
7. BACK COURSE APPROACH (REV) MODE BUTTON -- This

button is active only when the coupled navigation receiver is
tuned to a LOC/ILS frequency. When pushed will select the
Back Course approach mode. This mode functions identically
to the approach mode except that the autopilot response to
LOC signals is reversed. Glideslope is locked out with REV
mode.
8. ALTITUDE HOLD (ALT) MODE SELECT BUTTON -- When

pushed, will select the altitude hold mode. This mode
provides capture and tracking of the selected altitude. The
selected altitude is the airplane altitude at the moment the ALT
button is pressed. lf the ALT button is pressed with an
a 10"/" (of VS
established VS rate present, there will be about
rate) overshoot. The airplane will return positively to the
selected altitude. This button may be used to engage the
autopilot in the ALT mode.

Dec 1/97 s15-9

9. VERTICAL SPEED (UP/DN) MODE BUTTONS -- The action of

these buttons depends on the vertical mode present when
pressed. lf VS mode is active (AP plus any lateral mode) and
the UP button is pressed, the autopilot will modify the
displayed VS command (FPM) in the up direction. Single
momentary cycles on either the UP or DN button will
increment the VS command by 100 FPM per cycle. When
either button is continuously held in, it will modify the vertical
speed command by 300 fpm per second.
lf ALT mode is active, pressing the UP/DN buttons will modify

the captured altitude by 20 feet per cycle, or if held
continuously will command the airplane up or down at the rate
of 500 FPM, synchronizing the ALT reference to the actual
airplane altitude upon button release.
10. AUTO PILOT CIRCUIT BREAKER -- A 5-amp pull-off circuit

breaker supplying 28 VDC to the KAP 140 system.
11. WARN CIB -- Power to the autopilot disconnect horn and the
ship's annunciator panel (PITCH TRIM).
12. AUTOPTLOT DTSCONNECT (A/p D|SC/TR|M NT) SWTTCH --

When depressed will disengage the autopilot and interrupt
manual electric trim (MET) power. An autopilot disconnect will
be annunciated by a continuous 2 second tone accompanied
by a flashing "AP" displayed on the autopilot computer.
13. MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM (MET) SWITCHES -- When both

switches are pressed in the same direction, will activate pitch
trim in the selected direction. lf only one switch is moved, the
trim system will not operate. lf only the right half of the MET
switch assembly is held, simulating a stuck switch, for 3
seconds, the trjm monitorng system will detect a switch failure
resulting in a i annunciation on the autopilot dsplay and the
disabling of the electric trim system. lf the stuck switch is
corrected, the fault will clear, Use of manual electric trim
during autopilot operation will disengage the autopilot.

s15-10 Dec 1/97

14. OMNI BEARING SELECT (OBS) KNOB -- Selects the desired

course to be tracked by the autopilot. (Note: The HDG bug
must also be positioned to the proper course to capture and
track the selected radial or desired track).
15. HEADING SELECT KNOB (HDG) -- Positions the heading bug

on the compass card. Note that the position of the heading
bug also provides course datum to the autopilot when tracking
in NAV, APR, or REV (BC) modes. This is in addition to its
more intuitive use in the HDG mode.
16. PITCH TRIM (PT) Annunciator -- lndicates the direction of

required pitch trim. The annunciation will flash if auto trim has
not satisfied the request for trim for a period of 10 seconds. A
solid I without an arrowhead is an indication of a pitch trim
fault. Refer to the EMERGENCY PROCEDURES for proper
17. PITCH TRIM Annunciation -- llluminates whenever the

a pitch trim fault or the
automated preflight self test detects
continuous monitoring system detects a pitch trim fault in
flight. Refer to the EMERGENCY PROCEDURES for proper

Dec 1/97 s15-11

H E frLT f, '--nn @
@W@@E @
1. ROTARY KNOBS - Used to set the altitude alerter reference

altitude; or may be used immediately after pressing the BARO
button, to adjust the autopilot baro setting to match that of the
airplane's altimeter when manual adjustment is required. (ln
some systems, the baro setting may be automatically synched
to that of the altimeter.)
2. BARO SET (BARO) BUTTON -- When pushed and released,

will change the display from the altitude alefter selected
altitude to the baro setting display (either lN HG or HPA) for 3
held for 2 seconds, will change the
lN HG to HPA or vice versa. Once
is visible the rotary knobs may be
tting.
3. ALTITUDE ARM (ARM) BUTTON -- When pushed, will toggle

altitude arming on or off. When ALT ARM is annunciated, the
autopilot will capture the altitude alerter displayed altitude
(provided the aircraft is climbing or descending in VS to the
displayed altitude). ALT hold arming when the autopilot is
upon altitude alefter altitude selection
Note that the alerter functions are
ming process thus providing full time
autopilot is disengaged.
Figure 2. Bendix/King 2-Axis KAP 140 Autopilot with Altitude

Preselect, Operating Controls and lndicators (Sheet 1 of 2)
s15-12 Dec 31/99

4.ALTITUDE ALERTER/VERTICAL SPEED/BARO SETTING
NOTE
This display may be dashed for up to 3 minutes on start up
if a blind encoder is installed which requires a warm-up
period.

Figure 2. Bendix/King 2-Axis KAP 140 Autopilot with Altitude
Preselect, Operating Controls and lndicators (Sheet 2 ol2\
Dec 31/99 s15-13

sEcTroN 2
LIMITATIONS
The following autopilot limitations must be adhered to:
1. The entire preflight test procedure outlined under Section 4,

paragraph A of this supplement, including steps 1 through 7,
must be successfully completed prior to each flight. Use of
the autopilot or manual electric trim system is prohibited prior
to completion of these tests.
2. During autopilot operation, a pilot with seat belt fastened must

be seated at the left pilot position.
3. The autopilot must be OFF during takeoff and landing.
4. The system is approved for Category I operation only

(Approach mode selected).
5. Autopilot maximum airspeed limitation -- 160 KIAS.

Autopilot minimum airspeed limitation -- 80 KIAS.
6. Maximum flap extension -- 10o.

7. Maximum fuel imbalance with autopilot engaged -- 90 lbs.
8. The autopilot must be disengaged below 200 feet AGL during
approach operations and below 800 feet AGL for all other
phases of flight.
9. Overriding the autopilot to change pitch or roll attitude is

prohibited. (Disengage with A/P DISCR|M INT or AP select
button.)
10. The AUTO PILOT circuit breaker must be pulled following any
inflight illumination of the red "PITCH TRIM" warning light, but
only after first completing the Emergency Procedures (Section
3, paragraph 1.). The manual electric trim and autopilot
autotrim systems will be disabled with the AUTO PILOT circuit
breaker pulled.
l., u-,0 Dec 31/99

SECTION 3
The four step procedure listed under paragraph A should be
among the basic airplane emergency procedures that are committed
to memory. lt is important that the pilot be proficient in
accomplishing all four steps without reference to this manual.
1. ln case of Autopilot, Autopilot Trim, or Manual Electric Trim
malfunction (accomplish ltems A and B simultaneously):
A. Airplane Control Wheel -- GRASP FIRMLY and regain
aircraft control.
B. A/P DISC/TRIM INT Switch PRESS and HOLD
throughout recovery.
C. AIRCRAFT -- RE-TRIM Manually as Needed.
D. AUTO PILOT Circuit Breaker -- PULL.
NOTE
The AVIONICS MASTER Switch may be used as an I
alternate means of removing all electric power from the
autopilot and ms. lf necessary perform
steps 1A th then turn tre viot'llCS I
MASTER Sw ating and pulling the AUTO I
PILOT Circu the AVIONICS MASTER I
Switch on as soon as possible to restore power to all other
avionics equipment. Primary attitude, airspeed, directional
compass, and altitude instruments will remain operational at
alltimes.
[, wnnuno
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO RE.ENGAGE THE
AUTOPILOT FOLLOWING AN AUTOPILOT,
AUTOTRIM, OR MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM
MALFUNCTION UNTIL THE CAUSE FOR THE
MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN CORRECTED.
Maximum Altitude losses due to autooilot malfunction:
CONFIGURATION ALT. LOSS
Cruise, Climb, Descent 250 ft.
Maneuvering 100 ft.
Approach 50 ft.
Dec 31/99 s15-15


are presented to supply additional
of providing the pilot with a more
e recommended course of action for
an emergency situation.
1. An autopilot or autotrim malfunction occurS when there is an

uncommanded deviation in the airplane flight path or when
there is abnormal control wheel or trim wheel motion. ln some
cases, and especially for autopilot trim, there may be little to
no airplane motion, yet the red PITGH TRIM annunciator
(ship's annunciator panel) may illuminate and an alert tone
may sound.
The primary concern in reacting to an autopilot or autopilot
trim malfunction, or to an automatic disconnect of the
autopilot, is in maintaining control of the arplane. lmmediately
grasp the control wheel and press and hold down the A/P
DISC/TRIM INT switch throughout the recovery. Manipulate
the controls as required to safely maintain operation of the
airplane within all of its operating limitations. Elevator trim
should be used manually as needed to relieve control forces.
Locate and pull the AUTO PILOT circuit breaker on the
right hand circuit breaker panel to completely disable the
autopilot system.
2. A manual electric trim malfunction may be recognized by
illumination of the red PITCH TRIM annunciator, accompanied
by an alert tone, or by unusual trim wheel motions with the
autopilot OFF, without pilot actuation of the manual electric
trim switches. As with an autopilot malfunction, the first
concern following a manual electric trim malfunction is
maintaining control of the airplane. Grasp the control wheel
firmly and press and hold down the A/P DISC/TRIM INT
switch. Locate and pull the AUTO PILOT circuit breaker on
the right hand breaker panel.
l. ,u- ,u Dec 31/99

3. Note that the emergency procedure for any malfunction is

essentially the same: immediately grasp the control wheel
and regain airplane control while pressing and holding the A/P
DISCR|M INT switch down, and retrim the airplane as
needed. After these steps have been accomplished secure
the autopilot electric trim system by pulling the autopilot
(AUTO PILOT) circuit breaker. As with any other airplane
emergency procedure, it is important that the 4 steps of the
emergency procedure located'on Page 15 be committed tol
memory.
4. The AVIONICS MASTER switch may be used to remove all

electric power from the Autopilot and Electric Trim systems
while the circuit breaker is located and oulled. Return the
AVIONICS MASTER switch to the ON position as soon as
possible. With the AVIONICS MASTER switch off, all avionics
and autopilot equipment will be inoperable.
5. lt is important that all portions of the autopilot and electric trim
system are preflight tested prior to each flight in accordance
with the procedures published herein in order to assure their
integrity and continued safe operation during flight.
[, wnnurc
DO NOT RESET AUTOPILOT CIRCUIT BREAKER
FOLLOWING AN AUTOPILOT/AUTOTRIM OR
MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM MALFUNCTION UNTIL
THE CAUSE FOR THE MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN
CORRECTED.
A flashing auto trim annunciation on the face of the autopilot

indicates a failure of the auto trim function to relieve pitch seruo
loading in a timely manner. This condition should be temporary.
D
1. FLASHING i ANNUNCIATION -- OBSERVE aircraft pitch
behavior. lf pitch behavior is satisfactory, wait 5-10 seconds
for the annunciation to stop.
Dec 31/99 s15-17

2. lf annunciation continues, Airplane Control Wheel -- GRASP

FIRMLY, disengage the autopilot and check for an out of pitch
trim condition. Manually retrim as required.
3. AUTOPILOT OPERATION -- CONTINUE if satisfied that the
out of trim indication was temporary. DISCONTINUE if
evidence indicates a failure of the auto trim function.
A red P or R on the face of the autopilot computer.
1. A red P is an indication that the pitch axis of the autopilot has

been disabled and cannot be engaged. DO NOT ENGAGE
INTO A ROLL AXIS ONLY SYSTEM.
NOTE
lf the red P lamp was the result of some abnormal
accelerations on the airplane, the annunciation should be
extinguished within approximately one minute and normal
use of the autopilot will be reestablished.
2. A red R is an indication that the roll axis of the autopilot has
been disabled and cannot be engaged. The autopilot cannot
be reengaged.
Flashing mode annunciation in the display of the autopilot computer.
1. Flashing HDG -- lndicates a failed heading. PRESS HDG

button to terminate flashing. ROL will be displayed.
2. Flashing NAV, APR or REV -- Usually an indication of a
flagged navigation source. PRESS the NAV, APR or REV
button to terminate flashing. ROL will be displayed. (Select a
valid navigation source.)
NOTE
A flashing NAV, APR or REV annunciation can also be
caused by a failed heading valid input.
l., u-',, Dec 31/99

3. Flashing GS -- lndicaton of a flagged glideslope. (GS will re-

arm automatically if a valid GS signal is received.)
NOTE
To continue tracking the localizer, observe the appropriate
minimums for a nonprecision approach. (Press ALT twice in
rapid succession to terminate the flashing. Control the pitch
axis in the default VS mode.)
NOTE
At the onset of mode annunciator flashing, the autopilot has
already reverted to a default mode of operation, i.e., ROL
and or VS mode. An immediate attempt to reengage to lost
mode may be made if the offending navigation, glideslope
or compass flag has cleared.
EXCEPTION
The HDG annunciation will flash for 5 seconds upon
selection of NAV, APR, or REV modes to remind the pilot to
set the HDG bug for use as course datum.
Effects of instrument losses upon autopilot operation:
1. Loss of the afiificial horizon -- no effect on the autopilot.
2. Loss of the turn coordinator - autopilot inoperative.
3. Loss of the Directional Gyro (DG)-- The directional gyro doesl

not provide any system valid flag. lf the DG fails to function
properly the autopilot heading and navigation mode will not
function correctly. Under these conditions, the only useable
lateralmode is ROL.
4. Loss of Horizontal Situation lndicator (HSl) (if installed) -- lf the

HSI fails to function properly the autopilot heading and naviga-
tion mode will not function correctly. Under these conditions,
the only usable lateralmode is ROL.
5. Loss of Blind Altitude Encoder -- Altitude Alerter and Altitude

Preselect f unction inoperative.
Dec 31/99 s15-1 I

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A. PREFLTGHT (PERFORM pRtOR TO EACH FLTGHT):
1. AVIONICS MASTER -. ON.
2. POWER APPLICATION AND SELF TEST -- A self test is

performed upon power application to the computer. This test
is a sequence of internal checks that validate proper system
operation prior to allowing normal system operation. The
sequence s indicated by "p5" with an increasing number for
the sequence steps. Successful completion of self test is
identified by all display segments being illuminated (Display
Test), external "Pitch Trim" (4,/C System Annunciator Panel)
being illuminated, and the disconnect tone sounding.
NOTE
Upon applying power to the autopilot, the red P warning on

the face of the autopilot may illuminate indicating that the
pitch axis cannot be engaged. This condition should be
temporary, lasting approximately 30 seconds. The P will
extinguish and normal operation will be available.
l, wnnnnc
IF PITCH TRIM LIGHT STAYS ON, THEN THE
AUTOTRIM DID NOT PASS PREFLIGHT TEST.
THE AUTOPILOT CIRCUIT BREAKEB MUST BE
PULLED. MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM AND AUTO.
PILOT ARE INOPERATIVE.
3. MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM - TEST as follows: Press both

halves of the split Manual Electric Trim (MET) switches to the
nose down position, verify that the trim wheel and the trim tab
position indicator are moving in the down direction. Repeat
test for the nose up direction.
l'u-ro Dec 31/99

CESSNA SECION 9 - SUPPLEMENTS
Press MET for nose up trim, press and hold the AP

DISC/TRIM INT switch, verify that both the trim wheel and
indicator are not moving, release the A/P DISC / TRIM INT
switch while still holding MET trim up, the trim wheel and
indicator should continue to move in the nose up direction.
[ wnnunc
THE PILOT IN COMMAND MUST CONTINUOUSLY
MONITOR THE AUTOPILOT WHEN IT IS
ENGAGED, AND BE PREPARED TO
DISCONNECT THE AUTOPILOT AND TAKE
IMMEDIATE CORRECTIVE ACTION .. INCLUDING
MANUAL CONTROL OF THE AIRPLANE AND/OR
PERFORMANCE OF EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
IF AUTOPILOT OPERATION IS NOT AS
EXPECTED OR IF AIRPLANE CONTROL IS NOT
MAINTAINED.
[, wnnunc
DURING ALL AUTOPILOT COUPLED OPER.
ATIONS, THE PILOT IN COMMAND MUST USE
PROPER AUTOPILOT COMMANDS AND USE THE
PROPER ENGINE POWER TO ENSURE THAT
THE AIRPLANE IS MAINTAINED BETWEEN 80
AND 160 KIAS, AND DOES NOT EXCEED OTHER
BASIC AIRPLANE OPERATING LIMITATIONS.
Dec 31/99 s15-21

NOTE
Autopilot tracking performance will be degraded in turbu-

lence.
1. BEFORETAKEOFF:
a. A/P DISCR|M INT Switch -- PRESS.
b. BARO setting (if installed) -- CHECK.
1, cnunoru
CONTINUE TO SET MANUALLY THROUGHOUT
THE FLIGHT EACH TIME THE ALTMETER BARO
SETTING REOUIRES ADJUSTMENT. NO
FURTHER REMTNDERS (FLASH|NG) WILL BE
GIVEN.
c. ALTITUDE SELECT KNOB (if installed)

the desired altitude is displayed.
- ROTATE until
NOTE
An altitude alert is annunciated 1000 ft. prior to arrival at the

selected altitude. Aircraft deviations greater than 200 feet
above or below the selected altitude will produce an altitude
alert. The alert annunciation is accompanied by a series of
short tones.
2. AFTERTAKEOFF:
a. Elevator Trim - VERIFY or SET to place the airplane in a

trimmed condition prior to Autopilot engagement.
NOTE
a mistrim condition may cause

Engaging the autopilot into
unwanted attitude changes and a "TRIM FAIL"
annunciation.
b. Airspeed and Rate of Climb -- STABILIZED.
s15-22 Dec 31/99

NOTE
Avoid autopilot engagement into a climb condition that

either cannot be maintained, or is on the performance limits
of the airplane for its power and weight configuration.
c. AP Button -- PRESS. Note ROL and VS annunciator on. tf

no other modes are selected the autopilot will operate n
the ROL and VS modes.
wnnnrruc
[,
WHEN OPERATING AT OR NEAR THE BEST
RATE OF CLIMB AIRSPEED, AT CLIMB POWER
SETTINGS, AND US|NG VERTTCAL SPEED (VS)
MODE, CONTINUED OPEBATION IN VERTICAL
SPEED MODE CAN RESULT IN AN AIRPLANE
STALL. IF NECESSARY, DISCONNECT THE
AUTO PILOT AND RETURN THE AIRPLANE TO A
STABILIZED CLIMB PRIOR TO RE.ENGAGMENT.
[, wnnnrnc
WHEN OPERATING AT OR NEAR THE MAXIMUM
AUTOPILOT SPEED, IT WILL BE NECESSARY TO
REDUCE POWER IN ORDER TO MAINTAIN THE
DESIRED RATE OF DESCENT AND NOT EXCEED
THE MAXIMUM AUTOPILOT SPEED.
[, wnnrunc
DO NOT HELP THE AUTOPILOT OR HAND.FLY
THE AIRPLANE WITH THE AUTOPILOT
ENGAGED AS THE AUTOPILOT WILL RUN THE
PITCH TRIM TO OPPOSE CONTROL WHEEL
MOVEMENT. A MISTRIM OF THE AIRPLANE,
WITH ACCOMPANYING LARGE ELEVATOR
CONTROL FORCES, MAY RESULT IF THE PILOT
MANIPULATES THE CONTROL WHEEL
MANUALLY WHILE THE AUTOPILOT IS
ENGAGED.
Dec 31/99 s15-231

3. CLIMB OR DESCENT:
a. BARO setting (if installed) -- CHECK.
b. Using VerticalTrim:
1) VERTICAL SPEED Control -- PRESS either the UP or
DN button to select aircraft vertical speed within the
command limits of t2000 ft./min.
2) VERTICAL SPEED Control -- RELEASE when desired

vertical speed is displayed. The autopilot will maintain
the displayed vertical speed.
NOTE
Avoid selecting a climb rate that either cannot be
maintained or is on the performance limit of the airplane for
its power and weight configuration.
4. ALTITUDE HOLD:
a. Capture preselected altitudes (if installed):
1) ALTITUDE SELECT knob -- ROTATE until the desired
altitude is displayed. Note ARM annunciation occurs
automatically with altitude selection when the autopilot is
engaged.
2) ALTITUDE SELECT MODE (ARM) button -- PUSH to

alternately disarm or arm altitude capture.
3) Airplane -- ESTABLISH vertical speed necessary to

intercept the selected altitude.
NOTE
It may be possible to observe minor difference between the
autopilots' selected altitude and the aircraft altimeter after an
altitude capture. Not inputing the proper barometric setting
into the autopilot computer will produce inaccuracies.
s15-24 Dec 31/99

NOTE
Altitude preselect captures are not recommended on

nonprecision approaches to capture the MDA. Glideslope
coupling will preclude a preselect altitude capture on an
ILS.
b. Altitude (ALT) Hold Button:
1) ALT Hold Selector Button -- PRESS. Note ALT hold

annunciator ON. Autooilot will maintain the
altitude.
NOTE
It isrecommended by the FAA (4C00-248) to use basic

"PITCH ATTITUDE HOLD" mode during operation in severe
turbulence. However, since this autopilot does not use the
attitude gyro as a pitch reference, if is recommided that
the autopilot be disconnected and that the airplane be flown
by hand in severe turbulence.
c. Changing altitudes:
1) Using Vertical Speed (Recommended for altitude

changes less than 100 ft.)
a) VERTICAL SPEED Gontrol -- PRESS and HOLD

either the UP or DN button. Vertical Speed will seek
a rate of change of about 500 fpm.
b) VERTICAL SPEED Control RELEASE when

desired altitude is reached. The autopilot will
maintain the desired altitude.
NOTE
As an alternative, a series of quick momentary presses on

the UP or DN button will program either an increase or
decrease of the altitude reference, 20 feet each time the
button is pressed.
Dec 31/99 s15-25

SUPPLEMENT 15. FAA APPROVED MODEL 182S
5. HEADING HOLD:
a. Heading Selector Knob -- SET BUG to desired heading.
b. HDG Mode Selector Button -- PRESS. Note HDG mode
annunciator ON. Autopilot will automatically turn the
aircraft to the selected heading.
NOTE
Aircraft heading may change in ROL mode due to

turbulence.
c. Heading Selector Knob -- MOVE BUG to the desired

heading. Autopilot will automatically turn the aircraft to the
new selected heading.
6. NAV COUPLING:
I a. When equipped with DG:
I t) OBS Knob -- SELECT desired course.
I z\ NAV Mode Setector Button -- PRESS. Note NAVnn

annunciated.
I g) Heading Selector Knob -- ROTATE BUG to agree with

OBS course.
NOTE
When NAV is selected, the autopilot will flash HDG for S

OBS course. lF HDG mode was in use at the time of NAV
button selection, a 45' intercept angle will then be
s15-26 Dec 31/99

NOTE

the NAV button. The HDG bug must still be positioned to
agree with the OBS course to provide course datum to the
autopilot when using a DG (Directional Gyro).
a) lf the D-Bar is greater than 2 to 3 dots, the autopilotl

will annunciate NAVARM. When the computed
capture point is reached the ARM annunciator will go
out and the selected course will be automatically
captured and tracked.
b) lf the D-Bar is less than 2 to 3 dots, the HDG model

will disengage upon selecting NAV mode. The NAV
annunciator will then illuminate and the capture/track
b. When equipped with HSI:
1) Course Bearing Pointer - SET to desired course.
2) Heading Selector Knob -- SET BUG to provide desired

intercept angle and engage HDG mode.
3) NAV Mode Selector Button -- PRESS.
a) lf the D-Bar is greater than 2 to 3 dots, the au

will annunciate NAVARM. When the computed
capture point is reached the ARM annunciator will go
out and the selected course will be automatically
b) lf the D-Bar is less than 2 to 3 dots, the HDG mode

will disengage upon selecting NAV mode. The NAV
annunciator will then illuminate and the capture/track
Dec 31/99 s15-27

7. APPROACH (APR) COUPLING: (To enable glideslope cou-

pling on an ILS arid more precise tracking on instrument ap-
proaches).
a. When equipped with DG:

1) BARO setting -- CHECK (if installed).
2)' OBS Knob -- SELECT desired approach course. (For a

localizer, set it to serve as a memory aid.)
3) APR Mode Selector Button -- PRESS' Note APRpp

annunciated.
4) Heading Selector Knob -- ROTATE BUG to agree with

desired approach.
NOTE
When APR will flash HDG for 5

seconds to the HDG bug to the
approach co in use at the time of
Pn utton Pt angle will then be
NOTE

accom-plished by selecting ROL mode !B!QB to. pressing
tne APR button. The HDG bug must still be positioned to
agree with the desired approach cgu_rse to provide course
dtum to the autopilot when using a DG.
a)' lf the D-Bar is greater than 2 to 3 dots: the aulopilot

will annunciate APRIRM; when the computed capture
point is reached the ARM annunciator will..go out and
ihe selected course will be automatically captured
and tracked.
b)' lf the D-Bar is less than 2 to 3 dots: the HDG mode
will disengage upon selecting APR mode; the APR
-
annunciatr will illuminate and the capture/track
s15-28 Dec 31/99


1) BARO Setting (if installed) -- CHECK.
2) Course Bearing Pointer -- SET to desired course.
3) Heading Selector Knob -- SET BUG to provide

intercept angle.
4) APR Mode Selector Button -- PRESS.

a) lf the D-Bar is greater than 2 to 3 dots: the
will annunciate APRARM; when the computed
point is reached the ARM annunciator will go out
the selected course will be automatically
and tracked.
b) lf the D-Bar is less than 2 to 3 dots: the HDG
will disengage upon selecting APR mode; the
annunciator will illuminate and the
5) Airspeed MAINTAIN '100 KIAS minimum

coupled autopilot approaches (recommended).
8. BACK COURSE (REV) APPROACH COUPLING (i.e., reverse

localizer):
a. When equipped with DG:

1) BARO setting (if installed) -- CHECK. v I
2) OBS Knob -- SELECT the localizer course to the frontl
course inbound (as a memory aid).
3) REV Mode Selector Button -- PRESS. I
4) Heading Selector Knob -- ROTATE BUG to the headingl
corresponding to the localizer front course inbound.
Dec 31/99 s15-29

NOTE
When REV is selected, the autopilot will flash HDG for 5

the HDG bug to the
heading. lf heading
utton selection, a 45'
intercept angle will then be automatically established based
on the position of the bug.
NOTE

accomlished by selecting ROL mode PRIOR to pressing
the REV button. The HDG bug must still be positioned to
the localizer FRONT COURSE INBOUNP INBOUND cftdin$
heading to
provide course da-tLlrn to the autopilot when using a DG.
a)' lf the D-Bar is greater than 2 to 3 dots: the autopilot

will annunciate REVnnu; when the computed capture
ine selected back course will be automatically
b)' lf the D-Bar is less than 2 to 3 dots: the HDG mode

will disengage
-
upon selecting REV mode; the REV

1) BARO Setting (if installed) -- CHECK.
2) Course Bearing pointer -- SET to the ILS front course

inbound heading.
3) Heading Selector Knob - SET BUG to provide desired

intercept angle and engage HDG mode'
4) REV Mode Selector Button -- PRESS.
s15-30 Dec 31/99

a) lf the D-Bar is greater than 2 to 3 dots: the autopilot

will annunciate REVnnu; when the computed capture
the selected back course will be automatically
b) lf the D-Bar is less than 2 to 3 dots: the HDG mode

will disengage upon selecting REV mode; the REV
5) Airspeed MANTAIN 100 KIAS minimum during

autopilot coupled approaches (recommended).
9. GLIDESLOPE COUPLING
a. APR Mode -- ENGAGED, Note GSpy annunciated.
NOTE
Glideslope coupling is inhibited when operating in NAV or
REV modes. With NAV 1 selected to a valid lLS, glideslope
armed and coupling occurs automatically in the APR mode
when tracking a localizer.
b. At Glideslope centering -- note ARM annunciator goes out.

NOTE
Autopilot can capture glideslope from above or below the
beam.
c. Airspeed MAINTAIN 100 KIAS minimum during

autopilot coupled approaches (recommended).
Dec 31/99 s15-311

10. MISSED APPBOACH

a. NP DISCR|M INTER Switch - PRESS to disengage AP.
b. MISSED APPROACH - EXECUTE.
c. lf autopilot is desired:
1) Elevator Trim - VERIFY or SET.
2) Airspeed and Rate of Climb - STABILIZED.

NOTE
Avoid autopilot engagement into a climb condition that

either cannt be maintined, or is on the performance limits
of the airplane for its power and weight configuration'
3) AP Button -- PRESS. Note ROL and VS annunciators

on. lf no other modes are selected the autopilot will
operate in the ROL and VS mod-es. Verify that the
aircraft Vertical Speed lndicator (VSl) and the Autopilot
VS agree'
NorE
lf tracking the ILS course outbound as part.9l. lhe missed

approach procedure is desired, use the NAV mode to
prevent inadvertent GS couPling.
11. BEFORE LANDING

a. NP DISC/TRIM INT Switch -- PRESS to disengage AP.
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
There is no change to the airplane performance when the KAP
14O,2 Axis Autopilot is installed.
lr',u-., Dec 31/99

ATgIM Compeny

CESSNA MODEL 182S

AIRPLANES 18280687
AND ON
SUPPLEMENT 19
BENDI)UKING KLN 94
GLOBAL POSTTTONTNG SYSTEM (tFR)
Q n ^o"rofGAMA
coPYRtcHT @ 2ooo
CESSNA AIRCRAFTCOMPANY
6 November 2000
WICHITA, KANSAS, USA Revision 2 - 15 January 2001
1 s2SPHUS-S19-02 s19-1
SUPPLEMENT 19
BENDI)UKING KLN 94
GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (lFR)
0 (Original) November 6, 2000

1 December 18,2000
2 January 15,2001
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
Title (S1e-1) Jan 15/01 s19-10 Jan15/01

s19-2 Jan 15/01 s19-11 Jan 15/01
s19-3 Nov 6/00 s19-12 Jan 15/01
s19-4 Jan 15/01 s19-13 Nov 6/00
s19-5 Jan 15/01 s19-14 Nov 6/00
s19-6 Nov 6/00 s19-15 Nov 6/00
s19-7 Nov 6/00 s19-16 Nov 6/00
s19-8 Nov 6/00 s19-17 Nov 6/00
s19-9 Nov 6/00 s19-18 Nov 6/00
s19-2 Jan 15/01

SUPPLEMENT 19
BENDIVKING KLN 94
GLOBAL POSTTTONTNG SYSTEM (rFR)

Number Jue ffi P"oroo,"ton ffi
Nov 6/00 s19-3

SUPPLEMENT
BENDI)UKING KLN 94
GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (lFR)
SECTION 1
GENERAL
The KLN 94 GPS (Global Positioning System) is a three-

dimensional precision navigation system based on 24 earth orbiting
satellites. Receiver Autonomous lntegrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a
function that every |FR-certified GPS receiver must continuously
pedorm to assure position accuracy. RAIM is available when 5 or
more of these satellites are in view, or 4 satellites are in view and a
barometrically corrected altitude input from the airplane's altimeter
is made. Annunciation is provided if there are not enough satellites
in view to assure position integrity.
s19-4 Jan 15/01

The database card is an electronic memory containing

information on airports, navaids, intersections, DP's, STAR's,
instrument approaches, special use airspace, and other items of
interest to the pilot.
Every 28 days, Bendix/King receives new aeronautical database

informaiion fror .,leppesen Snderson for each database region. I
This information is processed and downloaded onto the database -
cards. Bendix/King makes these database card updates available
to KLN 94 GPS users.
[ cnunot
THE DATABASE MUST BE UPDATED ONLY
WHILE THE AIRCRAFT IS ON THE GROUND.
THE KLN 94 DOES NOT PERFORM ANY
NAVIGATION FUNCTION WHILE THE DATABASE
IS BEING UPDATED.
NOTE
A current database is required by regulation in order to

use the KLN 94 GPS system for non-precision
approaches.
Provided the KLN 94 navigation system is receiving adequate

usable signals, it has been demonstrated capable of and has been
shown to meet the accuracy specifications of: VFF/IFR en route
oceanic and remote, en route domestic, terminal, and instrument
approach (GPS, Loran-C, VOR, VOR-DME, TACAN, NDB, NDB-
DME, RNAV) operation within the U.S. National Airspace System,
North Atlantic Minimum Navigation Peormance Specifications
(MNPS) Airspace and latitudes bounded by T4 North and 60'
South using the WGS-84 (or NAD 83) coordinate reference datum in
accordance with the criteria of AC 20-138, AC 91-49, and AC 120-
33. Navigation data is based upon use of only the global
positioning system (GPS) operated by the United States.
Jan 15/01 s19-5

SUPPLEMENT 19. FAA APPROVED MODEL 182S
NOTE
Aircraft using GPS for oceanic IFR operations may use. the
KLN 94 to replace one of the other approved means of long
range navigtion. R single KLN 94 GPS installation may
als be usei on short ocanic routes which require only one
means of long-range navigation.
NOTE
FAA approval of the KLN 94 does not necessarily constitute

approvalfor use in foreign airspace.
NOTE
The KLN 94 is qualified for BRNAV (Basic Area Navigation)

operation in the European region -in accordance with the
ciiteria of AC 90-96. (Reference ICAO Doc 7030 Regional
Supplementary Procedures, JAA Technical Guidance Leaflet
nUizoXz anil Eurocontrol RNAV Standard Doc 003-93
Area Navigation Equipment Operational Requirements and
Functional Requirements (RNAV)')
s19-6 Nov 6/00

0585C r042
1. GPS MESSAGE (MSc) ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT -- MSG will

begin flashing whenever the message prompt (a large "M" on
the left side of the screen) on the KLN 94 GPS unit begins
flashing to alert the pilot that a message is waiting. Press the
Message (MSG) key on the GPS to display the message. lf a
message condition exists which requires a specific action by
the pilot, the message annunciator will remain on but will not
flash.
2. GPS WAYPOTNT (WpT) ANNUNCTATOR LtcHT -- GpS

WAYPOINT annunciator will begin to flash approximately 36
seconds prior to reaching a Direct-To waypoint. Also, when
turn anticipation is enabled in the KLN 94 GPS unit, the
annunciator will begin to flash 20 seconds prior to the
beginning of turn anticipation, then illuminate steady at the
very beginning of turn anticipation.
Nov 6/00 s19-7

[,wnnnrnc
TURN ANTICIPATION tS AUTOMATICALLY
DISABLED FOR FAF WAYPOINTS AND THOSE
USED EXCLUSIVELY IN DP/STARS WHERE
OVERFLIGHT IS REOUIRED. FOR WAYPOINTS
SHARED BETWEEN DP/STARS AND PUBLISHED
EN ROUTE SEGMENTS (REOUIRING
oVERFLIGHT lN THE DP/STARS), PROPER
SELECTION ON THE PRESENTED WAYPOINT
PAGE IS NECESSARY TO PROVIDE ADEOUATE
ROUTE PROTECTION ON THE DP/STARS.
3. GPS APPROACH (GPS, APR) SWITCH -- Pressing the GPS

APPROACH switch manually selects or disarms the approach
ARM mode and also canceis the approach ACTV mode after
being automatically engaged by the KLN 94 GPS !y-s!e1n'
- -color
The white backiroun of the GPS APPROACH
annunciator makes it visible in daylight.
4. ARM ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT ARM annunciator will
CDI scale until the airplane reaches the 30 NM point. The

approach ARM mode can also be disarmed by pressing the
GPS APPROACH switch.
5. ACTIVE (ACTV) ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT -- ACTV annunciator

will illuminate when the KLN 94 GPS system automatically
the
engages only
be-egaged aticJ
To cnel GPS
APPROAOH oach
ARM mode and illuminate the ARM annunciator.
s19-8 Nov 6/00

6. NAV/GPS SWITCH -- Toggles from Nav 1 to GPS and vice

versa to control the type of navigation data to be displayed on
the CDI (Course Deviation lndicator). The No. 1 CDI Omni
Bearing Selector (OBS) provides analog course input to the
KLN 94 in OBS mode when the NAV/GPS switch/annunciator
is in GPS. When the NAV/GPS switch annunciation is in
NAV, GPS course selection in OBS mode is digital through
the use of the controls and display at the KLN 94.
NOTE
Manual CDI course centering in OBS mode using the

control knob can be difficult, especially at long
distances. Centering the Course Deviation lndicator
(CDl) needle can best be accomplished by pressing the
Direct-To button and then manually setting the No. 1
CDI course to the course value prescribed in the KLN
94 displayed message.
NOTE
The Directional lndicator heading (HDG) bug must also

be set to provide proper course datum to the autopilot if
coupled to the KLN 94 in LEG or OBS. (When the
optional HSI is installed, the HSI course pointer provides
course datum to the autopilot.)
7. NAVIGATION SOURCE (NAV) ANNUNCIATOR -- The NAV

annunciator will illuminate steady to inform the pilot that NAV
1 information is being displayed on the NAV 1 CDl.
L NAVIGATION SOURCE (GPS) ANNUNCIATOR -- The GPS

annunciator will illuminate steady to inform the pilot that GPS
information is being displayed on the NAV 1 CDl.
Nov 6/00 s19-9

SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
2. Navigation is prohibited within 60 nautical miles of the North and

South Poles (i.e., at greater than 89" north and south latitude)'
3. IFR Navigation is restricted as follows:

a. The system must utilize ORS level 01 or later FAA approved
revision.
I O. fne data on the Self-Test page must be verified prior to use.
c. IFR en route and terminal navigation is prohibited unless the

pilot verifies the currency of the database or verifies each
selected waypoint for accuracy by reference to current
approved data.
d. lnstrument approaches must be accomplished in accordance

with approved instrument approach procedures that are
retrieved from the KLN 94 database. The KLN 94
aeronautical database must incorporate the current update
cycle.
I t) ffre KLN 94 Quick Reference, P/N 006-18228-0000,

Revision 1, dated August 2000 (or later applicable
revision) must be available to the flight crew during
instrument aPProach oPerations.
2) lnstrument approaches must be conducted in the approach

mode and RAIM must be available at the Final Approach
Fix.
s19-10 Jan 15/0:l

3) APR ACTV mode must be annunciated at the Final Ap-

proach Fix.
4) Accomplishment of lLS, LOC, LOC-BC, LDA, SDF, and

MLS approaches are not authorized.
5) When an alternate airport is required by the applicable
operating rules, it must be served by an approach based on
other than GPS or Loran-C navigation.
6) The KLN 94 can only be used for approach guidance if the
reference coordinate datum system for the instrument
approach is WGS-84 or NAD-83. (All approaches in the
KLN 94 database use the WGS-84 or the NAD-83 geodetic
datum).
e. For BRNAV operations in the European region:
available) or more satellites projected to be operational for
the flight, the aircraft can depart without further action.

available) or fewer satellites projected to be operational for
the flight, the availability of the GPS integrity (RAIM) should
be confirmed for the ntended flight (route and time). This
should be obtained from a prediction program run outside
of the aircraft. The prediction program must comply with
the criteria of Appendix 1 of AC90-96. ln the event of a
predicted continuous loss of RAIM of more than 5 minutes
for any part of the intended flight, the flight should be
delayed, cancelled, or rerouted on a track where RAIM
requirements can be met.
f. lf a 'RAIM NOT AVAILABLE' message is displayed in the en

KLN 94 or revert to an alternate means of navigation
appropriate to the route and phase of flight. When continuing
to use the KLN 94 lor navigation, position must be verified
every 15 minutes (or as required by applicable country's
operating rules) using another IFR approved navigation
system.
Jan 15/01 s19-1 1

NOTE
Honeywell's Preflight, Version 2.O or later computer based

predition program may be used for the RAIM prediction.
Alternate methods should be submitted for approval in
accordance with Advisory Gircular AC90-96.
It q.
- The aircraft must have other approved navigation equipment
appropriate to the route of flight installed and operational.
sEcfloN 3

procedures when the KLN 94 GPS is installed.
1. lf the KLN 94 GPS information is not available or invalid, utilize

remaining operational navigation equipment as required.
2. ll a "RAIM NOT AVAILABLE" message is displayed while

conducting an instrument approach, terminate the approach.
Execute a missed approach if required.
3. lf a "RAIM NOT AVAII-ABLE" message is dispfayed in the en

KLN 94 or revert to an alternate means of navigation appropriate
to the route and phase of flight. When continuing to use the KLN
I g+ for navigation, position must be verified every 15rules)
minutes (or
I as required by applicable country's operating using
another IFR approved navigation system.
4. Refer to the KLN 94 Pilot's Guide, Appendices B and C, for

appropriate pilot actions to be accomplished in response to
annunciated messages.
sl9-12 Jan 15/01

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
OPERATION
Normal operating procedures are outlined in the KLN 94 GPS

Pilot's Guide, P/N 006-18207-0000, dated September 2000 (or later
applicable revision). A KLN 94 Quick Reference, P/N 006-18228-
0000, dated August 2000 (or later applicable revision) containing an
approach sequence, operating tips and approach related messages
is intended as well for cockpit use by the pilot familiar with KLN 94
operations when conducting instrument approaches.
AUTOPILOT COUPLED OPERATION
The KLN 94 may be coupled to the KAP 140 autopilot by first

selecting GPS on the NAV/GPS switch. Manual selection of the
desired track on the pilot's DG heading bug is required to provide
course datum to the KAP 140 autopilot. (Frequent course datum
changes may be necessary, such as in the case of flying a DME
arc.) The autopilot approach mode (APR) should be used when
conducting a coupled GPS approach.
NOTE
NAV or APR coupled DME arc intercepts can result in

excessive overshoots (aggravated by high ground speeds
and/or intercepts from inside the arc).
APPROACH MODE SEQUENCING AND RAIM PREDICTION
[, mnnnc
FAMILIARITY WITH THE EN ROUTE OPERATION
OF THE KLN 94 DOES NOT CONSTITUTE
PROFICIENCY IN APPROACH OPERATIONS. DO
NOT ATTEMPT APPROACH OPERATIONS IN
lMc (TNSTRUMENT METEOROLOGTCAL
coNDrTtoNS) PR|OR TO
ATTA|N|NG
PROFICIENCY IN THE USE OF THE KLN 94.
Nov 6/00 s19-13

SUPPLEMENT 19 - FAA APPHOVED MODEL 182S
NOTE
The special use airspace alert will automatically be

disabled prior to flying an instrument approach to
reduce the potentialfor message congestion.
1. Prior to arrival, select a STAR if appropriate from the APT 7

page. Select an approach and an initial approach fix. (lAF)
irom tfre APT I page. The most efficient means of getting to
these pages s nitteO by pressing the PROC (PROCEDURE)
button on the KLN 94.
a. Press PROC button.

b. Select Approach, Arrival or Departure.
c. Select ttie airport from the list or enter the desired airpoft
identifier.
d. The APT 7 or APT I page will be displayed as appropriate.
NOTE
To delete or replace a DP, STAR or approach, select

FPL O page. Place the cursor over the name of the
proceduie,-press ENT to change it, or GLR then ENT to
delete it.
2. En route, check for RAIM availability at the destination airport

ETA on the OTH 3 page.
NOTE
RAIM must be available at the FAF in order to fly an

instrument approach. Be prepared to terminate the
approach upon loss of RAIM.
s19-14 Nov 6/00

3. At or within 30 nm from the airport:

a. Verify automatic annunciation of APRARM.
b. Note automatic GDI needle scaling change from +5.0 nm
1o +1.0 nm over the next 30 seconds.
c. Update the KLN 94 altimeter baro settng as required.
d. lnternally the KLN 94 will transition from en route to
terminal integrity monitoring.
4. Select NAV 4 page to fly the approach procedure.

a. lf receiving radar vectors, or need to fly a procedure turn or
holding pattern, fly in OBS until inbound to the FAF.
NOTE
OBS navigation is TO-FROM (like a VOR) without

waypoint sequencing.
b. lf receiving radar vectors, choose VECTORS as the lAF,

activate vectors when the first vector for the approach is
received and leave the unit in LEG mode.
c. NoPT routes including DME arc's are flown in LEG. LEG

is mandatorv from the FAF to the MAP.
NOTE
NAV or APR coupled DME arc intercepts can result in

excessive overshoots (aggravated by high ground speeds
and/or intercepts from inside the arc).
[, wnnnrnc
FLYING FINAL OUTBOUND FROM AN OFF-
AIRPORT VORTAC ON AN OVERLAY
APPROACH; BEWARE OF THE DME DISTANCE
INCREASING ON FINAL APPROACH, AND THE
GPS DISTANCE.TO.WAYPOINT DECREASING,
AND NOT MATCHING THE NUMBERS ON THE
APPROACH PLATE.
Nov 6/00 s19-15

5. At or before 2 nm from the FAF inbound:

a. Select the FAF as the active wavpoint, if not accomplished
already.
b. Select LEG operation.
6. Approaching the FAF inbound (within 2 nm):
a. Verify APR ACTV.
b. Note automatic CDI needle scaling change from +1'0 nm
to +0.3 nm over the 2 nm inbound to the FAF.
c. lnternally the KLN 94 will transition from terminal to
approach integrity monitoring.
7. Crossing the FAF and APR ACTV is q!annunciated:

a. Do not descend.
b. Execute the missed approach.
8. Missed Approach:
a.
b. Navigate to the MAP (in APR ARM if APR ACTV is nol
available).
NOTE
There is no automatic LEG sequencing at the MAP'
c. After climbing in accordance with the published missed

approach procedure, press the Direct To button, verify or
change the desired holding fix and press ENT.
s19-16 Nov 6/00

GENERAL NOTES
. The aeronautical database must be up to date for instrument
approach operation.
. Only gE approach can be in the flight plan at a time.
. Checking RAIM prediction for your approach while en route using
the AUX 3 page is recommended. A self check occurs
automatically within 2 nm of the FAF. APR ACTV is inhibited
without RAIM.
. Data cannot be altered, added to or deleted from the approach

procedures contained in the database. (DME arc intercepts may
be relocated along the arc through the NAV 4 or the FPL 0
pages).
. Waypoint suffixes in the flight plan:

i-- tAF
f-- FAF
m -- MAP
h -- missed approach holding fix.
.The DME arc IAF (arc intercept waypoint) will be on your present
position radial otf the arc VOR when you load the IAF into the flight
plan, or the beginning of the arc if currently on a radial beyond the
arc limit. To adjust the arc intercept to be compatible with a
current radar vector, bring up the arc IAF waypoint in the NAV 4
page scanning field or under the cursor on the FPL 0 page, press
CLR, then ENT. Fly the arc in LEG. Adjust the heading bug (if
autopilot coupled) and CDI course with reference to the desired
track value on the NAV 4 page (it will flash to remind you).
LefUright CDI needle information is relative to the arc. Displayed
distance is not along the arc but direct to the active waypoint. (The
DME arc radial is also displayed in the lower right corner of the
NAV 4 page.)
Nov 6/00 s19-17

The DME arc IAF identifier may be unfamiliar. Example: D098G

where 098 stands for the 098' radial off the referenced VOR,
and G is the seventh letter in the alphabet indicating a 7 DME
arc.
APRARM to APR ACTV is automatic provided that:
a. You are in APRRRM (normally automatic).

b. Y
c.
d.
e. Outside of the FAF,
f. lnbound to the FA.
9. RAIM is available.
Direct-To operation between the FAF and MAP cancels APR
ACTV. Fly the missed approach in APRAR.
Flagged navigation inside the FAF may automatically bring up

the message page stating:
PRESS PROC BUTTON NOW FOR NAVIGATION
Pressing the PROC button will usually restore navigation (not

guaranteed) by changing from APR ACTV to APR ARM. Fly the
missed approach.
The instrument approach using the KLN 94 may be essentially

automatic starting 30 nm out (with a manual baro setting update)
or it may require judicious selection of the OBS and LEG modes.
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
There is no change to the airplane performance when this avionics
equipment is installed. However, installation of an externally-
mounted antenna or related external antennas, will result in a minor
reduction in cruise pedormance.
s19-18 Nov 6/00

C182S Poh

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationManual of cessna

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

C182S Poh

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

C182S Poh

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Textr

AT THE TIME OF ISSUANCE, THIS

IT WILL NOT BE KEPT CURRENT AND,

CESSNA AIRCRAFT COMPANY

MAXIMUM USEFUL LOAD: 1 185 LBS

BAGGAGE ALLOWANCE: 2OO LBS

PER FOR MAN C E.SPECI FICATIONS

WING LOADING: Lbs/Sq Ft 17.8

The above performance figures are based on the indicated

Dec 1/97 iii/(iv blank)

Cessna Aircraft Company

THIS MANUAL INCORPORATES INFORMATION ISSUED

Nov 1/01 v/(viblank)

WEIGHT & BALANCE/EQUIPMENT LIST 6

ARPLANE & SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION 7

HANDLING, SERVICE & MAINTENANCE I

Feb 3/97 vii/(viiiblank)

Three View - Normal Ground Attitude 1-2

Nov 15/00 1-1

Figure 1-1. Three View - Normal Ground Attitude (Sheet 1 ol2)

1-2 Feb 3/97

NOTE 1: WING SPAN SHOWN WITH STANDARD STROBE

NOTE 2: NORMAL GROUND ATTITUDE IS SHOWN WITH

NOTE 3: WHEEL BASE LENGTH lS 661/z'.

NOTE 4: PROPELLER GROUND CLEARANCE IS 1O ".

NOTE 5: WING AREA IS 174 SQUARE FEET.

NOTE 6: MtNtMUM TURNTNG RADTUS (.ptVOT potNT TO

Figure 1-1. Three View - Normal Ground Attitude (Sheet 2 of 2)

Feb 3197 1-3

Section 1 provides basic data and information of general interest'

1-4 Dec 1197

Approved FuelGrades (and Colors):

lsopropyl alcohol or diethylene glycol monomethyl ether

To ensure maximum fuel capacity and minimize cross-

Nov 15/00 1-5

MIL-L-22851 Aviation Grade Ashless Dispersant Oil: Oil

Temperature MtL-L-6082 MIL-L-22851

{bove 27'C (80'F) 60 60

\bove 16"C (60"F) 50 40 or 50

1 "C (30'F) to 32"C (90'F) 40 40

3elow -12"C (10'F) 20 30 or 20W-30

When operating temperatures overlap, use the lighter grade

Sump: I U.S. Quarts

1-6 Nov 15/00

MAXIMUM CERTIFICATED WEIGHTS

Ramp Weight : 3110 lbs.

Weight in Baggage Compadment, NormalCategory:

Baggage Area A (Station 82 to 109): 120 lbs. See note below.

The maximum allowable combined weight capacity for

STANDARD AIRPLANE WEIGHTS

Standard Empty Weight: 1925 lbs. I

CABIN AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS

Detailed dimensions of the cabin interior and entry door openings

BAGGAGE SPACE AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS

Dimensions of the baggage area and baggage door opening are

Wing Loading: 17.8|bs./sq. ft.

Nov 15/00 1-7